HP
HEWLETT
PACKARD
HP Part No. 08568-90118
Prin ted in USA Septem ber 1993
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
@Copyright Hewlett-Packard Company 1993
All Rights Reserved. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without
prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the
copyright laws.
1212 Valley House Drive, Rohnert Park, CA 94928-4999, USA
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hewlett-Packard Company certifies that this product met its
published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory.
Hewlett-Packard further certifies that its calibration measurements
are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and
Technology, to the extent allowed by the Institute’s calibration facility,
and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards
Organization members.
This Hewlett-Packard instrument product is warranted against defects
in material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of
shipment. During the warranty period, Hewlett-Packard Company
will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be
defective.
Wa r r a n ty
For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a
service facility designated by Hewlett-Packard. Buyer shall prepay
shipping charges to Hewlett-Packard and Hewlett-Packard shall pay
shipping charges to return the product to Buyer. However, Buyer shall
pay all shipping charges, duties, and taxes for products returned to
Hewlett-Packard from another country.
Hewlett-Packard warrants t ha t its software and firmware designated
by Hewlett-Packard for use with an instrument will execute
its programming instructions when properly installed on that
instrument. Hewlett-Packard does not warrant that the operation
of the instrument, or software, or firmware will be uninterrupted or
error-free.
LIMITATION OF WARRANTY
The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from
improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer, Buyer-supplied
software or interfacing, unauthorized modification or misuse,
operation outside of the environmental specifications for t he
product, or improper site preparation or maintenance.
NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED.
HEWLETT-PACKARD SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
EXCLUSIVE RE ME DIE S
THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER’S SOLE AND
EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. HEWLETT-PACKARD SHALL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT,
TORT, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY.
.
.
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance
Assista n ce
agreements are available for
products.
any assistance, contact your nearest
Service
Sales and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following safety symbols are used throughout this manual.
Familiarize yourself with each of the symbols and its meaning before
operating this instrument.
Sa fety Sym bols
The caution sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure
which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in
damage to or destruction of the instrument. Do not proceed beyond a
caution sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and
met.
Cau t ion
The warning sign den otes a h azard. It calls atten tion to a
procedu re wh ich , if n ot correctly perform ed or adh ered to, cou ld
resu lt in in ju ry or loss of life. Do n ot proceed beyon d a warning
sign u n til th e in dicated con dition s are fu lly u n derstood an d m et.
Wa rn in g
Gen er a l Sa fety
Con sid er a tion s
Before this instrument is switched on, m ake su re it h as been
properly grou n ded th rou gh th e protective con du ctor of th e ac
power cable to a socket ou tlet provided with protective earth
con tact.
Wa rn in g
An y in terru ption of th e protective (grou n din g) con du ctor, in side
or ou tside th e in stru m en t, or discon n ection of th e protective
earth term in al can resu lt in person al in ju ry.
Th ere are m an y poin ts in th e in stru m en t wh ich can , if con tacted,
cau se person al in ju ry. Be extrem ely carefu l.
Wa rn in g
Cau t ion
An y adju stm en ts or service procedu res th at requ ire operation
of th e in stru m en t with protective covers rem oved sh ou ld be
perform ed on ly by train ed service person n el.
Before this instrument is switched on, make sure its primary power
circuitry has been adapted to the voltage of the ac power source.
Failure to set the ac power input to the correct voltage could cause
damage to the instrument when the ac power cable is plugged in.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Included with the HP Model
Spectrum Analyzer are three
HP
manuals: the Installation and Verification Manual, the Operating and
Programming Manual, and the Performance Tests and Adjustments
Manual.
Sp ectr u m An a lyzer
Docu m en t a t ion
Ou tlin e
General information, installation, specifications, characteristics, and
operation verification.
HP
In st allat ion
an d Verificat ion
Man u al
Manual and remote operation, including complete syntax and
command description. Accompanying this manual is the separate,
pocket-sized Quick Reference Guide.
HP
Operat in g
an d Program m in g
Man u al
Electrical performance tests and adjustment procedures.
HP
Perform an ce
an d
Adju st m en t s Man u al
RF Section service information.
HP
RF Sect ion
Trou blesh oot in g an d
Repair Man u al
IF-Display Section service information.
HP
IF-Display
Sect ion
Trou blesh oot in g an d
Repair Man u al
v i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Gen eral In form ation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
l-l
l-l
Introduction
. . . . . . . . .
Instruments Covered by this Manual
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation Verification
Option 462 Instruments
Option 857 Instruments
1-2
2. Perform an ce Tests
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verification of Specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Cycle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
2-2
2-3
Equipment Required
Test Record
1. Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
2-6
2-9
2. Frequency Span Accuracy Test
3. Sweep Time Accuracy Test
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
ms)
2-13
2-15
2-18
2-20
2-22
2-31
2-33
2-39
2-41
2-45
2-47
2-49
2-56
2-60
2-62
2-63
2-66
2-67
2-69
2-70
2-71
2-72
2-73
2-74
4. Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test
5. Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test
6. Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Test
7. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty Test . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
8. Frequency Response Test
9. RF Gain Uncertainty Test
10. IF Gain Uncertainty Test
11. Log Scale Switching Uncertainty Test . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
12. Amplitude Fidelity Test
13. Average Noise Level Test
14. Residual Responses Test
15. Spurious Responses Test
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16. Residual FM Test
. . . . . . . . .
17. Line-Related Sidebands Tests
18. Calibrator Amplitude Accuracy Test
19. Fast Sweep Time Accuracy Test
. . . . . .
ms) . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
20.
LO Output Amplitude Test
21. Frequency Reference Error Test
. . . . . . . . . .
2-19. Performance Test Record
Test 1. Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test . . .
. . . . . . . .
Test 2. Frequency Span Accuracy Test
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 3. Sweep Time Accuracy
. . . . . . .
Test 4. Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy
. . . . . . .
Test 5. Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity
Test 6. Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 7. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty Test
2-75
2-76
2-77
2-78
2-79
Test
.
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
Test 8. Frequency Response Test
Test 9. RF Gain Uncertainty Test
Test 10. IF Gain Uncertainty Test
Contents-l
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test 11. Log Scale Switching Uncertainty Test
. . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
2-82
2-83
2-84
2-85
2-86
2-87
2-88
2-89
2-90
2-91
2-92
Test 12. Amplitude Fidelity Test
Test 13. Average Noise Level Test
Test 14. Residual Responses Test
Test 15. Spurious Responses Test
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
Test 16. Residual FM Test
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test 17. Line-Related Sidebands Test
. . . . . . . . .
Test 18. Calibrator Amplitude Accuracy Test
Test 19. Fast Sweep Time Accuracy Test
. . . . .
ms)
. .
Test 20.
LO Output Amplitude Test
. . . . . . . .
Test 21. Frequency Reference Error Test
. . . . . . .
Adju stm en ts
3.
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjustment Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
3-2
3-2
Factory-Selected Components
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of Test Points and Adjustments
3-3
3-4
3-4
3-25
3-29
3-39
. . . . . . . .
1. Low-Voltage Power Supply Adjustments . . . . . .
2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN
2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN
3. Preliminary Display Adjustments (SN
and Below) . .
and Above) . .
and
3-45
Below) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Preliminary Display Adjustments (SN and
Above) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-52
3-59
3-61
3-65
3-69
3-72
3-77
3-84
4. Final Display Adjustments (SN
4. Final Display Adjustments (SN
and Below)
and Above)
.
.
5. Log Amplifier Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. Video Processor Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . .
7. 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments . . . . . . .
8. 21.4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments . . . . .
9. 3
Bandwidth Adjustments . . . . . . . . . .
10. Step Gain and 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator
3-87
3-92
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11. Down/Up Converter Adjustments . . . . . . . .
12. Time Base Adjustment (SN
32 and Above)
12. Time Base Adjustment (SN
and Below, also
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
to
3-95
3-99
3-103
3-107
3-110
13. 20 MHz Reference Adjustments . . . . . . . . .
14. 249 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustments
. . .
15. 275 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustment . . . .
16. Second IF Amplifier and Third Converter
3-112
3-116
3-119
3-123
3-130
3-133
3-136
3-139
3-142
3-145
3-150
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17. Pilot Second IF Amplifier Adjustments . . . . . .
18. Frequency Control Adjustments . . . . . . . . .
19. Second Converter Adjustments . . . . . . . . .
20. 50 MHz Voltage-Tuned Oscillator Adjustments
. .
2 1. Slope Compensation Adjustments . . . . . . . .
22. Comb Generator Adjustments . . . . . . . . . .
23. Analog-To-Digital Converter Adjustments . . . . .
24. Track and Hold Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . .
25. Digital Storage Display Adjustments . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low-Noise DC Supply
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
. .
. . . . . . . .
l-l. Service Accessories, HP Part Number 08568-60001
2-3
2-4
Center Frequency Accuracy Test Setup
. . . .
2-2. Center Frequency Readout Error Measurement
2-6
2-9
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3. Frequency Span Accuracy Test Setup
2-4. Sweep Time Accuracy Test Setup
2-5. Output Signal
2-6. Resolution Bandwidth Measurement
. . . . . . . . . . .
2-11
2-14
2-16
2-19
2-20
2-21
2-22
2-24
2-25
2-26
2-27
2-32
2-33
2-35
2-36
2-40
2-41
2-43
2-46
2-48
2-50
2-52
2-53
2-57
2-58
2-58
2-61
2-62
2-63
2-64
2-66
2-68
3-25
. . . . . . . . .
2-7. 60
Bandwidth Measurement
2-8. Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Measurement
2-9. Attenuator Switching Uncertainty Test Setup
2-10. Attenuator Switching Uncertainty Measurement
1. Frequency Response Test Setup (20 MHz to 1.5
2-12. Frequency Response Measurement (20 MHz to 1.5
. . .
. . . . .
. . .
.
.
2-13. Frequency Response Test Setup (100
to 20 MHz)
2-14. Frequency Response Measurement (100
to 20 MHz)
.
2-15. Frequency Response Test Setup (100 Hz to 100
2-16. RF Gain Uncertainty Measurement
2-17. IF Gain Uncertainty Test Setup
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
2-18. IF Gain Uncertainty Measurement
2-19. IF Gain Uncertainty Measurement (2
2-20. Log Scale Switching Uncertainty Measurement
. . . . . . .
. . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
2-21. Amplitude Fidelity Test Setup
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
2-22. Amplitude Fidelity Measurement
2-23. Average Noise Level Measurement
2-24. Residual Responses Measurement
2-25. Harmonic Distortion Test Setup
2-26. Intermodulation Distortion Test Setup
2-27. Intermodulation Distortion Products
2-28. Bandwidth Filter Slope Measurement
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-29. Slope Detected Residual FM
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
2-30. Peak-to-Peak Amplitude Measurement
2-31. Line Related Sidebands Measurement
2-32. Calibrator Amplitude Accuracy Test Setup
. . . . . .
. . . .
2-33. Fast Sweep Time Accuracy
ms Test Setup)
. . . . . . .
ms)
2-34. Fast Sweep Time Measurement
. . . . . . . . .
LO Output Amplitude Test Setup
2-35.
. . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency Reference Test Setup
. . . .
Low-Voltage Power Supply Adjustments Setup
3-2. IF-Display Section Low-Voltage Adjustments (SN
3-26
and Below) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3. IF-Display Section Low-Voltage Adjustments (SN
and Above) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-26
3-27
3-30
3-31
3-32
. . .
3-4. Location of RF Section Low-Voltage Adjustments
. . . . . . . . . . .
3-5. High Voltage Adjustment Setup
. . . . . . . .
3-6. Location of High Voltage Adjustments
3-7. Location of Label and Test Point . . . . . . . . . . .
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-8. Location of
3-9. CRT Cut-Off Voltage
3-10. Waveform at
3-11. Discharging the CRT Post-Accelerator Cable
3-12. High Voltage Adjustment Setup
3-13. Location of High Voltage Adjustments
3-14. Location of
3-15. Discharging the CRT Post-Accelerator Cable
Components . . . . . . . . . . .
3-34
3-35
3-36
3-38
3-40
3-41
3-42
3-44
3-46
3-47
3-47
3-48
3-49
. . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
Label and Test Point
. . . . . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . .
3-16. Preliminary Display Adjustments Setup
3-17. Location of
and
3-18.
and
Adjustment Locations
. . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-20. Composite X Deflection Waveform
3-19. X+ and X- Waveforms
. . . . . . . . . .
3-21. Rise and Fall Times and Overshoot Adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-49
3-51
3-53
3-54
3-54
3-55
3-56
Waveform
3-22.
3-23. Preliminary Display Adjustments Setup
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
3-24. Location of
3-25. Adjustment Locations
3-26. X+ and X- Waveforms
and
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-27. Composite X Deflection Waveform
. . . . . . . . . .
3-28. Rise and Fall Times and Overshoot Adjustment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-30. Location of Final Display Adjustments on
3-56
3-58
Waveform
3-29.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-60
3-61
3-62
3-65
3-66
3-69
3-70
3-72
and
3-31. Final Display Adjustments Setup
. . . . . . . . . . .
3-32. Location of Final Display Adjustments on
. . .
3-33. Log Amplifier Adjustments Setup
. . . . . . . . . .
3-34. Location of Log Amplifier Adjustments
. . . . . . . .
3-35. Video Processor Adjustments Setup
. . . . . . . . .
3-36. Location of Video Processor Adjustments
. . . . . . .
3-37. 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments Setup
3-38. Location of Center, Symmetry, and 10 Hz Amplitude
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-39. Location of 3 MHz Peak Adjustments
. . . . .
3-73
3-75
3-77
3-78
3-79
Adjustments
. . . . . . . . .
3-40. 21.4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments Setup
. . . .
21.4 MHz LC Filter Adjustments . .
3-41. Location of
3-42. Location of
3-43. Location of
Adjustments
3-44. Location of
21.4 MHz Crystal Filter Adjustments
21.4 MHz LC Filter and Attenuation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.4 MHz Crystal Filter Adjustments
3-80
3-81
3-85
3-45. Location of 3
Bandwidth Adjustments
. . . . . .
3-46. Step Gain and 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-87
3-88
3-89
Setup
3-47. Location of IF Gain Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .
3-48. Location of 10
3-49. Location of
Adjustments
Gain Step Adjustments
Gain Step, 18.4 MHz LO, and +
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . .
3-91
3-92
3-93
3-95
3-98
3-99
3-102
3-50. Down/Up Converter Adjustments Setup . . . . . . .
3-51. Location of Down/Up Converter Adjustments
. . . . .
3-52. Time Base Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-53. Location of Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .
3-54. Time Base Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-55. Location of Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-56. 20 MHz Reference Adjustments Setup . . . . . . . .
3-57. Location of 20 MHz Reference Adjustments . . . . .
3-103
3-104
3-106
3-107
3-108
3-110
3-58. Typical Signal at
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-59. 249 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustments Setup . .
3-60. Location of 249 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustments
3-61. 275 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustment Setup . . .
3-62. Location of 275 MHz PLO Adjustment . . . . . . . . 3-111
3-112
3-63. Second IF Amplifier Adjustments Setup . . . . . . .
3-64. Location of 301.4 MHz BPF and 280 MHz AMPTD
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114
14
3-65. 301.4 MHz
Filter Adjustment Waveform . .
3-66. Minimum Image Response at 258.4 MHz . . . . . . . 3-115
3-67. Pilot Second IF Amplifier Adjustments Setup . . . . . 3-116
3-68. Location of 269 MHz
3-69. 269 MHz
Filter Adjustments . . 3-118
Filter Adjustments Waveforms . . 3-118
3-70. Frequency Control Adjustments Setup . . . . . . . . 3-119
3-71. Location of Frequency Control Adjustments . . . . . 3-120
3-72. Second Converter Adjustments Setup . . . . . . . . 3-123
3-124
. . . . . . 3-127
3-127
. . . . . .
3-73. Location of Second Converter Adjustments . . . . . .
3-74. Typical PILOT
3-75. Typical PILOT
3-76. Typical
IF
IF
(SHIFT
(SHIFT
(SHIFT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128
3-77. Typical
(SHIFT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128
3-130
3-131
3-133
3-135
3-78. 50 MHz Voltage-Tuned Oscillator Adjustments Setup
3-79. Location of 50 MHz Adjustments . . . . . . . .
3-80. Slope Compensation Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . .
3-81. Location of TILT Adjustment . . . . . . . .
.
3-82. Slope Compensation Adjustment Waveforms . . . . . 3-135
3-136
3-137
3-139
3-140
3-142
3-143
3-145
3-146
3-147
3-147
3-150
3-151
4-3
3-83. Location of Comb Generator Adjustments . . . . . .
3-84. Comb Teeth Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-85. Analog-To-Digital Converter Adjustments Setup . . . .
3-86. Location of Analog-To-Digital Converter Adjustments .
3-87. Track and Hold Adjustments Setup . . . . . . . . .
3-88. Location of Track and Hold Adjustments . . . . . . .
3-89. Digital Storage Display Adjustments Setup . . . . . .
3-90. Location of Digital Storage Display Adjustments . . .
3-91. Sample and Hold Balance Adjustment Waveforms . . .
3-92. Waveform Before Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-93. Low-Noise DC Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-94. Crystal Filter Bypass Network Configurations . . . . .
Resolution Bandwidth Measurement . . . . . . . . .
4-4
4-2. Impulse Bandwidth Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8
4-3. 6
4-4. 60
4-5. 60
Resolution Bandwidth Measurement . . . . . .
Bandwidth Measurement . . . . . . . . . . .
Bandwidth Measurement . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11
4-14
4-17
4-25
4-28
5-2
6-4
6-5
6-6
4-6. Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Measurement . . .
4-7. Location of Bandwidth Adjustments . . . . . . . . .
4-8. Location of Bandwidth Adjustments . . . . . . . . .
5.1. Option 857 Amplitude Fidelity Test Setup . . . . . .
RF Section, Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2. RF Section, Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3. RF Section, Bottom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-4. IF Section, Top View (SN
6-5. IF Section, Top View (SN
6-6. IF Section, Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
and Below) . . . . .
and Above) . . . . .
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-10
6-7. IF Section, Bottom View . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2- 2
2 - 5
2- 7
Performance Test Cross-Reference . . . . . . . . . .
2-2. Center Frequency Readout Error Test Record . . . . .
2-3. Wide Span Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4. Span Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2- 8
2- 11
2- 12
2-5. Sweep Time Accuracy, Sweep Times
2-6. Sweep Time Accuracy, Sweep Times
2-7. Sweep Time Accuracy, Sweep Times
ms . . . . .
. . . . . .
ms (Alternate
2- 12
2- 14
2- 17
2-19
2-21
2- 35
2- 36
2- 38
2- 40
2- 42
2- 44
2- 65
3- 3
Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-8. Bandwidth Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-9. Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity . . . . . . . . . .
2-10. Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . .
2-11. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty . . . . . . .
2-12. IF Gain Uncertainty, 10
2-13. IF Gain Uncertainty, 2
2-14. IF Gain Uncertainty, 0.1
Steps . . . . . . . . . .
Steps . . . . . . . . . . .
Steps . . . . . . . . . .
2-15. Log Scale Switching Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . .
2-16. Log Amplitude Fidelity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17. Linear Amplitude Fidelity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-18. Fast Sweep Time Accuracy
ms) . . . . . . . . .
3-1. Adjustment Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2. Adjustable Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3. Factory-Selected Components . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4. Standard Value Replacement Capacitors . . . . . . .
3-5. Standard Value Replacement 0.125 Resistors . . . . .
3-6. Standard Value Replacement 0.5 Resistors . . . . . .
3.5. Initial Adjustment Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6. Initial Adjustment Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7. Parts for Low-Noise DC Supply . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8. Crystal Filter Bypass Network Configuration for
3- 5
3- 13
3- 20
3- 21
3- 23
3- 59
3- 62
3- 150
3- 151
and
(21.4 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9. Crystal Filter Bypass Network Configuration for
(3 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3- 151
4 - 3
6
Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy . . . . . . . .
4 - 8
4-2. Impulse Bandwidth Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 - 9
4-3. 6
4-4. 6
Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy . . . . . . . .
Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity . . . . . . . .
4- 12
4- 15
4- 17
5 - 4
4-5. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity . . . .
4-6. Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . .
Log Amplitude Fidelity (10 Hz RBW; Option 857) . . .
5 - 5
5 - 6
5-2. Log Amplitude Fidelity (10
5-3. Linear Amplitude Fidelity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RBW; Option 857) . .
Cont e nt s - E
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This HP
Tests and Adjustments Manual contains two sections:
In tr od u ction
Performance Tests and Adjustments Procedures. The Performance
Tests provided should be performed for the following reasons:
If the test equipment for the Operation Verification Program is not
available.
n
If the instrument does not pass all of the Operation Verification
tests.
For complete verification of specifications not covered by the
Operation Verification program.
The adjustment procedures should be performed for the following
reasons:
If the results of a performance test are not within the specifications.
After the replacement of a part or component that affects electrical
performance.
Th e adju stm en t procedu res requ ire access to th e in terior of th e
in stru m en t an d th erefore sh ou ld on ly be perform ed by qu alified
service person n el. Th ere are voltages at m an y poin ts in th e
in stru m en t wh ich can , if con tacted, cau se person al in ju ry. Be
extrem ely carefu l. Adju stm en ts sh ou ld be perform ed on ly by
train ed service person n el.
Wa rn in g
Power is still applied to th is in stru m en t with th e LINE switch in
STANDBY. Th ere is n o OFF position on th e LINE switch . Before
rem ovin g or in stallin g an y assem bly or prin ted circu it board,
rem ove th e power cord from th e rear of both in stru m en ts an d
wait for th e MAINS in dicators (red
to go com pletely ou t.
Capacitors in side th e in stru m en t m ay still be ch arged even if th e
in stru m en t h as been discon n ected from its sou rce of power.
Use a n on -m etallic tu n in g tool wh en ever possible.
This manual contains procedures for testing and adjusting HP
Spectrum Analyzers, including those with Option 001 (75 Ohm RF
INPUT), Option 400 (400 Hz operation), Option 462, and Option 857
installed. The procedures in this manual can also be used to adjust HP
Spectrum Analyzers that have been converted into HP
In st ru m en t s Covered
by t h is Man u al
Spectrum Analyzers through the installation of an HP
Kit (formerly HP Retrofit Kit).
Retrofit
General Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A high confidence level in the instrument’s operation can be achieved
by running only the Operation Verification Program, since it tests
most of the instrument’s specifications. It is recommended that the
Operation Verification Program be used for incoming inspection and
after repairs, since it requires much less time and test equipment.
A description of the program can be found in the Installation and
Verification manual.
Operat ion Verificat ion
Option 462 instruments require that the performance tests and
adjustment procedures listed below be performed instead of their
standard versions included in chapters two and three. Information on
Option 462 versions are located in Chapter 4, Option 462.
Opt ion 4 6 2
In st ru m en t s
6
Bandwidths:
Test 4, 6
Test 5, 6
Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test
Resolution Selectivity Test
Adjustment 9, 6
Bandwidth Adjustments
Impulse Bandwidths:
Test 4, Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test
Test 5, Impulse and Resolution Selectivity Test
Test 6, Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty
Test
Adjustment 9, Impulse Bandwidth Adjustments
Option 857 instruments require that the performance test procedure
listed below be performed instead of the standard version included in
Chapter 2. Information on Option 857 is located in Chapter 5, Option
857.
Opt ion 8 5 7
In st ru m en t s
Test 12, Option 857 Amplitude Fidelity Test
General Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
l-l. Recom m en ded Test Equ ipm en t (1 of 5)
Critical Specification s for
In stru m en t
Equ ipment Su bstitu tion
Model
Test
X
SIGNAL
SOURCES
Synthesized
Sweeper
Frequency: 10 MHz to 1500 MHz
Output Power: + 10 maximum (leveled)
Aging Rate:
Spurious Signals:
HP
x
Amplitude Modulation: dc to 100
Leveling: Internal, External Power Meter
X
X
Signal
Generator
Frequency: 20 MHz to 450 MHz
HP
HP
SSB Phase Noise:
below carrier at
20
Stability:
(HP
away
min.
may be substituted)
X
Frequency: 200 Hz to 80 MHz
Frequency
Synthesizer Stability: 1 x
Amplitude Range: + 13 to -86
with 0.01
resolution
Attenuator Accuracy:
(+ 13 to -47
X
X
X
HP
HP
HP
Pulse
Generator
Pulse Width: 10 nsec to 250 nsec
Rise and Fall Times:
Output Level: +
nsec
X
X
Output: Sine Wave and Triangle Wave,
Range: 100 Hz to 500 (Sweep Function Available)
Function
Generator
Frequency Output: 1, 2, 5, or 10 MHz
Standard
Accuracy:
x
Aging Rate:
x
General Information 1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
l-l. Recom m en ded Test Equ ipm en t (2 of 5)
Critical Specification s for
Equ ipment Su bstitu tion
In stru m en t
Recom m en ded
Model
Adj.
X
Test
ANALYZERS
Spectrum
Frequency: 100 Hz to 2.5
HP
Analyzer
2 to 22
Preselected
RF Spectrum Analyzer
X
Spectrum
Analyzer
Frequency: 9
to 1.8
High Frequency Probe
10 MHz-l10
HP
X
X
AC Probe
HP 8757E
Scalar
Network
Analyzer
Detector
(2 required)
HP
HP
X
X
Compatible with HP 8757E
COUNTERS
Frequency: 10 MHz to 18
Sensitivity: -30
Frequency
Counter
HP-IB Compatible
(HP
may be substituted)
HP
HP
X
X
Electronic
Counter
Range:
Resolution: 2 x
Ext. Time Base: 1, 2, 5, or 10 MHz
Frequency: dc to 100 MHz
Time Interval A
Sensitivity: 50
MHz
gate time
j = Universal
Counter
B: 100 nsec to 200
rms
p-p
Range: 30
to
OSCILLOSCOPE
HP
HP
Digitizing OSCOPE, 4 Channel
Frequency: 100 MHz
Sensitivity:
Oscilloscope
10: 1 Divider, compatible with oscilloscope
Probe
General Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
l-l. Recom m en ded Test Equ ipm en t (4 of 5)
In stru m en t
Critical Specification s for
Equ ipment Su bstitu tion
Recom m en ded
Model
Perf.
Test
ATTENUATORS
(Con t’d)
20
200 Hz to 18
N Connectors
HP
Option 020
Attenuator
TERMINATIONS
Termination
HP
Impedance: 500; BNC
X
Low-Pass
Filter
Telonic
Cut-off Frequency:
MHz and
MHz
at 1750 MHz
X
X
Low-Pass
Filter
Frequency: 300 MHz
HP 0955-0455
HP 0955-0306
Cut-off Frequency: 50 MHz
Low-Pass
Filter
MISCELLANEOUS
DEVICES
Power
X
1 MHz to 1500 MHz
backing:
HP
HP
X
X
Splitter
Directional
Bridge
SPECIAL
DEVICES
X
for preliminary display adjustments
Display
Adjustment
PC Board
X
X
Low-Noise
DC Supply
to Figure 70
(Optional)
Crystal Filter
Bypass Network
(4 required)
to Figure 71
General Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
l-l. Recom m en ded
Equ ipm en t (5 of 5)
In stru m en t
CABLES
Critical Specification s for
Equ ipment Su bstitu tion
Recom m en ded Perf. Adj
Mod el
Cable Assembly Frequency Range: 200 Hz to 22
APC 3.5 Male Connectors
HP 8120-4921
X
X
Length: 91 cm (36 inches)
SWR:
at 22
Cable
BNC, 122 cm (48 in.) (3 required)
x
x
Test Cable *
Test Cable
Test Cable
ADAPTERS
Adapter
Adapter
Adapter
Adapter
Adapter
Adapter
Adapter
Adapter
BNC (m) to SMB Snap-On (f)
SMA (m) to SMA (m)
SMA (m) to SMA (m)
HP 85680-60093
HP 85680-20094
HP5061-5458
X
X
X
X
Type N (f) to BNC (m)
Type N (m) to BNC (m)
Tee, SMB Male Connectors
Type N (m) to N (m)
HP1250-0077 X
HP1250-0082 X
HP 1250-0670
HP1250-0778 X
HP1250-0780 X
HP1250-0781 X
HP1250-1250 X
HP1250-1474 X
HP1250-1749 X
HP 1250-1745
X
Type N (m) to BNC
BNC Tee (m) (f) (f)
Type N (m) to SMA (f)
Type N (f) to BNC
(f) to
required)
required)
(f)
Adapter
Adapter
(f) TO N
required)
BOARD
EXTENDERS
X
X
X
X
Extender *
required)
PC Board: 36 contacts;
2 rows of 18
HP 08505-60042
HP 08505-60041
HP 85680-60028
PC Board: 30 contacts;
2 rows of 15
Extender *
required)
Extender *
PC Board: 20 contacts;
2 rows of 10
Extender *
required)
PC Board: 12 contacts;
2 rows of 6
HP 03950-4001
PC Board extracting tool
PC Board
Extractor
* Part of Service Accessories
General Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HP Part Nu m ber
85680-60028
85680-60093
85662-60088
08505-60041
08505-60109
85680-60034
08505-60042
Description
Extender Board: 20 contacts;
2
rows of 10
Cable:
long; BNC to SMB snap-on
PC Board: Display Adjustment Test
Extender Board: 30 contacts;
Extender Board: 12 contacts;
Extender Board: 50 contacts;
Extender Board: 36 contacts;
2
2
2
2
rows of 15
rows of
6
rows of 25
rows of 18
Figu re l-l. Service Accessories, HP Part Nu m ber 08568-60001
General Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The procedures in this section test the instrument’s electrical
performance using the Specifications in the Installation and
Verification Manual as the performance standards. None of the
tests require access to the interior of the instrument. The manual
Performance Tests provided in this section should be performed only
if semi-automatic test equipment (for Operation Verification) is not
available or the Performance Test is not in the Operation Verification
Program. (Refer to the Installation and Verification Manual for
information on Operation Verification.)
In tr od u ction
When a complete verification of specifications is required, proceed as
follows:
Verificat ion of
Specificat ion s
1. Run the Operation Verification Program.
2. The Operation Verification Program verifies compliance with
specifications of all tests it performs. The tests not performed by
the Operation Verification Program must be done manually and are
as follows:
n
Center Frequency Readout Accuracy
Spurious Responses
n
Fast Sweep Time Accuracy
LO Output Amplitude Responses
Frequency Reference Error
n
n
If the results of a performance test are marginally within
specification, go to the Adjustments section of this manual and
perform the related adjustment procedures. When an adjustment is
directly related to a performance test, the adjustment procedure is
referenced under RELATED ADJUSTMENT in the performance test.
This instrument requires periodic verification of performance. The
instrument should have a complete verification of specifications at
least every six months.
Calibrat ion Cycle
Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Equipment required for the manual performance tests and
adjustments is listed in 2-1, Recommended Test Equipment,
Equ ipm en t Requ ired
at the beginning of this manual. Any equipment that satisfies the
critical specifications given in the list may be substituted for the
recommended model.
The Operation Verification Program provides a detailed test record
when a printer is used with the controller. If manual performance
tests are done, results of the performance tests may be tabulated in
Test Record
the HP
HP
Performance Test Record at the end of this section. The
Performance Test Record lists all of the tested specifications
and the acceptable ranges for the measurement values obtained
during the tests.
Allow
Performance Tests.
warm-up time for the HP
before beginning the
Not e
2-1. Perform an ce Test Cross-Referen ce
Fu n ction or Ch aracteristic Tested Test
No.
Perform ance Test
1
2
Center Frequency Readout
Frequency Spans
Sweep Time Accuracy
Bandwidths
Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test
Frequency Span Accuracy Test
ms)
3
Sweep Time Accuracy Test
4
Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test
Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test
Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Test
Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty
Frequency Response Test
5
Bandwidth Shape
Bandwidth Amplitudes
Input Attenuator
Frequency Response
RF Gains
6
7
8
9
RF Gain Uncertainty Test
10
11
IF Gains
IF Gain Uncertainty Test
Log Scales Accuracy
Log Scale Switching Uncertainty Test
Log and Linear Amplifier Fidelity
Noise Floor
12 Amplitude Fidelity Test
13
Average Noise Level Test
14 Residual Responses Test
15 Spurious Responses Test
16 Residual FM Test
Residual Responses
Spurious Responses
Residual FM
17 Line-Related Sidebands Test
Line-Related Sidebands
CAL OUTPUT Level
Fast Sweep Times
18
19
20
21
Calibrator Amplitude Accuracy Test
Fast Sweep Time Accuracy Test
LO OUTPUT Amplitude Test
LO OUTPUT Amplitude
Frequency Reference
Frequency Reference Error Test
2-2 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Cen ter Frequ en cy Readou t Accu racy
1. Cen ter
F r equ en cy Rea d ou t
Accu r a cy
Frequency Control Adjustments
Relat ed Adju st m en t s
Time Base Adjustment
Step Gain and 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments
50 MHz Voltage-Tuned Oscillator Adjustments
(uncorrected)
Specificat ion
Descript ion
of frequency span + frequency reference error x tune frequency
of resolution bandwidth setting + 10 Hz) in AUTO resolution
bandwidth after adjusting FREQ ZERO at stabilized temperature.
A synthesized signal source that is phase-locked to a known frequency
standard is used to input a signal to the analyzer. The frequency
readout of the analyzer is compared to the actual input frequency
for several different frequency settings over the analyzer’s range.
The signal source is phase-locked to a standard known to be as
accurate as the analyzer’s internal frequency reference to minimize
the “frequency reference error x center frequency” term of the
specification.
STANDARD
ANALYZER
SYNTHESIZED
INPUT
ADAPTER
Figu re 2-1. Cen ter Frequ en cy Accu racy
Setu p
Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Cen ter Frequ en cy Readou t Accu racy Test
Synthesized Sweeper
Frequency Standard . 10 MHz standard,
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
HP
Equ ipm en t
within 1 part in
e.g. HP
Adapter, Type
N
(m) to SMA (f)
.
.
.
HP1250-1250
61 cm (24 in.) Cable Assembly, SMA Male Connectors HP 5061-1086
Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2.
Pr o c e d u r e 1 .
2. Press
on the analyzer.
Adjust FREQ ZERO for a maximum amplitude trace.
3.
4. Press
Set the synthesized sweeper for a 100.000 MHz signal at a level of
5.
approximately 0
Connect equipment as shown in Figure
6.
7. Set analyzer
synthesized sweeper frequency according to Table 2-2. At each
to center the signal. Adjust
LEVEL) as necessary to place signal peak at a convenient
FREQUENCY) and [FREQUENCY SPAN) and
setting, press [PEAK
level.
Record the CENTER readout frequency in the table for each
setting. The limits for this frequency are given in the table. See
Figure 2-2.
Figu re 2-2. Cen ter Frequ en cy Readou t Error Measu rem en t
2-4 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Cen ter Frequ en cy Readou t Accu racy
Spectrum analyzer center frequency readout can fall outside of
specified limits if 10 MHz frequency reference has not been calibrated
within the past year. To eliminate “frequency reference error x
tune frequency” term, substitute spectrum analyzer 10 MHz FREQ
REFERENCE rear panel output for frequency standard and repeat
test.
Not e
2-2. Cen ter Frequ en cy Readou t Error
Record
Spectru m An alyzer
I
Center Readou t
Mea su red
Max
102
Min
98
100 MHz
100 MHz
100 MHz
10 MHz
10 MHz
10 MHz
10 MHz
1 MHz
100
100
500
1000
100
502
1002
100.2
500.2
1000.2
1500.2
1000.02
1000.002
1000.0002
498
998
99.8
499.8
999.8
1499.8
999.98
999.998
999.9998
500
1000
1500
1000
1000
1000
10
Performance Tests 2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. F r equ en cy Sp a n
Accu r a cy
Frequency Control Adjustments
Relat ed Adju st m en t s
50 MHz Voltage-Tuned Oscillator Adjustments
Specificat ion
Un certain ty
Sp a n
MHz
of the actual frequency
separation between two points
of span setting)
of the actual frequency
separation between two points
of span setting)
MHz
Frequency Span accuracy is determined by measuring a frequency at
5% of sweep and then at 95% of sweep. These frequencies correspond
to half a division from each edge of the CRT.
De s c rip t ion
The spans chosen are based on the architecture of the HP
hardware:
RF
Assem bly Bein g Swept
Span
200 Hz
Oscillator (low divide)
Oscillator (low divide)
100
Oscillator (high divide)
Oscillator (high divide)
FM Coil of Yig Oscillator
FM Coil of Yig Oscillator
Main Coil of Yig Oscillator
Main Coil of Yig Oscillator
100.1
1 MHz
1.01 MHz
20 MHz
20.1 MHz
1.5
Figu re 2-3. Frequ en cy Span Accu racy Test Setu p
Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Frequ en cy Span Accu racy Test
Synthesized Sweeper .....................................................................
AdapterTypeN(m) to SMA(f).................................................1250-1250
Cable;SMAconnectors....................................................................
Equ ipm en t
Procedu re
Cable; BNC122cm(48in)............................................................HP10503A
1. Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2-3.
2. Press
on analyzer.
3. Press [CENTER FREQUENCY] 100 MHz, [FREQUENCY
Hz.
4. Connect synthesized sweeper tot spectrum analyzer RF input 2.
5. On synthesized sweeper, select external REFERENCE and key in
0
6. Press
and key in 99.999 910 MHz.
7. Press MARKER [PEAK SEARCH) on spectrum analyzer and record
marker reading under FREQ C of 2-3.
8. Set synthesized sweeper frequency to 100.000 090 MHz.
9. Press MARKER [PEAK SEARCH] and record marker reading under
FREQ D of Table 2-3.
10. Repeat the span measurement procedure of steps 6 through 9 for
each frequency span listed in
11. Determine the frequency difference between the two measured
points. Enter this value under the A DUT column in 2-3.
2-3.
12. The frequency span error is the difference between A DUT and A
SYNTH. (See table 2-3 for values). Calculate the span error and
record it in
2-4.
13. Compare the table 2-4
step 12.
to the span error value calculated in
2-3. Wide Span Error
An a lyze r
Syn th esized
F r eq. B
cf + sp a n
y
Cen ter
F r eq. A
sp a n
A Syn th
y
100.000090 MHz
100.045 000 MHz
100.045 045 MHz
180 Hz
100 MHz 99.999 910 MHz
99.955 000 MHz
90.000 Hz
100 MHz
100.1
99.954955 MHz
100 MHz 99.550 000 MHz 100.450000 MHz
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.01 MHz
100 MHz
100.450500 MHz
109.000000 MHz
109.045.000 MHz
1575 MHz
I
100 MHz 91.000 000 MHz
100 MHz 90.955 000 MHz
18.000 MHz
18.090 MHz
1350 MHz
I
20.1 MHz
1.5
900 MHz
225 MHz
Performance Tests 2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Frequ en cy Span Accu racy
2-4. Span Error
Min
Error
ADUT-ASyn
Ma x
from
2-3
- 1 0 Hz
10 Hz
-5000 Hz
-5,005 Hz
-50,000 Hz
-23,230 Hz
-460,000 Hz
-462,300 Hz
Hz
5000 Hz
5,005 Hz
50,000 Hz
23,230 Hz
460,000 Hz
462,300 Hz
Hz
1 . 5
The specification in Table 2-4 was derived using the following formula:
Not e
For spans 1 MHz, the
For spans 1 MHz, the
is:
is:
synth freq) +
synth freq) +
2-8 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Sweep Tim e Accu racy Test
ms)
3. Sw eep Tim e
Accu r a cy Test
Frequency Control Adjustments
Relat ed Adju st m en t
Specificat ion
for sweep times
for sweep times
seconds
seconds
Preferred Procedu re
Descript ion
This test is for sweep times
ms. For faster sweep times, refer to
Fast Sweep Time Accuracy Test (Test 19).
A universal counter is connected to the
RECORDER
OUTPUT (on the rear panel) of the spectrum analyzer. The counter is
used in time interval mode to determine the “pen down” (sweep time)
interval of the
RECORDER OUTPUT. The
output
voltage level corresponds directly to the sweeping of the analyzer
(pen down = OV) and not-sweeping of the analyzer (pen up =
DVM is used to set the appropriate trigger level for the counter.
A
Altern ate Procedu re
Perform this procedure if the equipment for the preferred procedure
is unavailable.
Sweep time accuracy for sweep times
ms can also be measured
using the HP
internal frequency counter for a time interval
measurement.
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
UNIVERSAL
COUNTER
DIGITAL VOLTMETER
Figu re 2-4. Sweep Tim e Accu racy Test Setu p
Performance Tests 2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Sweep Tim e Accu racy
ms)
Universal Counter ..........................................
HP
HP
Equ ipm en t
Digital Voltmeter
...........................................
Procedu re
1. Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2-4.
2. Press
3. Key in the following settings:
Sweep Tim es
m s
PRESET) on the spectrum analyzer.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(CENTER FREQUENCY)
[FREQUENCY SPAN]
500
0
...........................................
4. Set up the universal counter as follows:
a. Set all front panel keys in “out” position.
b. Set POWER switch to ON.
c. Set GATE TIME vernier control to 9 o’clock.
d. Set
A switch to COM A position.
B switch (making sure the blue shift key is
e. Depress T.I. A
out).
f. Set Channel A trigger level to trigger on negative slope.
g. Set Channel B trigger level to trigger on positive slope.
h. Set both Channel A and Channel B
switches to
i. Connect the digital voltmeter to Channel A TRIGGER LEVEL
OUT. (Be sure to ground the DVM properly.)
j. Adjust Channel A trigger level to set a DVM voltage reading of
0.3 v.
k. Repeat steps i and j for Channel B.
5. Set analyzer
TIME) to 20 ms. Allow the universal counter
enough time to settle at this sweep time.
Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Sweep Tim e Accu racy Test
ms)
WIDTH APPROXIMATE
t-SWEEP RETRACE
r
l
-
-
-
INTERVAL
MEASUREMENT
INTERVAL
MEASUREMENT
Figu re 2-5.
Ou tpu t Sign al
6. Note the measured sweep time on the universal counter and
record this value in 2-5. The measured sweep time should
be a value between the minimum and maximum values given in
2-5.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for each sweep time setting in
2-5.
2-5.
Sweep Tim e Accu racy, Sweep Tim es
ms
Marker A Tim e
Min
Mea su red
20 ms
50 ms
100 ms
500 ms
18 ms
4 5 ms
90 ms
4 5 0 ms
900 ms
8. Press MARKER
9. Use
to place the marker at the second vertical graticule.
10. Press
11. Set analyzer [SWEEP TIME) to 20 s. Allow the universal counter
enough time to settle at this sweep time.
12. Note the measured sweep time on the universal counter and
record this value in Table 2-6. The measured sweep time should
be a value between the minimum and maximum values given in
2-6.
13. Repeat steps 11 and 12 for 200 sweep time.
Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Sweep Tim e Accu racy Test
ms)
2-6.
Sweep Tim e Accu racy, Sweep Tim es
s
Marker A Tim e
[S W E E P T I M E )
Min
3.6 s
32 s
Mea su red
Ma x
4.4 s
48 s
20 s
200 s
14. Sweep times
ms are tested without external test equipment
Sweep Tim es
(Alt ern at e Procedu re)
m s
by the following procedure.
15. Press
16. Set
TIME] according to
2-7. Press MARKER
St art -Up Tim e
Measu rem en t
Rotate the DATA knob to place the marker on the left edge of the
CRT display. Key in
17. Press
three times. The Active Function Block
reads SWEEP GEN followed by a measured sweep time. This is
the start-up time. Record it in
2-7. The start-up time must
be subtracted from the SWEEP GEN time measured in step 19.
(Adding the start-up time to the [SWEEP TIME] setting effectively
subtracts it from the SWEEP GEN time.)
18. Press MARKER (OFF).
19. Press
three times and note the SWEEP GEN
Sweep Tim e
Measu rem en t
reading. The limits for the SWEEP GEN reading are listed in
2-7. (For example, assume the start-up time measured in
step 17 was 700
for a [SWEEP TIME) of 20 ms. The limits for the
SWEEP GEN readings would be 19.3 to 22.7 ms.)
20. Repeat steps 16 to 19 for each sweep time shown in Table 2-7.
2-7.
Sweep Tim e Accu racy, Sweep Tim es
(Altern ate Procedu re)
ms
Sweep Gen Readou t
SWEEP
Ma x
Min
Mea su red
18.0 ms
45.0 ms
90.0 ms
22.0 ms
55.0 ms
110 ms
550 ms
1.10 ms
20 ms
50 ms
100 ms
500 ms
450 ms
900 ms
9.00 ms
11.0 ms
55.0 ms
10.0 ms
80.0 ms
10 s
50 s
100 s
150 s
45.0 ms
90.0 ms
20.0 s
2-12 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Resolu tion Ban dwidth Accu racy
(For instruments with Option 462, refer to Chapter 4.)
4. Resolu tion
Ba n d w id th
Accu r a cy Test
Bandwidth Adjustments
3 MHz
Relat ed Adju st m en t
Specificat ion
3
to 1 MHz
10 Hz to 1
30
and 100
bandwidth accuracy figures apply only with
Relative Humidity,
The 3
bandwidth for each resolution bandwidth setting is
Descript ion
measured with the MARKER function to determine bandwidth
accuracy. The CAL OUTPUT is used for a stable signal source.
None Required
Equ ipm en t
Procedu re
1.
Press
PRESET).
2. Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2.
3. Key in spectrum analyzer setting as follows:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(CENTER FREQUENCY)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MHz
NCY SPAN)
.................................................. .. .
3 MHz
........................................
-10
[REFERENCE LEVEL)
4. Press SCALE LIN pushbutton. Press
bandwidth).
(resolution
5.
Adjust [REFERENCE LEVEL] to position peak of signal trace at
reference level (top) graticule line. Press SWEEP
6. Press MARKER and place marker at peak of signal trace
with DATA knob. Press MARKER In] and position movable marker
down from the stationary marker on the positive-going edge
of the signal trace (the MARKER A amplitude readout should be
-3.00 It may be necessary to press SWEEP
3
and adjust [CENTER FREQUENCY) to center trace on screen.
7.
Press MARKER
from the signal peak on the negative going edge of the trace (the
MARKER A amplitude readout should be .OO The 3
bandwidth is given by the MARKER A frequency readout (see
Figure 2-6). Record this value in 2-8.
and position movable marker 3
down
Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Resolu tion Ban dwidth Accu racy Test
Figu re 2-6. Resolu tion Ban dwidth Measu rem en t
8. Vary spectrum analyzer settings according to
the 3 bandwidth for each resolution bandwidth setting by the
procedure of steps 6 and 7 and record the value in 2-8. The
2-8. Measure
measured bandwidth should fall between the limits shown in the
table.
2-8. Bandwidth Accu racy
Ban dwidth
‘FREQUENCY SPAN] MARKER A Readou t of 3
Min
Mea su red
Ma x
5
2
500
200
50
20
5
MHz 2.400 MHz
3.600 MHz
1.100 MHz
330.0
110.0
33.00
11.00
3.300
1.200
3
MHz
1 MHz
300
100
30
10
3
MHz
900
270.0
90.0
27.00
9.00
2.700
1
2
800 Hz
360 Hz
120 Hz
36 Hz
240 Hz
80 Hz
24 Hz
500 Hz
200 Hz
100 Hz
100 Hz
300 Hz
100 Hz
30 Hz
10 Hz
12 Hz
8
Hz
2-14 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Resolu tion Ban dwidth Selectivity Test
6. Read the 60
bandwidth for the 3 MHz resolution bandwidth
setting from the MARKER A frequency readout (see Figure 2-7)
and record the value in 2-9.
7. Vary spectrum analyzer settings according to Table 2-9. Measure
the 60 bandwidth for each resolution bandwidth setting by the
procedure of steps 4 through 6 and record the value in 2-9.
8. Record the 3 bandwidths from 2-8 in 2-9.
9. Calculate the bandwidth selectivity for each setting by dividing
the 60 bandwidth by the 3 bandwidth. The bandwidth
ratios should be less than the maximum values shown in
2-9.
10. The 60
bandwidth for the 10 Hz resolution bandwidth setting
should be less than 100 Hz.
Figu re 2-7. 60
Ban dwidth Measu rem en t
2-16 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Resolu tion Ban dwidth Selectivity Test
2-9. Resolu tion Ban dwidth Selectivity
Maxim u m
Ban dwidth
Measu red Measu red
Spectru m An alyzer
Selectivity Selectivity Ratio
3
(F R E Q U E N CY S P A N )
Bandwidth Bandwidth (60
BW
3 MHz 20 MHz
1 MHz 15 MHz
100 Hz
300 Hz
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
300
5 MHz
2 MHz
100
30
10
3
500
200
50
10
5
1
300 Hz
100 Hz
2
30 Hz 500 Hz
10 Hz 100 HZ
60
points separated by
Hz
Performance Tests 2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(For instruments with Option 462, refer to Chapter 4.)
6. Resolu tion
Ba n d w id th
Sw itch in g
Un cer ta in ty Test
3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments
Relat ed Adju st m en t s
Specificat ion
21.4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments Down/Up Converter
Adjustments
(uncorrected; referenced to 1 MHz bandwidth; 20
after 1 hour
warm-up)
10 Hz bandwidth
30 Hz bandwidth 100 Hz to 1 MHz bandwidth
3 MHz bandwidth 30 and 100 bandwidth switching
fl.O
uncertainty figures only applicable
Relative Humidity
The CAL OUTPUT signal is applied to the input of the spectrum
analyzer. The deviation in peak amplitude of the signal trace is then
measured as each resolution bandwidth filter is switched in.
Descript ion
None Required
Equ ipm en t
Procedu re
1. Press
Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2.
Key in the following control settings:
(CENTER FREQUENCY)
2.
3.
MHz
2 0
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MHz
5
[ F R E Q U E N C Y
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- 8
NCE LEVEL]
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MHz
1
Press LOG (ENTER
and key in 1
Press MARKER
4.
SEARCH)
Press
5.
6.
Key in settings according to Table 2-10. Press MARKER
[PEAK SEARCH] at each setting, then read the amplitude deviation
from the MARKER A readout at the upper right of the display (see
Figure 2-8). The allowable deviation for each resolution bandwidth
setting is shown in the table.
2-18 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Resolu tion Ban dwidth Switch in g Un certain ty Test
Figu re 2-8. Ban dwidth Switch in g Un certain ty Measu rem en t
2-10. Ban dwidth Switch in g Un certain ty
Allowable
Deviation
Deviation
(MKR A
Readou t,
0 (ref)
1 MHz
3 MHz
5 MHz
5 MHz
5 MHz
0 (ref)
300
100
30
10
3
500
500
50
50
10
1
1
300 Hz
100 Hz
30 Hz
10 Hz
1
200 Hz
100 Hz
Performance Tests
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. In pu t Atten u ator Switch in g Un certain ty
6. Press MARKER
7. Set
LEVEL], and frequency synthesizer
amplitude according to
1. At each setting, press MARKER
setting from
the MARKER A amplitude readout (see Figure 2-10). The deviation
should not exceed at any setting.
(PEAK SEARCH) and record the deviation from the 10
1 0 0 .
n en t
Figu re
Atten u ator Switch in g Un certain ty Measu re]
1. In pu t Atten u ator Switch in g Un certain ty
Deviation Corrected Allowable
Syn th esizer (MARKER A Deviation Deviation
Am plitu de Am plitu de
[REFERENCE LEVEL) F r eq u en cy
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
-50
-40
-30
-20
- 1 0
0
-52
-42
-32
-22
-12
-2
0
(ref)
0
(ref)
8
Performance Tests 2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. F r equ en cy
Resp on se Test
Slope Compensation Adjustment
Relat ed Adju st m en t
Specificat ion
SIGNAL INPUT 1
100 Hz to 1.5
100 Hz to 500 MHz
SIGNAL INPUT 2
100
to 1.5
Frequency response at both analyzer inputs is tested by slowly
sweeping a flat signal source over the frequency range and observing
the peak-to-peak variation in trace amplitude. The test is divided into
three parts. First, the response is tested from 20 MHz to 1.5
Descript ion
with a power-meter-leveled synthesized sweeper. Next, a frequency
synthesizer is used to check the response from 100
Finally, SIGNAL INPUT 1 is tested from 100 Hz to 100
function generator.
to 20 MHz.
with a
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
SYNTHESIZED SWEEPER
POWER METER
RECORDER
OUTP UT
GNAL
NP UT
I
I
I
I
POWER SENSOR
O P T I O N 0 0 1 . A D D 5 0
O H M P A D A N D A D A P T E R
Figu re 2-11. Frequ en cy Respon se Test Setu p (20 MHz to 1.5
2-22 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Frequ en cy Respon se Test
Equipment listed is for three test setups, Figure 2-11, Figure 2-13, and
Figure 2-15.
Not e
Synthesized Sweeper .......................................
HP
Equ ipm en t
Power Meter
Power Sensor
...............................................
...............................................
A
HP
HP
HP
Frequency Synthesizer .....................................
Function Generator ........................................
.............................................
Power Splitter
HP
Adapter, Type N (m) to BNC (f) ........................
Adapter, Type N (m) to BNC (m) .......................
HP 1250-0780
HP 1250-0082
HP 1250-0778
HP 1250-1250
HP 1250-1749
HP 5061-5458
Adapter, Type N (m) to Type N (m)
....................
........................
Adapter, Type N (m) to SMA (f)
Adapter, (f) to
(f)
....................
Cable, SMA Connectors ................................
Additional Equipment for Option 001:
Minimum Loss Pad ...............................
HP
Adapter, Type N (f) to BNC (m) (7561)
..................
HP 1250-1534
Procedu re
Press
sweeper.
PRESET) on spectrum analyzer and synthesized
2 0 MHz t o 1 .5
1 .
2.
Set controls as follows:
Power Meter
MODE
RANGE HOLD
CAL FACTOR %
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
OFF
100
.
.
.
Synthesized Sweeper
......................................... ..
20 MHz
1.5
START FREQ
STOP FREQ
SWEEP
.................................................
......................................... .. ..
120 s
SWEEP TIME
POWER LEVEL
......................................
0.00
3. Connect equipment as shown in Figure
1. The RECORDER
OUTPUT on rear panel of power meter is connected to LEVELING
EXT INPUT of the synthesized sweeper. One output arm of the
power splitter is connected directly to SIGNAL INPUT 2 of the
spectrum analyzer via the N-to-N adapter. The power sensor
connects directly to the other splitter output.
4. Depress RANGE HOLD button on power meter.
5. Select METER leveling on synthesized sweeper.
6. Key in the following spectrum analyzer settings:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[CENTER FREQUENCY)
NCY SPAN]
MHz
MHz
............................................................................................
Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Frequ en cy Respon se Test
Adjust POWER LEVEL on synthesized sweeper (using data knob)
to place peak of 20 MHz signal near reference level (top) graticule
line.
7.
8.
9.
Press [ENTER
1
on spectrum analyzer. Adjust POWER
LEVEL on synthesized sweeper to position peak of signal 2
divisions below the reference level line.
Key in the following spectrum analyzer settings:
)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.MHz
. . . . . . . . .
Press TRACE A
on the analyzer.
10.
11.
Press SWEEP SINGLE on the synthesized sweeper.
Figu re 2-12. Frequ en cy Respon se Measu rem en t (20 MHz to 1.5
12. Press DISPLAY LINE on the spectrum analyzer. Use the
Display Line to measure the maximum and minimum points on the
trace. Record measurements below.
SIGNAL INPUT 2
(20 MHz to 1.5
Maximum
Minimum
13. To check SIGNAL INPUT 1, use the type N male to BNC male
adapter to connect the power splitter directly to SIGNAL INPUT
1.
Option 001: Use HP
Minimum Loss Pad and adapters
between splitter and spectrum analyzer input.
14. Press PRESET) on spectrum analyzer, then activate SIGNAL
INPUT 1 with the pushbutton.
2-24 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Frequ en cy Respon se Test
Option 001: Set [REFERENCE LEVEL] TO -6.0
15. Repeat steps 6 through 11. Press DISPLAY LINE
on the
spectrum analyzer. Use the Display Line to measure the maximum
and minimum points on the trace. Record measurements below.
SIGNAL INPUT 1
(20 MHz to 1.5
Maximum
Minimum
16. Press MARKER
on spectrum analyzer. Set marker to 500
on the spectrum analyzer. Use
MHz. Press DISPLAY LINE
the Display Line to measure the maximum and minimum points
between 20 MHz and 500 MHz. Record measurements below.
SIGNAL INPUT 1
(20 MHz to 500
Maximum
Minimum
17. Set the frequency synthesizer controls as follows:
1 0 0
t o 2 0 MHz
.............................................
........................................ .
.............................................
AMPLITUDE
(Option 001: + 4
FREQUENCY
SWEEP WIDTH
20 MHz
19.9 MHz
- 2
18. Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2-13. The output of the
frequency synthesizer should be connected to SIGNAL INPUT 1.
Option
Use HP 11852 Minimum Loss Pad and adapters.
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER
DAPTER
Figu re 2-13. Frequ en cy Respon se Test Setu p (100
to 20 MHz)
19. Press
PRESET) on the spectrum analyzer. Activate SIGNAL
INPUT 1 with the pushbutton.
20. Key in the following spectrum analyzer settings:
Performance Tests 2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Frequ en cy Respon se
25. After completion of sweep, press DISPLAY LINE on the
spectrum analyzer. Use the Display Line to measure the maximum
and minimum points on the trace. Record the measurements
below.
SIGNAL INPUT 1
(100
to 20 MHz)
Maximum
Minimum
26. Measure and record signal level at start of trace (100
SIGNAL INPUT 1
(100
27. Connect output of frequency synthesizer to SIGNAL INPUT 2.
Activate this input with the pushbutton.
Option 001. Do not use HP
Minimum Loss Pad. Set
frequency synthesizer output amplitude to -2
28. Press TRACE A
spectrum analyzer.
and DISPLAY LINE
on
29. Set frequency synthesizer FREQUENCY to 20 MHz. Set spectrum
analyzer (CENTER FREQUENCY_) to 20 MHz, and (FREQUENCY SPAN) to
1 MHz.
30. Repeat steps 22 through 24.
31. After completion of sweep, press DISPLAY LINE
on the
spectrum analyzer. Use the Display Line to measure the maximum
and minimum points on the trace. Record the measurements
below.
SIGNAL INPUT 2
(100
to 20 MHz)
Maximum
Minimum
Figu re 2-15.
Frequ en cy Respon se Setu p (100 Hz to 100
Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Frequ en cy Respon se Test
Press
INPUT 1.
PRESET) on the spectrum analyzer. Activate SIGNAL
1 0 0
32.
33.
Key in the following spectrum analyzer settings:
. . . .
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.........
100
Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2-15 with function
generator to SIGNAL INPUT 1.
34.
35.
Set the function generator controls as follows:
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
RANGE Hz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 K
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAL (button in)
AMPLITUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 V
AMPLITUDE VERNIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . midrange
SYM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAL
TRIGGER PHASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FREE RUN
MODULATION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . all out
MODULATION RANGE Hz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I
MODULATION RANGE Hz VERNIER ....... fully CCW
MODULATION SYM
Percent Modulation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CW
Adjust function generator FREQUENCY to place signal between
the last two graticule lines (right side) on the signal analyzer
display.
36.
37.
38.
Adjust AMPLITUDE VERNIER on the function generator until
the peak of the signal is at the reference graticule line on the
spectrum analyzer display.
Press LOG
DISPLAY LINE
recorded for 100
1
on the spectrum analyzer. Press
and set the Display Line to the level
in step 25.
Adjust function generator AMPLITUDE VERNIER to place peak of
signal at the Display Line.
39.
40.
Adjust FREQUENCY on the function generator to position the
signal trace at the right edge of the spectrum analyzer display
(last graticule line).
Press MODULATION SWP on the function generator and allow the
function generator to make at least two complete sweeps. Press
TRACE A [MAX HOLD). Allow the function generator to make one
complete sweep. After completion of the sweep, press TRACE A
41.
Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Frequ en cy Respon se
42. Press DISPLAY LINE
on the spectrum analyzer. Use the
Display Line to measure the maximum and minimum points on
the trace. (Disregard LO Feedthrough at 1
measurements below.
Record the
SIGNAL INPUT 1
(1
to 100
Maximum
Minimum
43. Set Display Line to peak of trace at 1
44. Key in the following spectrum analyzer settings:
TRACE A (CLEAR-WRITE)
1
Hz
45. Set function generator controls as follows:
RANGE Hz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 (button)
FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
MODULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..all out
46. Adjust function generator FREQUENCY as necessary to place
signal near center graticule line and adjust AMPLITUDE VERNIER
to place peak of signal at Display Line.
47. Key in the following spectrum analyzer settings:
NCY SPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Hz
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Hz
48.
STEP
to 100 Hz. Step spectrum analyzer
from 1 to 100 Hz with
while setting
(C E N T E R
function generator FREQUENCY to match spectrum analyzer
center frequency at each step. Record level-at each setting.
SIGNAL INPUT
1000 Hz
900 Hz
1
800 Hz
700 Hz
600 Hz
500 Hz
400 Hz
300 Hz
200 Hz
100 Hz
Performance Tests 2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Frequ en cy Respon se Test
49. For each input, subtract the lowest minimum level (greatest
negative) from the highest maximum (least negative)
measurement recorded in steps indicated. The result should not
exceed 2
SIGNAL INPUT 1
100 Hz to 500 MHz (from steps 16, 25, 42, or 48)
Overall Maximum
-Overall Minimum
Overall Deviation
SIGNAL INPUT 2
100
to 1.5
(from steps 12 or 31)
Overall Maximum
-Overall Minimum
Overall Deviation
50. Subtract the lowest minimum level (greatest negative) from the
highest maximum (least negative) measurement recorded in steps
indicated. The result should not exceed 3
SIGNAL INPUT 1
100 Hz to 1.5
(from steps 15, 16, 25, 42, or 48)
Overall Maximum
-Overall Minimum
Overall Deviation
Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. RF Gain Un certain ty Test
h
Figu re 2-16. RF Gain Un certain ty Measu rem en t
2-32 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. IF Gain Un certain ty
10. IF Ga in
Un cer ta in ty Test
Step Gain and 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments
Relat ed Adju st m en t s
Specificat ion
21.4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments
Assuming the internal calibration signal is used to calibrate the
reference level at -10
and the input attenuator is fixed at 10
any changes in reference level from the -10
to IF gain uncertainty as shown:
setting will contribute
Un certain ty (u n corrected; 20
Ran ge
0
to -55.9
Res BW
Res BW
Hz,
Hz,
Res BW = 10 Hz,
Res BW = 10 Hz,
-56.0
to -129.9
The IF gain steps are tested over the entire range from 0
to
and
steps are compared against a calibrated signal source provided
Frequency Synthesizer.
De s c rip t ion
-129.9
using an RF substitution method. The 10
2
0.1
by an HP
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
SIGNAL GENERATOR
ADAPTER
ADAPTER
STEP ATTENUATOR
HP
-
-
-
-
STEP ATTENUATOR
HP
Figu re 2-17. IF Gain Un certain ty
Setu p
Performance Tests 2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. IF Gain Un certain ty Test
Frequency Synthesizer
Adapter, Type N (m) to BNC (f)
Equ ipm en t
..................................... HP
HP 1250-0780
........................
Press
P r o c e d u r e 1 .
2.
Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT.
3. Press
-10.00
8. Adjust AMPTD CAL for a MARKER amplitude of
4.
Press
PRESET).
Set the frequency synthesizer for an output frequency of
5 .
1 0
Gain St eps
MHz and an output power level of -2.0
Set the amplitude
increment for 10 steps.
6. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2-17.
7.
Key in analyzer settings as follows:
FREQUENCY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.001 MHZ
SPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 kHz
8
9
Press MARKER (PEAK
(CENTER FREQUENCY) to center signal trace on display.
or adjust
Set analyzer as follows:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Hz
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
LOG
dB/DIv] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
10.
11.
Press MARKER
Press
SEARCH),
to permit extended reference level settings.
12. Set the analyzer (REFERENCE
and frequency
2-12 settings. (Use the
synthesizer amplitude according to
frequency synthesizer
for 10
steps.) At each setting, note
the MKR A amplitude displayed in the upper right corner of the
analyzer display (deviation from the 0
record it in the table. See Figure 2-18.
reference setting) and
After measurement at the (REFERENCE LEVEL) = -70
setting, press
Not e
as indicated in
2-12.
2-34 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. IF Gain Un certain ty Test
2-12. IF Gain Un certain ty, 10
Steps
[REFERENCE LEVEL)
Frequ en cy
Syn th esizer
Am plitu de
Deviation
(Marker
A
0
- 2
-12
-22
-32
-42
-52
-62
-72
100
100
100
100
100
100
10
0 (ref.)
-10
- 2 0
- 3 0
- 4 0
- 5 0
- 6 0
- 7 0
10
- 8 0
- 9 0
-32
-42
-52
-62
-72
100
100
10
-100
-110
-120
10
10
Figu re 2-18. IF Gain Un certain ty Measu rem en t
Performance Tests 2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. IF Gain Un certain ty Test
Gain St eps
13. Press
7.
2
14. Set [REFERENCE
to -1.9
15. Press MARKER (OFF). Set
to 100 Hz.
16. Set the frequency synthesizer for an output power level of -3.9
Set the amplitude increment for 2 steps.
17. Press MARKER [PEAK
18. Set the analyzer
amplitude according to
LEVEL) and the frequency synthesizer
2-13. At each setting, note the MKR
A amplitude and record it in the table.
2-13. IF Gain Un certain ty, 2
Steps
Deviation
LEVEL) Fr equ en cy
Syn th esizer (MARKER A
‘Am plitu de
Am plitu de
-1.9
-3.9
-5.9
-7.9
-9.9
-3.9
-5.9
0
(ref)
-7.9
-9.9
-11.9
2 . 0 0
Figu re 2-19. IF Gain Un certain ty Measu rem en t (2
2-36 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. IF Gain Un certain ty
19. Set [REFERENCE
to 0
20. Set the frequency synthesizer for an output power level of -2.00
Set the amplitude increment for 0.1 steps.
0 .1
Gain St eps
21. Press MARKER [PEAK
22. Set the analyzer and the frequency synthesizer amplitude
according to 2-14. At each setting, note the MKR A
amplitude and record it in the table.
23. Find the largest positive deviation and the largest negative
deviation for reference level settings from 0
to -70
in
2-12. Also, find the largest positive and negative deviations
for the last five settings in the table.
A
B
-80 to -120
Reference Level Range:
0 to -70
Largest Positive Deviation:
Largest Negative Deviation:
24. Find the largest positive and negative deviations in
2-14:
2-13 and
D
C
2-14
2-13
Largest Positive Deviation:
Largest Negative Deviation:
Performance Tests 2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. IF Gain Un certain ty
2-14. IF Gain Un certain ty, 0.1
Steps
Deviation
(MKR A
Am plitu de
[REFERENCE LEVEL) F r eq u en cy
Syn th esizer
Am plitu de
0.0
-0.1
-0.2
-0.3
-0.4
-0.5
-0.6
-0.7
-0.8
-0.9
-1.0
-1.1
-1.2
-1.3
-1.4
-1.5
-1.6
-1.7
-1.8
-1.9
-2.00
-2.10
-2.20
-2.30
-2.40
-2.50
-2.60
-2.70
-2.80
-2.90
-3.00
-3.10
-3.20
-3.30
-3.40
-3.50
-3.60
-3.70
-3.80
-3.90
0
(ref)
25. The sum of the positive deviations recorded in A,
not exceed 0.6
and D should
26. The sum of the negative deviations recorded in A, C, and D
should not be less than -0.6
27. The sum of the positive deviations recorded in A, B, C, and D
should not exceed 1.0
28. The sum of the negative deviations recorded in A, B, C, and D
should not exceed 1 .O
2.38 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Log Scale Switch in g Un certain ty Test
1 0 0
Figu re 2-20. Log Scale Switch in g Un certain ty Measu rem en t
2-15. Log Scale Switch in g Un certain ty
SCALE
(dB/ DIV)
Allowable
Deviation
1
2
0 (ref)
5
10
Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Am plitu de Fidelity
(For instruments with Option 857, refer to Chapter 5.)
12. Am p litu d e
F id elity Test
Log Amplifier Adjustments
Relat ed Adju st m en t
Specificat ion
Log:
Incremental
over 0 to 80
Cumulative
display
3 MHz to 30 Hz Resolution Bandwidth
max over 0 to 80
display (20
1.5
Linear:
max over 0 to 90
display
of Reference Level for top
divisions of display
Amplitude fidelity in log and linear modes is tested by decreasing the
signal level to the spectrum analyzer in 10 steps with a calibrated
Descript ion
signal source and measuring the displayed amplitude change with the
analyzer’s MARKER A function.
f
Figu re 2-21. Am plitu de Fidelity Test Setu p
Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Am plitu de Fidelity Test
Frequency Synthesizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP
Adapter, Type N (m) to BNC (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 1250-0780
Equ ipm en t
Log Fidelity
Procedu re
1. Set the frequency synthesizer for an output frequency of 20.000
MHz and an output power level of + 10
increment for 10 steps.
Set the amplitude
2. Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2-21.
3. Press
PRESET) on the analyzer. Key in analyzer settings as
follows:
[CENTER FREQUENCY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPAN]
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.......................................
+ 10
to
4. Press MARKER
REF
center the signal on the display.
5. Key in the following analyzer settings:
Y SPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O Hz
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Hz
6. Press MARKER A. Step the frequency synthesizer output
amplitude from + 10
the MARKER A amplitude (a negative value) at each step and
recording it in column 2 of 2-16. Allow several sweeps after
to -80
in 10
steps, noting
each step for the video filtered trace to reach its final amplitude
(see Figure 2-22).
7. Subtract the value in column 1 from the value in column 2 for
each setting to find the fidelity error.
2-16. Log Am plitu de Fidelity
Frequ en cy
1
2
A
Fidelity Error
Am plitu de (Colu m n 2 Colu m n 1)
Cu m u lative
Error
0 to 80
Cu m u lative
Error
0 to 90
Syn th esizer Calibrated MARKER
Am plitu de Am plitu de
Step
0 (ref)
0 (ref)
0 (ref)
0
- 1 0
-20
-30
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
- 1 0
-20
-30
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
2-42 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Am plitu de Fidelity
8. The fidelity error for amplitude steps from -10
should be 1.0
to -80
9. The fidelity error at the -90
setting should be
L
I
I
I
I
Figu re 2-22. Am plitu de Fidelity Measu rem en t
10. Key in analyzer settings as follows:
Lin ear Fidelit y
300 Hz
MHz
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NCY
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 MHz
.................................................. ..
11. Set the frequency synthesizer for an output power level of + 10
12. Press SCALE LIN pushbutton. Press MARKER
to center the signal on the display.
13. Set (FREQUENCY
to 0 Hz and
to 1 Hz. Press
(resolution bandwidth), MARKER
14. Decrease frequency synthesizer output amplitude by 10
steps,
noting the MARKER A amplitude and recording it in column 2 of
2-17.
Performance Tests 2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Am plitu de Fidelity Test
2-17. Lin ear Am plitu de Fidelity
Frequ en cy MARKER A
Allowable Ran ge
Syn th esizer Am plitu de
Am plitu de
% of Referen ce Level)
Min
Ma x
-10.87
-23.10
-9.21
0
-17.72
- 1 0
2-44 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. Average Noise Level Test
13. Aver a ge Noise
Level
for frequencies
MHz,
for frequencies
Specificat ion
MHz but
Hz with 10 Hz resolution bandwidth, 0
input
attenuation, 1 Hz video filter.
Option 001:
for frequencies
MHz,
for
frequencies
MHz but
Hz with 10 Hz resolution bandwidth, 0
input attenuation, 1 Hz video filter (SIGNAL INPUT 1 only).
The average noise level is checked by observing the displayed noise
level at several frequencies with no input signal applied.
De s c rip t ion
50 Ohm Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP
Equ ipm en t
Procedu re
1.
2.
3.
Press
Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2.
Press
Adjust AMPTD CAL for a MARKER amplitude
of -10.00
4.
5.
Press
Disconnect CAL OUTPUT from analyzer. Terminate SIGNAL
INPUT 2 with a 509 coaxial termination.
6.
Key in spectrum analyzer settings as follows:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
(CENTER FREQUENCY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 HZ
NCY
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O Hz
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Hz
LEVEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -80
. . . .
TIME] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . seconds
7.
8.
Press SWEEP
Press DISPLAY LINE
and wait for completion of the sweep.
Using DATA knob, place display
line at the apparent average amplitude of the noise trace (see
Figure 2-23).
Performance Tests 2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. Average Noise Level
Figu re 2-23. Average Noise Level Measu rem en t
9. Read the average noise level from the DISPLAY LINE readout.
The value should be
10. Change [CENTER FREQUENCY) to 1.001 MHz. Follow the procedure
to steps 7 through 9 to determine the average noise level. The
value should be
11. Change
steps 7 through 9 to determine the average noise level. The value
should be 135
FREQUENCY) to 1501 Mhz. Follow the procedure of
2-46 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14. Residu al Respon ses
14. Resid u a l
Resp on ses Test
for frequencies
signal present at input) Option 100:
Hz with 0
input attenuation (no
input attenuation
Specificat ion
for frequencies
Hz with 0
(SIGNAL INPUT 1 only).
Option 400:
for frequencies
for frequencies
Hz with 0
with 0
input attenuation.
input attenuation.
The spectrum analyzer is checked for residual responses across its
De s c rip t ion
frequency range with no signal applied to the input and 0
input
attenuation.
50 Ohm Termination
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP
Equ ipm en t
Procedu re
1.
Press
PRESET].
2. Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2.
3.
4.
Press
of -10.00 dbm
Adjust AMPTD CAL for a MARKER amplitude
Press
PRESET).
5. Disconnect CAL OUTPUT from analyzer. Terminate SIGNAL
INPUT 2 with a 50 ohm coaxial termination.
6. Key in control settings as follows:
(.F.R.E. Q. U. .E.N. C. Y. .) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...50 MHz
LEVEL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -60
(CENTER FREQUENCY) .
.25 MHz
TEP SIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..45 MHz
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0
7. Press DISPLAY LINE
and key in -105
8. Reduce
or
if necessary, for a margin of at
least 4
between the noise trace and the display line (refer to
Figure 2-24). Do not reduce either bandwidth to less than 300 Hz.
This test will require approximately 30 minutes to complete using
the settings given in step 6. If the resolution bandwidth or video
bandwidth are further reduced, a full band check of residual
responses will take up to 15 hours to complete
Not e
Performance Tests 2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14. Residu al Responses Test
Figu re 2-24. Residu al Responses Measu rem ent
9. Press SWEEP
and wait for completion of sweep. Look for
any residual responses at or above the display line. If a residual
is suspected, press SWEEP
again and see if the response
persists. A residual will persist on repeated sweeps, but a noise
peak will not. Any residual responses must be
Option 400:
Any residual 500 Hz to 2.5
must be
must be
any residuals
If a response appears marginal, do the following to determine
whether or not it exceeds the specification.
10.
a. Press
b. Press MARKER
the response in question.
c. Press MARKER
and place the marker on the peak of
then activate SWEEP
d. Reduce [FREQUENCY SPAN] to 1 MHz or less. The amplitude of
the response should be
(below the display line).
e. Press (RECALL] to resume the search for residuals.
Step [CENTER FREQUENCY) to 1510 MHz with
checking for
11.
residual responses at each step by the procedure of steps 9 and
10. There should be no residual responses at or above the display
line below 1500 MHz.
Maximum Residual Response
MHz
2-46 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15. Spu riou s Responses Test
15. Sp u r iou s
Resp on ses Test
Second Converter Adjustments
For total signal power of
Relat ed Adju st m en t
Specificat ion
at the input mixer of the
analyzer, all image and out-of-band mixing responses, harmonic and
intermodulation distortion products are
power for input signals 10 Mhz to 1500 MHz;
below the total signal
below the total
signal power for input signals 100 Hz to 10 MHz.
Secon d Harm on ic Distortion
For a signal -30
distortion is
at the mixer and
down; 60
MHz, second harmonic
MHz.
down for signals
Th ird Order In term odu lation Distortion
For two signals each -30
products are:
at the mixer, third-order intermodulation
Harmonic distortion (second and third) is tested using a signal source
and a low-pass filter. The LPF insures that the harmonics measured
are generated by the spectrum analyzer and not by the signal source.
Descript ion
Spurious responses due to image frequencies, out-of-band mixing, and
intermodulation distortion are measured by applying signals from two
separate sources to the spectrum analyzer input.
Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15. Spu riou s Responses Test
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
SYNTHESIZED
ATTENUATOR
300 MHZ LPF
Figu re 2-25. Harm on ic Distortion Test Setu p
Equipment listed is for two test setups, Figure 2-25 and Figure 2-26.
Not e
Synthesized Sweeper ........................
Frequency Synthesizer ......................
HP
H P
Equ ipm en t
10
Attenuator (2 required) ..............
:
Opt 010
HP 0955-0455
HP 1250-0780
.......
........
....... HP 1250-1250
.......
....... HP 1250-1474
........... HP
Filter (300 MHz) ...................
Adapter, Type N (m) to BNC (f) (2 required)
Adapter, Type N (m) to SMA (f) .............
Adapter, Type N (f) to BNC (m) .............
Adapter, Type N (f) to BNC (f) ..............
Directional Bridge ...........................
Filter (50 MHz) (2 required) .......
HP 1250-0077
.......
HP 0955-0306
Harm on ic Distortion
Procedu re
1. Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2-25.
2. On the spectrum analyzer, press
the spectrum analyzer as follows:
PRESET). Set the controls of
280 MHz
................ 10
CENTER FREQUENCY .................
FREQUENCY SPAN ....................
REFERENCE LEVEL ...................
.............
20
3. On the synthesized sweeper, key in
PRESET],
280 MHz,
(POWER LEVEL) -10
4. On the spectrum analyzer, key in DISPLAY LINE
-90
MARKER [PEAK
to position a marker on the peak of
the displayed 280 MHz signal.
5. On the synthesized sweeper, press
LEVEL] and use the
ENTRY knob to adjust the amplitude of the displayed 280 MHz
Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15. Spu riou s Responses Test
signal for a marker indication of -20.00 (-30.0 at the
input mixer with 10
of input attenuation).
On the spectrum analyzer, key in MARKER
6
FREQUENCY) 560 MHz, MARKER
SEARCH) to position
a second marker on the peak of the second harmonic distortion
product of the 280 MHz input signal. The response should be
below the display line
below the input signal level).
Second Harmonic
7. On the synthesized sweeper, key in
LEVEL)
decrease
the amplitude of the 280 MHz signal by 10
8. On the spectrum analyzer, key in MARKER
FREQUENCY) 280 MHz, [REFERENCE LEVEL) -30
DISPLAY LINE [ENTER] -105
MARKER
SEARCH) to
position a marker on the peak of the displayed 280 MHz signal.
9. On the synthesized sweeper, press [POWER LEVEL] and use the
ENTRY knob to adjust the amplitude of the displayed 280 MHz
signal for a marker indication of -30.00
(-40.0
at the
input mixer with 10
of input attenuation).
10. On the spectrum analyzer, key in MARKER
[CENTER FREQUENCY) 840 MHz, MARKER [PEAK SEARCH) to position
a second marker on the peak of the third harmonic distortion
product of the 280 MHz input signal. The response should be
below the display line
below the input signal level).
Third Harmonic
Performance Tests 2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15. Spu riou s Responses Test
In t erm odu lat ion
Dist ort ion
Figu re 2-26. In term odu lation Distortion
Setu p
11. Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2-26.
12. Set the controls of the spectrum analyzer as follows:
CENTER FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.5 MHz
FREQUENCY SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 MHz
REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -20
DISPLAY LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
13. On the synthesized sweeper, key in
30 MHz, [POWER LEVEL],
-4 and use the ENTRY knob to position the peak of the
displayed 30 MHz signal at the top CRT graticule line.
14. On the frequency synthesizer, key in [FREQUENCY) 29 MHz,
-4
Readjust the signal amplitude as necessary
to position the peak of the displayed 29 MHz signal at the top CRT
graticule line.
15. Set the controls of the spectrum analyzer as follows:
CENTER FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 MHz
FREQUENCY SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Hz
16. On the spectrum analyzer, key in DISPLAY LINE (ENTER) -100
MARKER [PEAK SEARCH) to position a marker on the peak of
the displayed 29 MHz signal.
On the frequency synthesizer, adjust the signal amplitude for a
marker indication of -20.00
17.
On the spectrum analyzer, key in [CENTER FREQUENCY) 30 MHz,
MARKER [PEAK SEARCH) to position a marker on the peak of the
displayed 30 MHz signal.
18.
On the synthesized sweeper, adjust the signal power level for a
19.
marker indication of -20.00
2-52 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15. Spu riou s Responses
If unable to locate intermodulation distortion products, temporarily
increase output power level of frequency synthesizer and synthesized
Not e
sweeper by
10
Return the output power level of both
signal sources to the previous settings before making distortion
measurements.
20. On the spectrum analyzer, key in MARKER
[CENTER FREQUENCY) 31 MHz, MARKER [PEAK SEARCH) to position
a marker at the peak of the 31 MHz third-order intermodulation
product. The response should be below the display line
below the input signals).
Distortion (1 MHz separation
30 MHz)
21. On the spectrum analyzer, key in [CENTER FREQUENCY) 28 MHz,
MARKER [PEAK SEARCH] to position a marker at the peak of the 28
MHz third-order intermodulation product. The response should be
below the display line
below the input signals).
Distortion (1 MHz separation
30 MHz)
- 0
SECOND
HARMONICS
- 10
FROM SIGNAL
- 2 0
- 30
-4 0
- 5 0
3
- 60
- 7 0
SECOND
ORDER
SECOND
ORDER
THIRD
ORDER
Figu re 2-27. In term odu lation Distortion Produ cts
22. On the frequency synthesizer, key in [FREQUENCY) 29.99 MHz.
23. On the spectrum analyzer, key in MARKER
FREQUENCY) 29.99 MHz, DISPLAY LINE
-90
MARKER (PEAK SEARCH).
Performance Tests 2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15. Spu riou s Responses
24. On the frequency synthesizer, readjust the signal amplitude as
necessary to position the peak of the displayed 29.99 MHz signal
at the top CRT graticule line.
25. On the spectrum analyzer, key in MARKER
(CENTER FREQUENCY) 30.01 MHz, MARKER (PEAK SEARCH) to
position a second marker at the peak of the 30.01 MHz third-order
intermodulation product. The response should be below the
display line
below the input signals).
Distortion (10
separation 30 MHz)
26. On the spectrum analyzer, key in [CENTER FREQUENCY) 29.98 MHz,
MARKER [PEAK SEARCH) to position a second marker at the peak
of the 29.98 MHz third-order intermodulation product. The
response should be below the display line
below the
input signals).
Distortion (10
separation
30 MHz)
27. On the synthesized sweeper, press (POWER LEVEL] and decrease
the amplitude of the 30 MHz signal by 13.0
from the current
setting.
28. On the frequency synthesizer, key in [FREQUENCY] 29 MHz,
(AMPLITUDE] and then decrease the amplitude of the 29 MHz signal
by 13.0
from the current setting.
29. Set the controls of the spectrum analyzer as follows:
CENTER FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 MHz
FREQUENCY SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hz
REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -33
MARKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
30. On the spectrum analyzer, key in DISPLAY LINE
-105
MARKER SEARCH) to position a marker on the peak of
the displayed 29 MHz signal.
31. On the frequency synthesizer, adjust the signal amplitude for a
marker indication of -33.0
32. On the spectrum analyzer, key in
FREQUENCY) 30 MHz,
MARKER [PEAK SEARCH) to position a marker on the peak of the
displayed 30 MHz signal.
33. On the synthesized sweeper, adjust the signal power level for a
marker indication of -33.0
at the input mixer with 10
(total signal power of -40
of input attenuation).
34. On the spectrum analyzer, key in MARKER
[CENTER FREQUENCY) 1 MHZ, MARKER [PEAK
to position
a second marker at the peak of the 1 MHz second-order
intermodulation distortion product. The response should be below
the display line
below the total input power).
Distortion (1 MHz separation
30 MHz)
2-54 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15. Spu riou s Responses
35. On the spectrum analyzer, key in [CENTER FREQUENCY] 59 MHz,
MARKER [PEAK SEARCH) to position a second marker at the peak
of the 59 MHz second-order intermodulation distortion product.
The response should be below the display line
below the
total input power).
Distortion (1 MHz separation
30 MHz)
Performance Tests 2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16. Resid u a l F M
Test
Hz peak-to-peak in
bandwidth Hz, video bandwidth
s; frequency span
Hz.
resolution
Specificat ion
The spectrum analyzer CAL OUTPUT is used to supply a stable 20
MHz signal to the analyzer. The analyzer is tuned in zero span to a
point on the 30 Hz bandwidth response for which the slope of the
response is known from direct measurement. The residual FM is then
slope detected over a 10 second interval, yielding a trace whose
peak-to-peak excursion is proportional to the residual FM.
De s c rip t ion
None Required
Equ ipm en t
Procedu re
1. Press
2. Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2.
3. Press (RECALL) 8 and adjust AMPTD CAL for a MARKER amplitude
of -10.00
4. Press
trace.
9 and adjust FREQ ZERO for a maximum amplitude
5. Set
to -10 Adjust FREQ ZERO
counterclockwise until trace is at the center graticule line.
6. Set SPAN) to 100 Hz. Press SWEEP and wait
for completion of the sweep.
7. Press MARKER and place marker 1 division above the
center graticule line on the negative-going side of the trace. Press
MARKER In] and set the movable marker 1 division below the
center graticule line. See Figure 2-28.
2-56 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16. Residu al FM Test
Figu re 2-28. Ban dwidth Filter Slope Measu rem en t
8. Compute the detection slope of the 30 Hz filter between the
markers by dividing the MARKER A amplitude by the MARKER A
frequency:
filter slope = MARKER A amplitude/MARKER Afrequency =
9. Press SWEEP
10. Change
SPAN] to 0 Hz. Readjust FREQ ZERO, if
necessary, to position the trace at the center graticule line. The
amplitude variations of the trace (see Figure 2-29) represent the
analyzer residual FM.
Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16. Residu al FM Test
Figu re 2-29. Slope Detected Residu al FM
11. Press SWEEP
and wait for completion of the sweep.
12. Press MARKER [PEAK SEARCH_). Press DISPLAY LINE
and
position the display line at the lowest point on the trace.
Figu re 2-30. Peak-to-Peak Am plitu de Measu rem ent
2-58 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16. Residu al FM Test
13. Press MARKER
and position movable marker at the lowest
point on the trace (see Figure 2-30). Read the MARKER A
amplitude from the display and record its absolute value.
MARKER A amplitude = p-p amplitude =
14. Divide the peak-to-peak amplitude by the slope computed in step
8 to obtain the residual FM:
p-p amplitude/filter slope = residual FM
=
Hz
= residual FM
The residual FM should be less than 3 Hz.
15. Press
16. Press
trace.
9 and adjust FREQ ZERO for a maximum amplitude
Performance Tests 2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17. Lin e-Rela ted
Sid eba n d s Tests
below the peak of a CW signal. Option
the peak of a CW signal.
below
Specificat ion
The spectrally pure calibrator signal of the spectrum analyzer is
applied to the analyzer input and the line related sidebands near the
signal are measured.
Descript ion
None required
Equ ipm en t
Procedu re
1.
Press
SIGNAL INPUT 2.
PRESET) on the analyzer. Connect CAL OUTPUT to
2.
Press
8 and adjust AMPTD CAL for a MARKER amplitude
of -10.00
3. Press
4. Key in the following analyzer settings:
[CENTER FREQUENCY)
.20 MHZ
[REFERENCE LEVEL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -10
SPAN]
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 600 Hz
5. Wait for completion of sweep, then press MARKER
[PEAK
6.
Press (SHIFT)
SWEEP
10
to initiate
video averaging of 10 sweeps. Wait for completion of sweeps.
7. Press MARKER (PEAK
and position movable marker at
the peak of each line related sideband (120 Hz, 180 Hz, and 240 Hz
for 60 Hz line frequency; 100 Hz, 150 Hz, and 200 Hz for 50 Hz
line frequency, etc.). The MARKER A amplitude for each sideband
should be
(see Figure 2-31).
120 Hz (100 Hz)
180 Hz (150 Hz)
240 Hz (200 Hz)
Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17. Lin e-Related Sideban ds
Figu re 2-31. Lin e Related Sideban ds Measu rem en t
to SIGNAL INPUT 2.
PRESET]. Connect CAL OUTPUT
Press
Press
O p t i o n 4 0 0
2.
3.
8 and adjust AMPTD CAL for a MARKER amplitude
of -10. 00 l
Press
4. Key in the following analyzer settings:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20 MHz
- 1 0
FREQUENCY]
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L E V E L ]
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
(FREQUENCY SPAN]
5.
6.
Wait for completion of the sweep, then press MARKER
[PEAK
SWEEP
10
to initiate
Press (SHIFT)
video averaging of 10 sweeps. Wait for completion of sweeps.
7. Press MARKER and position movable marker at
the peak of each line related sideband (400 Hz, 800 Hz, and 1200
Hz). The MARKER A amplitude for each sideband should be
400 Hz
800 Hz
1200 Hz
Performance Tests 2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18. Ca libr a tor
Am p lit u d e
Accu r a cy
20 MHz Reference Adjustments
-10
Relat ed Adju st m en t
Specificat ion
The output level of the calibrator signal is measured with a power
meter.
Descript ion
Figu re 2-32. Calibrator Am plitu de Accu racy
Setu p
.................................................
...............................................
HP
HP
HP 1250-0077
Power Meter
Power Sensor
Equ ipm en t
Procedu re
........................
Adapter, Type N (f) to BNC (m)
1. Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2-32.
2. Measure output level of the CAL OUTPUT signal. The value should
be -10.0
2-62 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
19. Fast Sweep Tim e Accu racy Test
ms)
19. F a st Sw eep
Tim e Accu r a cy
Test
m s)
None
Relat ed Adju st m en t
Specificat ion
for sweep times
seconds
The triangular wave output of a function generator is used to
De s c rip t ion
modulate a 500 MHz signal which is applied to the spectrum analyzer
SIGNAL INPUT. The signal is demodulated in the zero span mode to
display the triangular waveform. Sweep time accuracy for sweep
times
ms is tested by checking the spacing of the signal peaks on
the displayed waveform.
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
SYNTHESIZED SWEEPER
Figu re 2-33.
Sweep Tim e Accu racy
ms
Setu p)
........................................ HP
.......................................... HP
Function Generator
Universal Counter
Signal Generator
Equ ipm en t
Procedu re
...........................................
HP
1. Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2-33.
2. Press on spectrum analyzer.
3. Key in analyzer settings as follows:
500 MHZ
.....................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0 0
F R E Q U E N C Y )
(FREQUENCY SPAN)
4. Set synthesized sweeper for an output frequency of 500 MHz and
an output power level of -10
Performance Tests 2-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
19. Fast Sweep Tim e Accu racy Test
ms)
5. Press MARKER (PEAK
6. Set [FREQUENCY SPAN) to 0 Hz,
to 3 MHz,
to 3
MHz, and press TRIGGER
7. Set synthesized sweeper for an amplitude-modulated output.
8. Set function generator controls as follows:
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . triangular wave
FUNCTION .
AMPLITUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
approximately 1 Vp-p
CAL position (in)
.
.
.
.
.
.
OFFSET
.
. CAL position (in)
FREE RUN
all out
SYM
.
.
.
.
T R I G G E R P H A S E
MODULATION
.
.
9. Key in (SWEEP TIME] 5 ms and set function generator for a counter
reading of 2.00
10. Adjust spectrum analyzer TRIGGER LEVEL to place a peak of
the triangular waveform on the first graticule from the left edge
of the CRT display as a reference. (Adjust function generator
amplitude, if necessary, to provide a signal large enough to
produce a stable display). The fifth peak from the reference
should be within
division of the sixth graticule from the left
edge of the display (see Figure 2-34).
11. Using sweep times and function generator frequencies in
2-18, check sweep time accuracy for sweep times
procedure of step 10.
ms by
Figu re 2-34. Fast Sweep Tim e Measu rem en t
ms)
2-64 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
19. Fast Sweep Tim e Accu racy Test
2-18. Fast Sweep Tim e Accu racy ms)
ms)
[SWEEP TIME] Fu n ction Gen erator Frequ en cy Sweep Tim e Error
(division s)
5 ms
2 ms
1 ms
2.00
5.00
10.0
50.0
100
200
100
Performance Tests 2-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20.
LO Ou tp u t
Am p litu d e Test
from 2.0
to 3.7
LO OUTPUT connected is measured as the
Specificat ion
The power level at the
first L.O. is swept over its 2.0
Descript ion
to 3.1
range.
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
POWER METER
Figu re 2-35.
LO Ou tpu t Am plitu de Test Setu p
.................................................
............................................... HP
HP
Power Meter
Power Sensor
Equ ipm en t
Procedu re
1. Press
PRESET].
2. Set [SWEEP TIME) to 100 seconds.
3. Calibrate power meter and sensor. Connect equipment as shown in
Figure 2-35.
4. Observe the meter indication as the analyzer makes a complete
sweep. The indication should be
range.
+ 4
across the full sweep
5. Replace 50 ohm terminator on
LO OUTPUT.
2-66 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
21. Frequ en cy Referen ce Error
21. F r equ en cy
Refer en ce Er r or
Test
Time Base Adjustment
Aging Rate
Relat ed Adju st m en t
Specificat ion
x
and
x
year; attained after 30 days warmup
from cold start at
Temperature Stability
x
0” to
Frequency is within 1 x
of final stabilized
frequency within 30 minutes.
The frequency of the spectrum analyzer time base oscillator is
measured directly using a frequency counter locked to a frequency
reference which has an aging rate less than one-tenth that of the
time base specification. After a 30 day warmup period, a frequency
measurement is made. The analyzer is left undisturbed for a
period and a second reading is taken. The frequency change over this
period must be less than one part in
Descript ion
This test requires that the spectrum analyzer be turned on (not in
STANDBY) for a period of 30 days to ensure that the frequency
reference attains its aging rate. However, after aging rate is attained,
the frequency reference typically attains aging rate again in 72 hours
of operation after being off for a period not exceeding 24 hours.
Not e
Care must be taken not to disturb the spectrum analyzer during the
test interval, since the frequency reference is sensitive to
shock and vibration. The frequency reference should remain within
its attained aging rate if the instrument is left on, the instrument
orientation with respect to the earth’s magnetic field is maintained,
and the instrument does not sustain any mechanical shock. Frequency
changes due to orientation with respect to the earth’s magnetic field
and altitude changes will usually be nullified when the instrument
is returned to its original position. Frequency changes due to
mechanical shock will usually appear as a fixed frequency error.
The frequency reference is also sensitive to temperature changes;
for this reason the ambient temperature near the instrument at the
first measurement time and the ambient temperature at the second
measurement time should not differ by more than
Placing the spectrum analyzer in STANDBY mode turns the
instrument off while continuing to provide power for the frequency
reference oven, helping to minimize warmup time. However, the
frequency reference must be on to attain its aging rate.
Performance Tests 2-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-19.
P er for m a n ce
Recor d
Tested by
Hewlett-Packard Company
Report No.
Model HP
Date
Serial No.
IF-Display Section
RF Section
Performance Tests 2-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Cen ter
F r equ en cy Rea d ou t
Accu r a cy Test
Step 8. Center Frequency Readout Error Test Record
Spectrum Analyzer
Comb
Generator
Center Readout
Measured
[CENTER
Comb
Frequency
Min
Max
102
502
1002
100.2
500.2
1000.2
1500.2
100 MHz
100 MHz
100 MHz
10 MHz
10 MHz
10 MHz
10 MHz
1 MHz
100
100
98
498
998
99.8
499.8
999.8
1499.8
999.98
999.998
999.9998
100 MC
500
1000
100
EXT TRIG
(1, 2, 5, or 10 MHz)
trigger signal
500
1000
1500
1000
1000
1000
1000.02
1000.002
1000.0002
10
1
Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Frequency Span Accuracy
2. F r equ en cy
Sp a n Accu r a cy Test
Steps 7, 9, and 11. Wide Span Error
r Sp e c t r u m
An a lyze r
Syn t h esized Sweeper
Freq. B
DUT Measu red
Freq. D
Ce n t e r
1Frequ en cy
Freq. A
span
A Syn t h
Freq. C
A DUT
Span
cf +
span
2 0 0 Hz
180 Hz
90.000 Hz
100 MHz 99.999 910 MHz 100.000 090 MHz
100 MHz 99.955 000 MHz 100.045 000 MHz
100 MHz 99.954955 MHz 100.045045 MHz
100.1
100 MHz 99.550
100.450 000 MHz
1.01 MHz
20 MHz
2 0 .1 MHz
1.5
100 MHz 99.550 550 MHz 100.450 500 MHz
100 MHz 91.000000 MHz 109.000000 MHz 18.000 MHz
100 MHz 90.955 000 MHz 109.045.000 MHz
900 MHz
2 2 5 MHz
1 5 7 5 MHz
Step 12. Span Error
Span Error
1
Freq Span
Min
ADUT-
from
M ax
2-3
- 1 0 Hz
-5000 Hz
-5,005 Hz
10 Hz
5000 Hz
200 Hz
100
100.1
1 MHz
1.01 MHz
20 MHz
20.1 MHz
1.5
5,005 Hz
50,000 Hz
23,230 Hz
460,000 Hz
462,300 Hz
Hz
-50,000 Hz
-23,230 Hz
-460,000 Hz
-462,300 Hz
Hz
The specification in Table 2-4 was derived using the following formula:
Note
For spans 1 MHz, the
For spans 1 MHz, the
is:
is:
synth freq) +
synth freq) +
Performance Tests 2-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test 3. Sw eep
Tim e Accu r a cy
Step 6. Sweep Time Accuracy, Sweep Times
ms
Marker A Time
[S W E E P T I M E )
Min
Measured
M ax
22 ms
55 ms
110 ms
550 ms
1.10
20 ms
50 ms
100 ms
500 ms
18 ms
45 ms
90 ms
450 ms
900 ms
Step 12. Sweep Time Accuracy, Sweep Times
s
Step 19. Sweep Time Accuracy, Sweep Times
ms (Alternate Procedure)
Gen Readout
[S W E E P T I M E )
Min
18.0 ms
45.0 ms
90.0
450 ms
900 ms
9.00 s
45.0 s
90.0
Measured
20 ms
50 ms
100 ms
500 ms
10
50
100
150
20.0
2-72 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy
4. Resolu tion
Ba n d w id th
Accu r a cy
Step 8. Bandwidth Accuracy
MARKER A Readout of 3
3
Bandwidth
M ax
d
[FREQUENCY SPAN)
Min
Measured
2.400 MHz
3.600 MHz
1.100 MHz
330.0
2 MHz
270.0
90.0
110.0
33.00
11.00
27.00
9.00
3.300
2.700
1.200
2
500 Hz
36 Hz
12 Hz
Performance Tests 2-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test 5. Resolu tion
Ba n d w id th
Selectivity
Steps 7, 8 and 9. Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity
Spectrum
Measured Measured Bandwidth
Maximum
Selectivity Selectivity Ratio
(VIDEOBW] 6 0
3
Bandwidth Bandwidth (60
BW
3
BW)
3 MHz
20 MHz
100 Hz
300 Hz
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
300
5 MHz
15: 1
13: 1
2 MHz
3 0
500
200
50
10
5
10
3
1
300 Hz
100 Hz
2
30 Hz 500 Hz
10 Hz 100 Hz
60
points separated by
Hz
2-74 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test 6. Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Test
6. Resolu tion
Ba n d w id th
Sw it ch in g
Un cer ta in ty Test
Step 6. Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty
‘FREQUENCY SPAN]
Deviation
Allowable
Deviation
(MKR
A
Readout,
1 MHz
5
5
MHz
MHz
MHz
0 (ref)
(ref)
3
300
100
30
10
3
MHz
5
500
500
50
50
10
1
1
300 Hz
100 Hz
30 Hz
10 Hz
1
200 Hz
100 Hz
Performance Tests 2-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test 7. In p u t
At t en u a t or
Sw it ch in g
Un cer ta in ty Test
Step 7. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty
(REFERENCE LEVEL] Frequency
Deviation
Corrected Allowable
Deviation Deviation
Synthesizer (MARKER A
Amplitude Amplitude
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
- 5 0
- 4 0
- 3 0
- 2 0
- 1 0
0
-52
-42
-32
-22
-12
- 2
0 (ref)
0 (ref)
8
2-76 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test 8. Frequency Response
8. F r equ en cy
R esp on s
Min
Measured
M ax
Signal Input
12
15
16
25
26
31
42
48
SIGNAL INPUT 2
(20 MHz to 1.5
SIGNAL INPUT 1
(20 MHz to 1.5
SIGNAL INPUT 1
(20 MHz to 500 MHz)
SIGNAL INPUT 1
(100
to 20 MHz)
SIGNAL INPUT 1
(100
SIGNAL INPUT 2
(100
to 20 MHz)
SIGNAL INPUT 1
(1
to 100
SIGNAL INPUT 1
1000 Hz
900 Hz
800 Hz
700 Hz
600 Hz
500 Hz
400 Hz
300 Hz
200 Hz
100 Hz
SIGNAL INPUT 1 (deviation in
49
50
100 Hz to 500 MHz (steps 16, 25, 42, or 48)
(overall max
SIGNAL INPUT 2 (deviation in
100 to 1.5 (steps 12 or 31)
(overall max overall min)
overall min)
SIGNAL INPUT 1 (deviation in
100 Hz to 1.5
(overall max
(steps 15, 16, 25, 42, or
overall min)
Performance Tests 2-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test 9. RF Ga in
Un cer ta in ty Test
Step 6.
Min
-1.0
LO Shift
Measured
M ax
+ 1.0
2-78 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test 10. IF Gain Uncertainty Test
Test 10. IF Ga in
Un cer ta in ty Test
Step 12. Step IF Gain Uncertainty, 10
Steps
Frequency
Synthesizer
Amplitude
Deviation
(Marker A
Amplitude
0
- 2
-12
-22
-32
-42
-52
-62
-72
100
100
100
100
100
100
10
0 (ref.)
- 1 0
- 2 0
- 3 0
- 4 0
- 5 0
- 6 0
- 7 0
10
- 8 0
- 9 0
-32
-42
-52
-62
-72
100
100
10
-100
-110
-120
10
10
Step 18. IF Gain Uncertainty, 2
Steps
Deviation
LEVEL) F r equency
Synthesizer (MARKER A
Amplitude
Amplitude
-1. 9
-3. 9
-5. 9
-7. 9
-9. 9
-3.9
-5.9
0
(ref)
-7.9
-9.9
-11.9
Performance Tests 2-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. IF Gain Uncertainty Test
Step 22. IF Gain Uncertainty, 0.1
Steps
[REFERENCE
Deviation
Frequency
Synthesizer
Amplitude
(MKR
A
Amplitude
0.0
-0.1
-0.2
-0.3
-0. 4
-0. 5
-0.6
-0.7
-0.8
-0.9
-1. 0
-1.1
-1.2
-1.3
-1.4
-1.5
-1.6
-1.7
-1. 8
-1.9
0 (ref)
-2.00
-2.10
-2.20
-2.30
-2.40
-2.50
-2.60
-2.70
-2.80
-2.90
-3.00
-3.10
-3.20
-3.30
-3.40
-3.50
-3.60
-3.70
-3.80
-3.90
Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test 10. IF Gain Uncertainty
Recorded deviations from Step 12.
Step 23.
A
B
Reference Level Range:
0 to -70
-80 to -120
Largest Positive Deviation:
Largest Negative Deviation:
Recorded deviations from Steps 18 and 22.
Step 24.
D
C
Step 18
Step 22
Largest Positive Deviation:
Largest Negative Deviation:
Steps 25 to 28. IF Gain Uncertainty
M in M easur ed M ax
I
0.6
25.
26.
27.
28.
Sum of positive deviations of A, C,
Sum of negative deviations of A, C,
Sum of positive deviations of A, B, C,
D
D
-0.6
1.0
D
Sum of negative deviations of A, B, C,
D -1.0
Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Log Sca le
Sw it ch in g
Un cer ta in ty
Step 6. Log Scale Switching Uncertainty
Deviation
Allowable
Deviation
SCALE MKR Amplitude
(dB/DIV)
0 (ref)
1
2
0 (ref)
5
10
2-82 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test 12. Amplitude Fidelity
Test 12. Am p litu d e
F id elity
Step 6. Log Amplitude Fidelity
Frequency
1
2
Fidelity Error
Synthesizer Calibrated MARKER A Amplitude (Column 2 Column
Amplitude Amplitude
Step
0 (ref)
- 1 0
- 2 0
- 3 0
- 4 0
- 5 0
- 6 0
- 7 0
- 8 0
- 9 0
0
(ref)
0 (ref)
0
- 1 0
- 2 0
- 3 0
- 4 0
- 5 0
- 6 0
- 7 0
- 8 0
Step 14. Linear Amplitude Fidelity
Allowable Range
% of Reference Level)
Frequency MARKER A
Synthesizer Amplitude
Amplitude
Min
M ax
0
10.87
-9.21
17.72
- 1 0
-23.10
Performance Tests 2-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test 13. Aver a ge
Noise Level Test
2-84 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14. Residual Responses
Test 14. Resid u a l
Resp on ses Test
Step 11. Maximum Residual Response
Frequency
Range
Measured
Max Amplitude Frequency
Measured
M ax
500 Hz to 1500 MHz
-105
Option 400:
500 Hz to 2.5
-95
2.5
to 1500 MHz
-105
Performance Tests 2-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15. Sp u r iou s
Resp on ses
Min
Description
Second Harmonic
Measured
M ax
-90
Third Harmonic
-105
-100
Third Order Intermodulation Distortion
30 MHz input signals, 1 MHz separation
Third Order Intermodulation Distortion
30 MHz input signals, 1 MHz separation
21
-100
-90
2 5 Third Order Intermodulation Distortion
30 MHz input signals, 10
separation
Third Order Intermodulation Distortion
2 6
-90
30 MHz input signals, 10
separation
3 4 Second Order Intermodulation Distortion
30 MHz input signals,
3 5 Second Order Intermodulation Distortion
30 MHz input signals,
-105
-105
2-86 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test 16. Residual FM
Test 16. Resid u a l
F M Test
Step 14. Residual FM
Performance Tests 2-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17.
Lin e-Rela ted
Sid eba n d s Test
Min
Step
M ea sur ed
M a x
-85
-85
-85
7
120 Hz (100 Hz)
180 Hz (150 Hz)
240 Hz (200 Hz)
7. Option 400
400 Hz
800 Hz
1200 Hz
-75
-75
-75
Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test 18. Calibrator Amplitude Accuracy Test
Test 18. Ca libr a tor
Am p litu d e
Accu r a cy
Step 2. CAL OUTPUT Amplitude
Min
M e a s u r e d M a x
-10.3
-9.70
Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
19. F a st
Sw eep Tim e
Accu r a cy Test
Step 11.
Sweep Time Accuracy
ms)
[SWEEP
Function Generator Frequency
5 ms
2.00
5.00
10.0
50.0
100
2 ms
1 ms
200
100
Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test 20.
LO Output Amplitude
Test 20.
LO
Ou tp u t Am p litu d e
Step 4.
LO Output Level
Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test 21. F r equ en cy
Refer en ce Er r or
Test
Min
Measured
Max 1
4. Frequency (initial)
5. Frequency (after 24 hours)
10.
10.
MHz
MHz
Hz 0.01 Hz
6.
Difference between 4 and 5
2-92 Performance Tests
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The procedures in this section are for the adjustment of the
instrument’s electrical performance characteristics.
In t r od u ct ion
The procedures require access to the interior of the instrument
and therefore should only be performed by qualified service
personnel. Refer to Safety Considerations in this introduction.
Wa r n in g
1. Low Voltage Power Supply Adjustments .....................
2. High Voltage Adjustment (SN
2. High Voltage Adjustment (SN
3. Preliminary Display Adjustment (SN
3. Preliminary Display Adjustment (SN
4. Final Display Adjustments(SN
4. Final Display Adjustments(SN
and Below)
and Above)
and Below)
and Above)
and Below)
and Above)
............. 3-10
.3-10
.3-10
3-10
............
.....
.....
.3-10
3-10
............
............
5. Log Amplifier Adjustments .............................. .....
.................................
7. 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments .................. ......
8. 21.4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments .....................
6. Video Processor Adjustments
3-10
.3-10
9. 3
Bandwidth Adjustments ................................
10. Step Gain and 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments
...... 3-10
...........................
and Below)
and Above)
11. Down/Up Converter Adjustments
12. Time Base Adjustment (SN
12. Time Base Adjustment (SN
13. 20 MHz Reference Adjustments
.3-10
.............. 3-10
.............. 3-10
.............................
14. 249 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustments ................
15. 275 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustments ................
3-10
3-10
16. Second IF Amplifier and Third Converter Adjustments
..... 3-10
17. Pilot Second IF Amplifier Adjustments ......................
18. Frequency Control Adjustments .............................
19. Second Converter Adjustments ..............................
3-10
3-10
3-10
.3-10
........ ......
20. 50 MHz Voltage-Tuned Oscillator Adjustments
............................
21. Slope Compensation Adjustment
.3-10
22. Comb Generator Adjustments ...............................
23. Down/Up Converter Adjustments ...........................
24. Track and Hold Adjustments ........................... .....
25. Digital Storage Display Adjustments .................. ......
.3-10
.3-10
The adjustment procedures should not be performed as routine
maintenance, but only when Performance Tests cannot meet
specifications. Before attempting any adjustment, allow the
instrument to warm up for one hour.
3-1 is a cross reference of
Function Adjusted to the related Adjustment procedure.
3-2
lists all adjustable components by name, reference designator, and
function.
Adjustments 3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Although this instrument has been designed in accordance with
international safety standards, this manual contains information,
cautions, and warnings which must be followed to ensure safe
operations and to retain the instrument in safe condition. Service and
adjustments should be performed only by qualified service personnel.
Sa fety
Con sid er a tion s
Adjustments in this section are performed with power supplied
to the instrument while protective covers are removed. There
are voltages at many points in the instrument which can,
if contacted, cause personal injury. Be extremely careful.
Adjustment should be performed only by trained service
personnel.
Wa r n in g
Power is still applied to this instrument with the LINE switch in
STANDBY. There is no OFF position on the LINE switch. Before
removing or installing any assembly or printed circuit board,
remove the power cord from the rear of both instruments and
wait for the MAINS indicators (red
to go completely out.
Capacitors inside the instrument may still be charged even if the
instrument has been disconnected from its source of power.
Use a non-metallic tuning tool whenever possible.
The equipment required for the adjustment procedures is listed
Equ ip m en t
R eq u ir ed
in
l-l, Recommended Test Equipment, at the beginning of
this manual. If the test equipment recommended is not available,
substitutions may be used if they meet the “Critical Specifications”
listed in the table. The test setup used for an adjustment procedure is
referenced in each procedure.
For adjustments requiring a non-metallic tuning tool, use fiber
tuning tool HP Part Number 8710-0033. In situations not requiring
non-metallic tuning tools, an ordinary small screwdriver or other
suitable tool is sufficient. However, it is recommended that you use a
non-metallic adjustment tool whenever possible. Never try to force
any adjustment control in the analyzer. This is especially critical when
tuning variable slug-tuned inductors and variable capacitors.
Ad ju stm en t Tools
3-2 Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Cross Reference
Adjustment Procedure
1. Low Voltage Power Supply Adjustments
2. High Voltage Adjustment
Function Adjusted
Low Voltage
High Voltage
CRT Display (Standard)
3. Preliminary Display Adjustment
4. Final Display Adjustments
CRT Display (Digital Storage)
IF Gains
25. Digital Storage Display Adjustments
5. Log Amplifier Adjustments
10. Step Gain and 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments
6. Video Processor Adjustments
Log Scales
Bandwidth Amplitudes
7. 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments
8. 21.4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments
11. Down/Up Converter Adjustments
3
Bandwidth
9. 3
Bandwidth Adjustments
10 MHz Internal Time Base
CAL OUTPUT Level
Phase Lock Loops
12. Time Base Adjustments
13. 20 MHz Reference Adjustments
14. 249 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustments
15. 275 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustments
22. Comb Generator Adjustments
RF Signal Conversion and RF Gains 16. Second IF Amplifier Adjustments
17. Pilot Second IF Amplifier Adjustments
19. Second Converter Adjustments
18. Frequency Control Adjustments
18. Frequency Control Adjustments
20. 50 MHz Voltage-Tuned Oscillator Adjustments
18. Frequency Control Adjustments
18. Frequency Control Adjustments
18. Frequency Control Adjustments
21. Slope Compensation Adjustment
23. Analog-to-Digital Converter Adjustments
24. Track and Hold Adjustments
Sweep Times
Frequency Tuning
Frequency Span
START and STOP Frequency
FM Span
Frequency Response
Digital Storage Video Processing
Factory-selected components are identified with an asterisk
schematic diagram. For most components, the range of their values
and functions are listed in Table 3-3, Factory- Selected Components.
on the
F a ct or y-Select ed
Com p on en ts
Part numbers for selected values are located in
3-4, HP Part
Numbers of Standard Value Replacement Components.
Adjustments 3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Any adjustments which interact with, or are related to, other
adjustments are indicated in the adjustments procedures. It is
important that adjustments so noted are performed in the order
indicated to ensure that the instrument meets specifications.
Rela ted
Ad ju stm en ts
Illustrations showing the locations of assemblies containing
adjustments, and the location of those adjustments within the
assemblies, are contained within the adjustment procedures to which
they apply. Major assembly and component location illustrations are
located at the rear of this manual.
Loca tion of
P oin ts a n d
Ad ju stm en ts
3-4 Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2. Adjustable Components
Adjustment Function
Reference
Designator
Adjustment
Name
Adjustment
Number
3
3
3
Adjusts rise and fall times of Z axis amplifier pulse.
ZHF GAIN
INT GAIN
Adjusts rise and fall times of Z axis amplifier pulse.
Sets adjustment range of front-panel INTENSITY
control.
Corrects focus for beam intensity.
FOCUS COMP
T/B FOC
T/B CTR
R/L FOC
R/L CTR
ORTHO
3
Magnitude of top/bottom focus correction.
Centering of top/bottom focus correction.
Magnitude of right/left focus correction.
Centering of right/left focus correction.
Sets orthogonality of CRT.
Adjusts spot size.
Sets adjustment range of front-panel INTENSITY
control.
3
3
3
INTENSITY
LIMIT
Adjusts astigmatism of CRT.
ASTIG
3
3
3
3
3
Coarse adjusts CRT focus.
FOCUS LIMIT
Adjusts rise and fall times of X deflection amplifier
pulse.
Adjusts rise and fall times of X deflection amplifier
pulse.
Adjusts horizontal position of trace.
Adjusts horizontal gain of trace.
X POSN
X GAIN
Adjusts rise and fall times or X deflection amplifier
pulse.
XHF GAIN
3
Adjusts rise and fall times of Y deflection amplifier
pulse.
Adjusts rise and fall times of Y deflection amplifier
pulse.
3
3
Adjusts vertical position of trace.
Adjusts vertical gain of trace.
Y POSN
Y GAIN
Adjusts rise and fall times of Y deflection amplifier
pulse.
YHF GAIN
1
Adjusts + 15 V
supply voltage.
+ 15 ADJ
Adjusts CRT high voltage.
2
HV ADJUST
For Serial Prefix
and below, see back of table for
through
to
Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2. Adjustable Components (continued)
Adjustment Function
Adjustment
Name
Adjustment
Number
Reference
Designator
SWEEP OFFSET
Adjusts digital sweep to begin at left edge of
25
graticule.
LL THRESH
Adjusts point at which graticule lines switch from
25
short
to long lines.
Adjusts horizontal sample and hold pulse.
Adjusts vertical sample and hold pulse.
25
5
Y S&H
X EXP
Y EXP
X GAIN
Y GAIN
25
25
25
25
25
Adjusts horizontal position of annotation.
Adjusts vertical position of annotation.
Adjusts horizontal gain of graticule lines.
Adjusts vertical gain of graticule lines.
Adjusts horizontal long lines on graticule
information.
Adjusts horizontal short lines on graticule
information.
25
Adjusts vertical short lines on graticule information.
25
25
25
Adjusts vertical long lines on graticule information.
Adjusts bottom line of graticule to align with fast
sweep signal.
YLL
Adjusts high end of digitized sweep.
Adjusts low end of digitized sweep.
GAIN
OFFS
23
23
Adjusts offset of negative peak detect mode.
Adjusts gain for positive peak detect mode.
Adjusts offset of positive peak detect mode.
Adjusts gain for negative peak detect mode.
Adjusts overall gain of track and hold.
24
24
24
24
24
24
OFS NEG
GPOS
OFS POS
GNEG
T/H GAIN
(T/H) OFS
Adjusts overall offset of track and hold.
Adjusts linear gain offsets.
Adjusts video processor offset.
Adjusts low end of video processor sweep.
Adjusts high end of video processor sweep.
6
6
6
6
LG OS
ZERO
FS
Adjusts 20
linear gain step.
Adjusts log amplifier offset.
ZERO
Adjusts log amplifier tuning voltage.
-12 VTV
1
Adjusts log amplifier center to IF.
Adjusts amplitude of log amplifier
CTR
AMPTD
filter.
Adjusts 10
linear gain step.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2. Adjustable Components (continued)
Reference
Designator
Adjustment
Name
Adjustment
Number
Adjustment Function
SYM
8
Centers
bandwidth filter crystal pole
symmetry.
LC CTR
CTR
SYM
8
8
8
Centers
Centers
Adjusts
bandwidth filter LC pole
bandwidth filter crystal pole
bandwidth filter crystal pole
symmetry.
1
LC DIP
LC DIP
SYM
8
8
8
Dips
Dips
bandwidth filter LC pole
bandwidth filter LC pole
bandwidth filter crystal pole
Adjusts
symmetry.
Centers
Centers
Centers
LC CTR
CTR
CTR
bandwidth filter LC pole
bandwidth filter crystal pole
bandwidth filter crystal pole
8
8
8
8
8
Adjusts LC filter amplitudes.
Adjusts crystal filter amplitudes.
XTAL
FREQ ZERO
COARSE
10
Coarse-adjusts 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator to set
adjustment range of front-panel FREQ ZERO
control.
+
ADJ
Adjusts +
Adjusts 10
Adjusts IF gain.
Adjusts first 20
Adjusts variable step gain.
Adjusts second 20
temperature compensation supply.
step gain.
10
10
10
10
10
10
CAL
step gain.
1
VR
1
step gain.
18.4 MHz NULL
WIDE GAIN
Nulls 18.4 MHz local oscillator signal.
Adjusts gain of down/up converter.
10
11
Adjusts 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole
Centers 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole
Peaks 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole
Adjusts 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole
Centers 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole
Peaks 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole
Adjusts 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole
Centers 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole
Peaks 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole
Adjusts 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole
Centers 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole
Peaks 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole
Adjusts 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole
symmetry.
symmetry.
symmetry.
symmetry.
symmetry.
SYM
CTR
PK
SYM
CTR
PK
SYM
CTR
PK
SYM
CTR
PK
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
1
SYM
Adjustments 3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2. Adjustable Components (continued)
Adjustment
Name
Adjustment Function
Reference
Designator
Adjustment
Number
7
7
Centers 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole
Adjusts 3 MHz bandwidth filter 10 Hz bandwidth
amplitude.
CTR
10 Hz AMPTD
1
10 Hz AMPTD
SYM
7
8
Adjusts 3 MHz bandwidth filter 10 Hz bandwidth
amplitude.
Adjusts
bandwidth filter crystal pole
symmetry.
CTR
LC CTR
SYM
8
8
8
Centers
bandwidth filter crystal pole
bandwidth filter LC pole
bandwidth filter crystal pole
Centers
Adjusts
symmetry.
Centers
Centers
8
8
8
8
8
CTR
bandwidth filter crystal pole
bandwidth filter LC pole
bandwidth filter LC pole
bandwidth filter LC pole
LC CTR
LC DIP
LC DIP
Dips
Dips
Adjusts attenuation of 21.4 MHz bandwidth filter
20 step.
Adjusts attenuation of 21.4 MHz bandwidth filter
10 step.
8
8
8
Adjusts LC filter amplitudes.
Adjusts crystal filter amplitudes.
XTAL
3 MHz
1 MHz
300
10
3
9
9
9
9
9
9
Adjusts 3 MHz bandwidth.
Adjusts 1 MHz bandwidth.
1
Adjusts 300
Adjusts 10
Adjusts 3
Adjusts 1
bandwidth.
bandwidth.
bandwidth.
bandwidth (Option 067).
1
filter.
filter.
filter.
filter.
filter.
20
20
20
20
20
20
Adjusts 32 1.4 MHz
Adjusts 321.4 MHz
Adjusts 32 1.4 MHz
Adjusts 32 1.4 MHz
Adjusts 32 1.4 MHz
10.7 MHz
NOTCH
Adjusts 10.7 MHz notch filter.
TRIPLER
MATCH
18
Adjusts for maximum 300 MHz output.
Adjusts output level of CAL OUTPUT.
lock tune voltage level.
CAL OUTPUT
BALANCE
19
21
3-8 Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2. Adjustable Components (continued)
Adjustment Function
Reference
Designator
Adjustment
Name
Adjustment
Number
IO
VE
VD
v c
VB
GA
GB
GC
GD
GE
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
Adjusts 3.3
oscillator drive current.
Adjusts mixer bias 18.6 to 22
Adjusts mixer bias 12.5 to 18.6
Adjusts mixer bias 5.8 to 12.5
Adjusts mixer bias 2 to 5.8
Adjusts IF gain 0.01 to 2.5
Adjusts IF gain 2 to 5.8
Adjusts IF gain 5.8 to 12.5
Adjusts IF gain 12.5 to 18.6
Adjusts IF gain 18.6 to 22
Adjusts linearity 5.8 to 12.5
Adjusts linearity 12.5 to 18.6
Adjusts linearity 12.5 to 18.6
Adjusts linearity 5.8 to 12.5
Adjusts linearity 12.5 to 18.6
Adjusts linearity 12.5 to 18.6
Adjusts linearity 18.6 to 22
Adjusts linearity 18.6 to 22
(high end).
(low end).
(high end).
(low end).
(high end).
(high end).
Adjusts IF gain in external mixer band.
GF
Al
Bl
Cl
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
Adjusts flatness 0.01 to 2.5
Adjusts flatness 2 to 5.8
(low end).
(low end).
(low end).
(low end).
(low end).
(high end).
(high end).
(high end).
(high end).
(high end).
Adjusts flatness 5.8 to 12.5
Adjusts flatness 12.5 to 18.6
Adjusts flatness 18.6 to 22
Adjusts flatness 0.01 to 2.5
Adjusts flatness 2 to 5.8
Adjusts flatness 5.8 to 12.5
Adjusts flatness 12.5 to 18.6
Adjusts flatness 18.6 to 22
Adjusts overall slope gain.
1
1
El
GAIN
Adjusts auto-sweep tracking.
Adjusts auto-sweep tracking.
Adjusts auto-sweep tracking.
21
21
21
21
21
Dl
5.8
2
Adjusts tracking at 5.8
Adjusts tracking at 2
(2 to 5.8).
(2 to 5.8).
Adjus tments 3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2. Adjustable Components (continued)
Adjustment
Name
Reference
Designator
Adjustment
Number
Adjustment Function
21
21
21
21
21
21
E
D
C
Adjusts tracking at 18.6
Adjusts tracking at 12.5
Adjusts tracking at 5.8
Adjusts tracking at 4
Sets SWEEP + TUNE OUT zero indication.
Sets -9 V and V dc reference supplies.
(18.6 to 22).
(12.5 to 18.6).
(5.8 to 12.5).
(2 to 5.8).
B
ZERO
1
14
14
14
14
400 MHz OUT
400 MHz OUT
400 MHz OUT
100 MHz
Peaks 400 MHz output signal.
Peaks 400 MHz output signal.
Peaks 400 MHz output signal.
Adjusts VCXO frequency.
15
15
Adjusts VCO frequency.
Adjusts VCO output level.
FREQ ADJUST
PWR ADJUST
+
ADJUST
1
Sets
V
supply voltage.
50
50
NULL
NULL
17
17
Nulls 50
Nulls 50
output.
output.
Nulls signal at 165
Nulls signal at 160 MHz.
Nulls signal at 170 MHz.
165 MHz NULL
160 MHz NULL
170 MHz NULL
17
17
17
160 MHz PEAK
VCO ADJ
160 MHz PEAK
160 MHz PEAK
17
17
17
17
Peaks 160 MHz output signal.
Adjusts
VCO frequency.
Peaks 160 MHz output signal.
Peaks 160 MHz output signal.
Adjusts VCO TUNE voltage at 150 MHz.
Adjusts VCO TUNE voltage at 100 MHz.
150 MHz ADJ
100 MHz ADJ
17
17
Sets discriminator pretune at 0.2 MHz.
Sets discriminator pretune at 0.3 MHz.
Adjusts frequency span accuracy
Adjusts frequency span accuracy
MHz
MHz
MHz SCAN
5 MHz SCAN
17
17
17
17
sweep).
sweep).
Adjusts CIA amplifier gate biasing.
BIAS ADJ
16
Al
Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2. Adjustable Components (continued)
Adjustment
Name
Adjustment
Number
Adjustment Function
Reference
Designator
IMPEDANCE
MATCH
IMPEDANCE
MATCH
16
16
13
Optimizes sampler output.
Optimizes sampler output.
Adjusts level of 30 MHz output.
Al
Al
IF GAIN
OFFSET
SWEEPTIME
AUX
Adjusts scan ramp offset.
Adjusts time of sweep ramp.
Adjusts AUX OUT sweep ramp.
Adjusts frequency span accuracy (YTO sweep).
Adjusts frequency span accuracy (YTO sweep).
13
13
13
13
13
GAIN 2
GAIN 1
1
Adjusts
V
supply voltage.
ADJ
Adjusts -12.6 V reference for YTO
(6.2
Adjusts summing amplifier offset.
high end
-12.6 VR
OFFSET
13
13
13
13
Adjusts 5.8
Adjusts 25
switchpoint overlap.
span offset.
2.5
25
SPAN
SPAN
OFFSET
Adjusts 5.8 and 12.5
Adjusts HOV reference for YTO DAC low end (2
switchpoint overlaps.
25
SPAN
13
13
Adjusts 2.5
span offset.
2.5
SPAN
13
OFFSET
Sets high-end frequency of YTO.
Sets low-end frequency YTO.
13
13
6.15
2.3
Adjusts reference oscillator frequency.
12
FREQ ADJ
For Serial Prefix
and below, see back of table for
exceptions.
IF Serial Prefix
and Below
Adjusts rise and fall times of Z axis amplifier pulse.
Sets adjustment range of front-panel INTENSITY
control.
3
3
INTENSITY
GAIN
Adjusts rise and
Coarse adjusts CRT focus; sets range of front-panel
FOCUS control.
times of Z axis amplifier pulse.
HF GAIN
FOCUS GAIN
3
3
Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2. Adjustable Components (continued)
Reference
Designator
Adjustment
Name
Adjustment
Number
Adjustment Function
Sets orthogonality of CRT.
Adjusts for optimum rectangular shape of CRT
ORTHO
PATTERN
3
3
display.
INTENSITY
Sets adjustment range of front-panel INTENSITY
control.
3
LIMIT
ASTIG
FOCUS GAIN
Adjusts astigmatism of CRT.
Adjusts for optimum focus of CRT display.
3
4
A
Coarse adjusts CRT focus.
FOCUS LIMIT
3
Adjusts rise and fall times of X deflection amplifier
pulse.
Adjusts rise and fall times of X deflection amplifier
pulse.
Adjusts horizontal position of trace.
3
3
3
X POSN
X GAIN
HFGAIN
Adjusts horizontal gain of trace.
Adjusts rise and fall times or X deflection amplifier
pulse.
3
Adjusts rise and fall times of Y deflection amplifier
pulse.
Adjusts rise and fall times of Y deflection amplifier
pulse.
3
3
Adjusts vertical position of trace.
Adjusts vertical gain of trace.
Y POSN
Y GAIN
Adjusts rise and fall times of Y deflection amplifier
pulse.
HF GAIN
Adjusts + 15 V dc supply voltage.
Adjusts CRT high voltage.
1
+ 15 SV ADJ
HV ADJUST
2
Adjusts high end of digitized sweep.
Adjusts low end of digitized sweep.
23
23
FS
ZERO
IF Serial Prefix
and Below
Coarse-adjusts reference oscillator frequency.
Fine-adjusts reference oscillator frequency.
12
12
COARSE
FINE
3-12 Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-3. Factory-Selected Components
Reference Adjustment Range of Values Function of Component
Designator Procedure
2.87 K to 6.19 K Sets intensity level.
19.6 K to 42.2 K Sets intensity level.
121 K to 162 K Sets intensity level.
1
10.0 K to 26.1 K Sets intensity level.
Open or 1.0-10.0 Compensates for feedthrough of INTG signal
to
Compensates for feedthrough of INTG signal
to
1.0 to 10.0
Compensates for DAC ladder resistance.
Compensates for DAC ladder resistance.
5.0 K to 12.5 K
5.0 K to 12.5 K
Sets adjustment range of
FS
562 to 1.33 K
56.2 K to 825 K Compensates for ON resistance of
1
Sets adjustment range of
1.96 K to 5.11 K Adjusts log fidelity.
68.1 to 178
1 K to 31.6 K
90.9 to 237
Log fidelity.
Adjusts overall linear gain.
Sets adjustment range of
Temperature compensation
Temperature compensation
Temperature compensation
Temperature compensation
Temperature compensation
Temperature compensation
16.2 to 46.4
100 to OPEN
1 K to OPEN
1 K to OPEN
1 K to OPEN
1 K to OPEN
1 K to OPEN
Adjusts
bandwidths
filter shape in wide
100
390 to 680
1
Sets adjustment range of CTR.
Sets adjustment range of CTR.
Log fidelity
OPEN or 5.6-15.0
91 to 130
10.0 to 82.5
Log fidelity
19.6 to 82.5
Log fidelity
51.1 to 1 K
Log fidelity
10.0 to 61.9
Log fidelity
Log fidelity
Sets adjustment range of
Sets adjustment range of AMPTD.
61.9 to 1.96 K
2.15 K to 13.3 K
51.1 to 133
46.4 K to 215 K
Adjus tments 3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-3. Factory-Selected Components (continued)
Adjustmenl
Procedure
Reference
Designator
Range of Values
Function of Component
1.78 K to 13.3 K Log fidelity
8.25 K to 82.5 K
1.0 K to 6.81 K
filter temperature compensation
filter temperature compensation
filter temperature compensation
1 K-OPEN
1
1.0 to 8.2
180 to 270
1.0 to 8.2
1.0 to 8.2
180 to 270
180 to 270
180 to 270
13
Sets adjustment range of SYM.
Sets adjustment range of LC CTR.
Sets adjustment range of SYM.
Sets adjustment range of SYM.
Sets adjustment range of LC CTR.
Sets adjustment range of LC CTR.
Sets adjustment range of center cap.
Sets adjustment range of center cap.
Sets adjustment range of center cap.
Matches amplitude of LC to XTAL bandwidths.
13
‘4 to 13
0 to 9.09
3.16 K to 8.25 K Adjusts LC filter bandwidth.
6.19 K to 12.1 K
383 to 825
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Matches amplitude of LC to XTAL bandwidths.
6.19 K to 12.1 K Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
1 K to OPEN
1 K to OPEN
0 to 100
Sets level of + 10 V TC supply.
Sets level of + 10 V TC supply.
Adjusts bandwidth shape in 10
bandwidth.
3.1 6 K to 8.25 K Adjusts LC filter bandwidth.
6.19 K to 12.1 K Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts positive feedback.
Sets adjustment range of LC amplitudes.
909 to 2.73 K
100 K to
Sets adjustment range of FREQ ZERO COARSE.
Sets 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator power.
10
11
10
10
10
1.62 K to 2.61 K
1.33 K to 3.48 K Adjusts
step.
step.
step.
Adjust
472 to 1.62 K
215 to OPEN
Adjusts
42.2 to 75.0
Adjusts level of 3 MHz output.
Centers first pole.
56 to 82
56 to 82
56 to 82
56 to 82
56 to 82
Sets adjustment range of second pole P K.
Sets adjustment range of third pole P K.
Sets adjustment range of fourth pole P K.
Sets adjustment range of fifth pole P K.
Centers first pole.
7
7
7
7
7
1
1.5 to 12.0
10.0 K to 17.8 K
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
3-14 Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-3. Factory-Selected Components (continued)
Reference Adjustment
Range of Values
Function of Component
Designator
Procedure
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Compensates for gain of
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
10.0 K to 17.8
10.0 K to 17.8
10.0 K to 17.8
10.0 K to 17.8
10.0 K to 17.8
10.0 K to 17.8
10.0 K to 17.8
7.50 K to 13.3
7.50 K to 13.3
38.3 to 68.1
38.3 to 68.1
100 to 178
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
10
383 to 681
1.47 K to 2.61
38.3 to 68.1
100 to 178
K
K
K
K
K
383 to 681
1.47 K to 2.61
38.3 to 68.1
100 to 178
383 to 681
1.47 K to 2.61
3.83 to 68.1
100 to 178
383 to 681
1.47 K to 2.61
3.83 to 68.1
100 to 178
383 to 681
1.47 K to 2.61
for exceptions to
For Option 462, see back of this
Sets adjustment range of SYM.
Sets adjustment range of LC CTR.
Sets adjustment range of SYM.
Sets adjustment range of LC CTR.
Sets adjustment range of LC CTR.
Sets adjustment range of LC CTR.
Sets adjustment range of center cap.
Sets adjustment range of center cap.
14
1
1.0 to 8.2
180 to 270
1.0 to 8.2
180 to 270
180 to 270
180 to 270
4
4
to 13
to 13
Adjus tments 3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-3.
Components (continued)
Function of Component
Adjustment Range of Values
Reference
Designator Procedure
100
0 to 100
3.83 K to 9.09 K Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
909 to 2.37 K Adjusts LC mode feedback.
to
Sets adjustment range of LC amplitude.
Adjusts bandwidth shape in 10 bandwidth.
3.16 K to 8.25 K Adjusts LC filter bandwidth.
100 K to OPEN
100 K to OPEN
10 K to OPEN
(85662-60131 only)
(85662-60190 only)
3.83 K to 9.09 K Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth.
Adjusts LC filter bandwidth.
3.16 K to 8.25 K
6.81 K to 10.0 K Sets TC of 3
38.3 K to 56.2 K Sets TC of 10
28.7 K to 42.2 K Sets TC of 300
RBW
RBW
RBW
6.19 K to 9.09 K Sets TC of 1 MHz RBW
1.96 K to 2.87 K Sets TC of 3 MHz RBW
11
82.5 K to 147 K
261 K to 464 K
56.2 K to 100 K Sets 1.2
562 K to Sets 0.4
46.4 K to 82.5 K Sets 1.8
316 K to 562 K
422 K to 750 K
619 K to
Sets 1.0
Sets 0.2
step size
step size
step size
step size
step size
step size
step size
step size.
step size.
step size.
Sets 0.6
Sets 0.8
Sets 0.1
Sets 1.6
90.0 K to 162 K
61.9 K to 110 K Sets 1.4
Centers 3
Centers 10
Centers 300
Centers 1 MHz BW adjustment range.
Centers 3 MHz BW adjustment range.
BW adjustment range.
BW adjustment range.
BW adjustment range.
2.15 K to 8.25 K
42.2 K to 100 K
75 K to 178 K
10.0 K to 17.5 K
100 to 5.11 K
Serial Prefix
to
and Serial Prefix
and below, see the back of this table for exceptions to
Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-3. Factory-Selected Components (continued)
Adjustment
Function of Component
Reference
Range of Values
Designator Procedure
18
19
Sets sampler drive level
Sets adjustment range of
OUTPUT
23.7 to 180
909 to 1.21 K
CAL
18
Sets HET UNLOCK delay time constant for HP
(10 K = HP
56.2 K
21
21
21
21
21
21
10 to 40 K
10 to 40 K
10 to 40 K
10 to 40 K
10 to 40 K
10 to 40 K
Sets adjustment range of
Sets adjustment range of
Sets adjustment range of
Sets adjustment range of
Sets adjustment range of
Sets adjustment range of
GA
GB
GC
GD
GE
GF
21
21
100 K to 196 K
Adjusts band A breakpoint for best flatness.
Sets YTX delay compensation.
Sets YTX delay compensation.
Not loaded for HP
Sets YTX delay compensation.
Sets YTX delay compensation.
0.1 to 0.68
0.1 to 0.68
OPEN
0.1 to 0.68
0.1 to 0.68
21
21
21
21
Sets adjustment range of
5.8
13.356
K
Sets tuning range of
Centers the adjustment range of
100 MHz.
14
14
Open to 15
0.22 to 0.68
around
Sets biasing of
196 to 511
Sets -10
signal.
Sets -10
signal.
Sets -10
signal.
output level of the 400 MHz
output level of the 400 MHz
output level of the 400 MHz
14
14
14
Open to 825
6.8 to 61.9
110 to 825
Sets adjustment range of
V
1
213 to 261
Selected to minimize mixer distortion.
15
Sets adjustment range of
PEAK
Sets adjustment range of
PEAK
160 MHz
160 MHz
17
17
10 to 15
10 to 15
Sets output power to -20
Sets output power to -20
at
at
17
17
68.1 to 90.9
68.1 to 90.9
Adjus tments 3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-3. Factory-Selected Components (continued)
Function of Component
Reference Adjustment Range of Values
Designator P rocedure
Al
348 to 562
Sets YTO loop gain crossover to 20
Al
Al
16
16
16
130 to 220
2.2 to 3.3
15 to 51.1
Sets YTO loop response
response.
MHz.
Sets YTO loop
response
Sets YTO loop 20 to 30 MHz.
620 to 1300
62 to 91
Sets period of microprocessor clock.
Sets oscillator frequency to 10 MHz
MHz.
13
Sets adjustment range of
GAIN 1
73.874
K
Serial Prefix
to
range
BW adjustment
Centers 3
Centers 10
Centers 300
8.25 to 12.1 K
82.5 to 121 K
range
BW adjustment
BW adjustment range
range
range
Centers 1 MHz BW adjustment
Centers 3 MHz BW adjustment
14.7 to 21.5 K
162 to 237 K
82.5 to 147 K
261 to 464 K
56.2 to 100 K
562 K to 1 MO
46.4 to 82.5 K
316 to 562 K
422 to 750 K
619 K to 1.1
Sets 1.0
Sets 0.2
Sets 1.2
Sets 0.4
Sets 1.8
Sets 0.6
Sets 0.8
Sets 0.1
Sets 1.6
Sets 1.4
step size
step size
step size
step size
step size
step size
step size
step size
step size
step size
90 to 162 K
61.9 to 110 K
Serial Prefix
and Below
196 K to 348 K
Sets 1.4
Sets 1
Sets 1.8
step size.
step size.
step size.
215 K to 383 K
147 K to 261 K
1
3-18 Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-3. Factory-Selected Components (continued)
Reference Adjustment Range of Values Function of Component
Designator P rocedure
Option 462
5.62 K to 7.5 K
5.62 K to 7.5 K
5.62 K to 7.5 K
5.62 K to 7.5 K
5.62 K to 7.5 K
5.62 K to 7.5 K
5.11 K to 6.81 K
5.11 K to 6.81 K
5.11 K to 6.81 K
5.11 K to 6.81 K
99 to 133
383 to 681
99 to 133
99 to 133
316 to 619
99 to 133
316 to 619
99 to 133
316 to 619
6.8 K to 17.6 K
1.0 to 8.2
4.22 K to 6.19 K
21.5 K to 34.8 K
51.1 K to 75.0 K
11.0 K to 16.2 K
2.87 K to 4.22 K
7.50 K to 14.7 K
162 K to 348 K
28.7 K to 61.9 K
4.22 K to 8.25
Option 067
Sets TC of 1
Centers 1
067)
RBW (Opt 067)
BW adjustment range. (Option
215 K to 316 K
100 K to 511 K
Centers 1
BW adjustment range (Opt 067)
388 to 550 K
Adjus tments 3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-4. Standard Value Replacement Capacitors
ors
r
Type: Tubular
Type: Dipped Mica
Range: 27 to 680
Tolerance:
Range: 1 to 24
1 to 9.1
=
Fart Number
Value
1.0
1
Fart Number CD
Value
27
0160-2236
0160-2237
0150-0091
0160-2239
0160-2240
0160-2241
0160-2242
0160-2243
0160-2244
0150-0059
8
9
8
1
0160-2306
0160-2199
0160-2150
0160-2308
0140-0190
3
2
5
5
7
1.2
1.5
1.8
2.0
2.2
2.4
2.7
3.0
3.3
30
33
36
39
4
5
6
7
8
8
43
0160-2200
0160-2307
0160-2201
0140-0191
0140-0205
6
4
7
8
5
47
51
56
62
0
0140-0192
9
3.6
0160-2246
68
1
0160-2202
0140-0193
0160-2203
0160-2204
3.9
4.3
4.7
5.1
0160-2247
0160-2248
0160-2249
0160-2250
75
82
91
8
0
9
0
2
3
6
100
0140-0194
1
5.6
7
110
120
130
150
160
180
0160-2251
1
2
3
2
8
9
0
1
0160-2205
0140-0195
0140-0196
0160-2206
6.2
6.8
7.5
8.2
0160-2252
0160-2253
0160-2254
0160-2255
4
2
0140-0197
9.1
0160-2256
0140-0198
0160-0134
0140-0199
0140-0210
0160-2207
0160-2208
0160-2209
0140-0200
0160-0939
5
1
6
2
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
15.0
0160-2257
0160-2258
0160-2259
0160-2260
3
4
5
200
220
240
270
8
3
9
0160-2261
0160-2262
0160-2263
0160-2264
0160-2265
300
330
360
390
430
470
4
5
0
4
0
1
2
3
16.0
18.0
20.0
22.0
4
0160-3533
0
24.0
0160-2266
1
2
0160-3534
0160-3535
0160-3536
0160-3537
510
560
620
680
3
4
Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-5.
Standard Value Replacement 0.125 Resistors
Resistors
Type: Fixed-Film
Range: 10 to
Wattage: 0.125 at
Tolerance:
Ohms
Value
10.0
Fart Number
Fart Number
Value
0757-0346
422
464
511
562
619
681
750
825
909
0698-3447
0698-0082
0757-0416
0757-0417
11.0
12.1
13.3
14.7
16.2
17.8
19.6
21.5
23.7
26.1
28.7
31.6
34.8
38.3
42.2
46.4
51.1
56.2
61.9
68.1
75.0
82.5
90.9
100
110
121
133
147
162
178
196
215
237
261
287
316
348
383
0
1
0
1
7
7
8
9
0
3
4
5
3
7
5
7
9
1
9
8
9
6
0
7
0
8
9
0
1
0757-0379
0698-3427
0698-3428
0757-0382
0757-0294
0698-3429
0698-3430
0698-3431
0698-3432
0698-3433
0757-0180
0698-3434
0698-3435
0757-0316
0698-4037
0757-0394
0757-0395
0757-0276
0757-0397
0757-0419
0757-0420
0757-0421
0757-0422
0757-0280
0757-0424
0757-0274
0757-0317
0757-1094
6
9
2
5
6
7
8
2
9
0
6
0
0
1
7
3
4
5
9
0
1
2
2
3
4
4
7
8
9
4
0
1
0698-0083
0698-0084
0698-3150
0698-0085
0698-3151
0757-0279
0698-3152
0698-3153
0698-3154
0698-3155
0757-0399
0757-0400
0757-0401
0757-0402
0757-0403
0698-3437
0698-3438
0757-0405
0698-3439
0698-3440
0698-3441
0698-3442
0698-3132
0698-3443
0698-3444
0698-3445
0698-3446
3
7
5
4
7
8
1
9
0
1
0757-0200
0757-0290
0757-0439
0757-0440
0757-0441
0757-0288
0757-0442
0757-0443
0757-0444
0757-0289
0698-3156
0757-0447
ll.OK
2
2
4
2
3
Adjustments 3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-5.
Standard Value Replacement 0.125 Resistors
(continued)
Resistors
Type: Fixed-Film
Range: 10 to
1
Ohms
Wattage: 0.125 at
e
Fart Number
Part Number
Value
Value
6
7
8
0
1
3
8
2
3
5
4
5
6
7
8
1
8
3
3
4
5
6
8
3
9
9
0
7
8
1
0757-0465
0757-0466
0757-0467
0698-345 1
0698-3452
0757-0470
0698-3243
0698-3453
0698-3454
0698-3266
0698-3455
0698-3456
0698-3457
0698-3458
0698-3459
0698-3460
0698-3260
0698-3136
0698-3157
0757-0199
0698-3158
0698-3159
0698-3449
0698-3160
0757-0123
0698-3161
0698-3450
0698-3162
0757-0459
0757-0460
0757-046 1
0757-0462
0757-0463
0757-0464
2
3
4
5
9
3-22 Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-6. Standard Value Replacement 0.5 Resistors
Resistors
Type: Fixed-Film
Range: 10 to
Ohms
Wattage: 0.5 at
Fart Number
Value
Part Number
Value
4
5
6
6
2
9
3
6
7
8
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
7
8
9
4
5
6
7
2
8
9
5
9
5
8
9
0
8
5
7
1
0757-0984
0575-0985
0757-0986
0757-0001
0698-3388
0757-0989
0698-3389
0698-3390
0698-3391
0698-3392
0757-0003
0698-3393
0698-3394
0698-3395
0698-3396
0698-3397
0698-3398
0757-1000
0757-1001
1002
383
0698-3404
0698-3405
0698-0090
0757-0814
0757-0815
3
4
7
9
0
4
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
5
9
0
4
6
7
8
7
7
1
2
3
2
4
2
3
0
4
5
6
7
8
2
4
5
10.0
11.0
12.1
13.3
14.7
16.2
17.8
19.6
21.5
23.7
26.1
28.7
31.6
34.8
38.3
42.2
46.4
51.1
56.2
61.9
68.1
75.0
82.5
90.0
100
110
121
133
147
162
178
196
215
237
261
287
316
422
464
511
562
619
681
750
825
909
0757-0816
0757-0817
0757-0818
0757-0819
0757-0159
0757-0820
0757-082 1
0698-3406
l.lOK
0757-0873
0698-0089
0698-3407
0698-3408
0698-3409
0698-0024
0698-3101
0698-3410
0698-3411
0698-3412
0698-3346
0698-3348
0757-0833
0757-0834
0757-0196
0757-0835
0757-0836
0757-0837
0757-0838
0757-0839
0757-0841
0698-3413
0698-3414
0757-0794
0757-0795
0757-0796
0757-0797
0757-0198
0757-0799
0698-3399
0698-3400
0757-0802
0698-3334
0757-1060
0698-340 1
0698-3102
0757-1090
0757-1092
0698-3402
0698-3403
2
348
Adjustments 3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-6.
Standard Value Replacement 0.5 Resistors
(continued)
Resistors
Type: Fixed-Film
Range: 10 to
Ohms
Wattage: 0.5 at
e
*an
Value
Fart Number
Value
Fart Number
0757-0844
0698-0025
0698-3415
0698-3416
0698-3417
0698-3418
0698-3103
0698-3419
0698-3420
0698-342 1
0698-3422
0698-3423
0757-0853
0757-0854
0757-0309
0757-0855
0757-0856
0757-0857
0757-0858
0757-0367
0757-0859
0757-0860
0757-0310
0698-3175
5
8
6
7
8
9
9
0
3
4
5
6
6
7
7
8
9
0
1
2
9
0
7
7
1
0757-0130
0757-0129
0757-0063
0757-0127
0698-3424
0757-0064
0757-0154
0698-3425
0757-0195
0757-0133
0757-0134
0698-3426
0757-0135
0757-0868
0757-0136
0757-0869
0757-0137
0757-0870
0
8
9
5
6
9
7
3
8
4
9
7
0
4
1
38.313
46.413
7
2
5
0
5
0757-0059
0757-0139
0757-087 1
0757-0194
0698-3464
8
8
5
3-24 Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Low-Voltage Power Supply Adjustments
1. Low -Volta ge
P ow er Su p p ly
Ad ju st m en t s
IF-Display Section:
V Regulator
R efer en ce
+ 120 V,
V Regulator (Serial Number Prefix
and
and
above)
below)
+ 100 V,
V Regulator (Serial Number Prefix
RF Section:
Voltage Regulator
The + 15 V supply is adjusted for the IF-display Section, and the
V supply is adjusted for the RF Section. All other low-voltage supplies
are measured to ensure that they are within tolerance.
Descr ip tion
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
DIGITAL VOLTMTER
ADAPTER
Figure
Low-Voltage Power Supply Adjustments Setup
Digital Voltmeter (DVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP
Equ ip m en t
P r oced u r e
1. Position the instrument on its right side with the IF-Display
Section facing right, as shown in Figure 3-1. Remove the top
cover of the IF-Display Section and the bottom cover of the RF
Section.
IF -Disp la y Section
2. Set the LINE switch to ON and press
Mains indicator
(red LED) in the IF-Display Section should be lit. See
Figure 3-2 and Figure 3-3 for the location of
Use Figure 3-2 for IF-Display Sections with serial numbers
below. Use Figure 3-3 for IF-Display Sections with serial numbers
and above.
and
Note
3. Verify that the + 15 V indicator
(yellow LED) is lit.
Adjus tments 3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Low-Voltage Power Supply Adjustments
4. Connect the DVM to
on the IF-Display Section. DVM
V dc. If the voltage is out of
indication should be + 15.000
tolerance, adjust
+ 15 V ADJ for the specified voltage.
,
5
Figure 3-2.
IF-Display Section Low-Voltage Adjustments (SN
and
Below)
Al
A
Figure 3-3.
IF-Display Section Low-Voltage Adjustments (SN
Above)
and
5. Verify that the -15 V indicator
(yellow LED) is lit.
6. Connect the DVM to
DVM indication should be
-15.000
V dc. The -15 V supply is referenced to the + 15
V supply; therefore, if the -15 V supply is out of tolerance, a
circuit malfunction is indicated.
Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Low-Voltage Power Supply Adjustments
7. Verify that the + 120 V indicator
(yellow LED) is lit.
and below, indicator
On IF-Display Sections serial prefixed
is a + 100 V indicator.
Not e
Not e
8. Connect the DVM to
DVM indication should be + 120.0
V dc. The + 120 V supply is referenced to the + 15 V supply;
therefore, if the + 120 V supply is out of tolerance, a circuit
malfunction is indicated.
On IF-Display Sections serial prefixed
indication should be + 100.0
and below, the DVM
V
9. Verify that the
V indicator
(yellow LED) is lit.
10. Connect the DVM to
V dc. The
DVM indication should be
V supply is referenced to the + 15 V
V supply is out of tolerance, a
supply; therefore, if the
circuit malfunction is indicated.
11. The
Figure 3-4.
indicator
(yellow LED) should be lit. See
RF Section
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
A D J
\
A D J
Figure 3-4. Location of RF Section Low-Voltage Adjustments
12. Connect the DVM to
with the ground lead to
Adjust
ADJ for a DVM indication of
V dc.
13. The +
indicator
(yellow LED) should be lit.
14. Connect the DVM to
+ 15.000
The DVM indication should be
V dc. The +
supply is referenced to the
supply is out of tolerance, a
supply, therefore, if the +
circuit malfunction is indicated.
15. The
indicator
(yellow LED) should be lit.
16. Connect the DVM to
The DVM indication should be
supply is referenced to the
V dc. The
Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Low-Voltage Power Supply Adjustments
supply, therefore, if the
supply is out of tolerance, a circuit
(yellow LED) should be lit.
malfunction is indicated.
17. The
indicator
18. Connect the DVM to
The DVM indication should be
supply is referenced to the
-5.200
V
The
supply, therefore, if the
malfunction is indicated.
supply is out of tolerance, a circuit
19. The
indicator
(yellow LED) should be lit.
20. Connect the DVM to
The DVM indication should be
supply is referenced to the +
-15.000
V dc. The
supply, therefore, if the
malfunction is indicated.
supply is out of tolerance, a circuit
3-28 Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN
and Below)
2. High -Volta ge
Ad ju stm en t (SN
a n d Below )
This procedure is for IF-Display Sections with serial number prefixes
Not e
and below. The procedure for serial prefixes
is located immediately after this procedure.
and above
This procedure should be performed whenever the
High
Not e
Voltage Multiplier,
CRT, or
High Voltage Regulator
Assembly is repaired or replaced.
IF-Display Section:
Z-Axis Amplifier
High-Voltage Regulator
V Regulator
R efer en ce
+ 100 V,
V Regulator
Descr ip tion
Wa r n in g
This procedure is intended for adjustment purposes only.
Voltages are present which, if contacted, could cause serious
personal injury. Approximately -4000 V dc can be present on
the
disconnected. Do not attempt to remove the
Assembly from the instrument. Do not disconnect the CRT’s
High Voltage assembly even when the ac line cord is
High-Voltage
post-accelerator cable; the CRT can hold a + 18
several days.
dc charge for
If for any reason the
High Voltage Assembly or the
post accelerator cable must be removed, refer to “Discharge
Procedure for High Voltage and CRT” at the end of this
adjustment procedure.
A
1OOO:l divider probe is used to measure the CRT cathode voltage.
First, the high-voltage probe is calibrated by comparing measurements
of the + 100 V dc supply voltage with and without the probe. Any
measurement error due to the use of the high-voltage probe is
calculated into the adjustment specification of the CRT cathode
voltage, which is adjusted with the
the CRT cathode voltage is properly adjusted, the CRT filament
voltage will be V rms measured with CRT beam at
HV ADJUST control. When
cut-off, which is required for maximum CRT life. The filament voltage
is referenced to the high-voltage cathode and can only be measured
directly with special equipment.
Adjus tments 3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN
and Below)
DIGITIZING
OSCILLOSCOPE
HI-VOLTAGE
SIGNAL ANALYZER
Figure 3-5. High Voltage Adjustment Setup
...................................
..................
Digital Voltmeter (DVM)
DC High-Voltage Probe (1000: 1 divider)
Equ ip m en t
HP
......
Display Adjustment PC Board (service accessory)
....................................
HP
HP
HP
Digitizing Oscilloscope
Divider Probe
Function Generator
........................................
...........................
required)
High -Volta ge
Ad ju stm en t P r oced u r e
In the following procedure, it is necessary to probe voltages
which, if contacted, could cause serious personal injury. Use
a nonmetallic alignment tool when making adjustments. Be
extremely careful.
Wa r n in g
Do not attempt to measure the CRT filament voltage directly. The
filament voltage is referenced to the high-voltage cathode and
can only be measured safely with a special high-voltage true-rms
voltmeter and probe.
Wa r n in g
1. Set the spectrum analyzer’s LINE switch to STANDBY.
2. Remove the top cover from the IF-Display Section, and connect
the equipment as shown in Figure 3-5 and described in the
following steps.
3. Set the DVM to the 100 V range, and connect the DVM to
(+ 100 V). Do not use the high-voltage probe. See
Figure 3-6 for the location of
Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN
and Below)
The accuracy of the high-voltage probe is specified for a probe
connected to a dc voltmeter with 10 input resistance. HP
and HP digital voltmeters have a 10 input resistance on the
Note
100 V and 1000 V ranges. All measurements in this procedure should
be performed with the DVM manually set to the 100 V range (fOO.OOO
on the HP
display).
,
H I G H
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
.
Figure 3-6. Location of High Voltage Adjustments
4. Set the LINE switch to ON. Set the front-panel INTENSITY
control fully counterclockwise (CRT beam at cut-off) to prevent
possible damage to the CRT.
5. Note the DVM indication at
DVM Indication:
6. Connect the high-voltage probe to the DVM. Connect the probe to
7. Note the DVM indication.
DVM Indication:
8. Divide the DVM indication in step 7 by the DVM indication in
step 5. This gives the calibration factor needed to compensate for
high-voltage probe error.
Calibration Factor:
9. Disconnect the high-voltage probe from
Set the
LINE switch to STANDBY. Remove the ac line cord from both
instrument sections.
The MAINS power-on indicator
(red LED) should
Wa r n in g
be completely off before proceeding with this procedure. See
Figure 3-6. The indicator will remain lit for several seconds after
the ac line cord has been removed, and will go out slowly (the
light becomes dimmer until it is completely out).
Adjustments 3-3 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN
and Below)
With the protective cover removed in the following step, do not
Wa r n in g
place hands near the
High-Voltage assembly. High voltage
(approximately -4000 V dc) can be present even when the ac line
cord is disconnected.
10. Wait at least one minute for capacitors to discharge to a safe
level.
11. Remove the protective cover from the
High-Voltage
High-Voltage
Regulator. A label should be visible on the
Transformer. Record the voltage listed on the label for use in step
15.
If the label is missing, use the nominal value of -3790 V dc.
Note
12. Connect the high-voltage probe to
the location of the test point.
See Figure 3-7 for
With power supplied to the instrument,
level of approximately -4000 V dc. Be extremely careful.
is at a voltage
Wa r n in g
V o l t a g e
R e g u
Figure 3-7. Location of Label and Test Point
13. Reconnect ac line cords to both instrument sections. Set the LINE
switch to ON.
14. Wait approximately 30 seconds for the dc regulator circuits to
stabilize.
15. Adjust
calibration factor (calculated in step 8) times the voltage labeled
on the top of High-Voltage Regulator (noted in step 11). See
HV ADJ for a DVM indication equal to the
Figure 3-6 for the location of the adjustment.
V dc
EXAMPLE:
3-32 Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN
and Below)
If the calibration factor calculated in step 8 is 0.00099, and
is labeled for -3875 V, then adjust HV ADJ for
a DVM indication of:
0.00099 x (-3875 V) = -3.836 V dc
16. With the front-panel INTENSITY control fully counterclockwise,
wait approximately 30 minutes to allow the high-voltage supply to
stabilize and the CRT to normalize. This
turn-on will extend
CRT life expectancy, particularly if a new CRT has just been
installed.
17. Readjust
HV ADJ for a DVM indication equal to the
voltage determined in step 15.
18. If a new CRT has just been installed do the following:
a. Set the front-panel INTENSITY control so the CRT trace is
barely visible.
b. Wait an additional 30 minutes for the CRT to normalize.
c. Readjust
HV ADJ for a DVM indication equal to the
voltage determined in step 15.
19. Set the LINE switch to STANDBY. Remove the ac line cord from
each instrument section.
F ocu s a n d In ten sity
Ad ju st m e n t s
20. Wait at least one minute for the MAINS power-on indicator
(red LED) to go out completely before proceeding.
21. Disconnect the high-voltage probe from
22. Remove the
Intensity Control Assembly from the IF-Display
Section and install in its place the Display Adjustment Board,
HP part number 85662-60088. Set the switch on the Display
Adjustment Board in the “down” position. (This applies
approximately
V dc to the front-panel INTENSITY control.)
23. Connect a calibrated
Channel 1 input.
divider probe to the oscilloscope
24. On the oscilloscope, press (RECALL) (CLEAR) to perform a soft reset.
On the oscilloscope, press more preset probe , select
channel 1, and use the front-panel knob to select a
26. Set the oscilloscope controls as follows:
Press
probe.
Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on
amplitude scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Press
time scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Press
EDGE TRIGGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . auto, edge
source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V, rising edge
Press
connect dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjustments 3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN
and Below)
27. On the oscilloscope press
28. Connect the oscilloscope channel 1 probe to
probe extension. See Figure 3-7 for the location of
using a long
29. Reconnect the ac line cords to each instrument section. Adjust
the front-panel INTENSITY control fully counter-clockwise, and
then set the LINE switch to ON (the INSTR CHECK I LED will
light.)
30. Wait approximately 30 seconds for the dc regulator circuits to
stabilize again.
31. With the front-panel INTENSITY control fully counter clockwise,
adjust
INT LIMIT (clockwise) until a spot is just visible
in the lower left corner of the CRT. See Figure 3-8 for the location
of the adjustment.
The
INT LIMIT adjustment compensates for the variation
Note
in beam cut-off voltage of different CRTs and indirectly sets the
maximum beam intensity.
INT LIMIT should have enough
range to turn the CRT spot on and off. If the spot is always on,
decrease the value of
the value of
If the spot is always off, increase
Refer to Table 3-3 for the acceptable range of
values, and to Table 3-4 for HP part numbers. Refer to Figure 3-8 for
the location of
INT
NT
L I M I T G A I N
I
Figure 3-8. Location of
Components
32. Using a non-metallic alignment tool, center the front panel FOCUS
control and adjust ASTIG and FOCUS LIMIT
for a sharp, focused dot on the CRT display.
33. Adjust INT LIMIT until the dot just disappears.
3-34 Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN
and Below)
34. On the oscilloscope, adjust the channel 1 offset voltage as
necessary to measure the peak-to-peak CRT cut-off voltage, V,,,
at
See Figure 3-9. This peak-to-peak voltage should be
Note this voltage for use in step 39.
between 45-75
1
0
.
0
1
6 0 . 0 0
1
v
dc
10.00
- 2 5 0 . 0 0 0
0 . 0 0 0 0 0
5 0 . 0
2 5 0 . 0 0 0
7 5 . 0 0
v
Figure 3-9. CRT Cut-Off Voltage
35. Connect a separate function generator to each of the X and Y
inputs of the Display Adjustment Board, as shown in Figure 3-5.
Set the function generators as follows:
X input Jl:
. . .. . . .. . .
.
. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .500
frequency
w a v e .
amplitude
Y input
1
frequency
w a v e .
amplitude
36. Adjust
INT LIMIT clockwise until the display is just
visible.
37. Adjust
generator
POS,
POS, and if necessary the function
offsets for a full-screen illumination.
38. Set the front-panel INTENSITY control fully counter-clockwise,
and, if it is not sealed, adjust INT GAIN fully clockwise.
Adjust INT LIMIT just below the threshold at which the
display illumination becomes visible.
Adjus tments 3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN
and Below)
39. Slowly adjust the front-panel INTENSITY control through its
entire range while monitoring the peak-to-peak voltage at
As the INTENSITY control is turned clockwise, the
peak-to-peak voltage at
CRT damage, this voltage should not drop below (V,,
12 whichever is greater. See Figure 3-10. (The value of
will drop. To prevent long-term
or
was recorded in step 34.)
If the front-panel INTENSITY control cannot be set fully
clockwise without dropping below this minimum peak-to-peak
voltage, then perform the following:
a. Set the INTENSITY control fully counter clockwise.
b. Set the LINE switch to STANDBY.
c. Increase the value of
d. Return to step 34.
Maximum CRT life expectancy is obtained when the peak-to-peak
Not e
voltage at
is as large as possible with the INTENSITY
control set fully clockwise. The display illumination must fully
disappear with the INTENSITY control set fully counter clockwise.
5 0 . 0
85.00
v
Figure 3-10. Waveform at
40. Replace the cover on the
41. The High-Voltage Adjustment is completed. If an
or assembly has been repaired or replaced, perform
High-Voltage Regulator Assembly.
adjustment procedure 3, “Preliminary Display Adjustment (SN
and Below)“, and then adjustment procedure 4, “Final
Display Adjustments (SN
and Below)“. If the
3-36 Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN
and Below)
and
assemblies function properly and do not require
compensation, proceed directly to adjustment procedure 4, “Final
Display Adjustments (SN and Below)“.
The adjustment procedures in this manual do not require the removal
or discharge of the High-Voltage Regulator or CRT assemblies.
However, if for any reason the High Voltage Regulator Assembly
or the post-accelerator cable must be removed, the following
procedure ensures the proper safety.
Disch a r ge P r oced u r e
for High Volta ge a n d
CR T
This procedure should be performed by qualified personnel only.
Voltages are present which, if contacted, could cause serious
personal injury. Approximately -4000 V dc is present on the
High-Voltage Regulator assembly even when the ac line
Wa r n in g
cord is disconnected. The CRT can hold a + 18
dc charge
for several days if the post-accelerator cable is improperly
disconnected.
Do not handle the
High-Voltage Multiplier until the following high-voltage
discharge procedure has been performed.
High-Voltage Regulator Assembly or
Wa r n in g
1. Set the spectrum analyzer’s LINE switch to STANDBY, remove the
ac line cords, and remove the
cover.
High Voltage Regulator safety
With the ac power cord disconnected, voltages are still present
which, if contacted, could cause serious personal injury.
Wa r n in g
Wa r n in g
In the following step, a large arc of high voltage should be drawn.
Be careful.
2. Locate the snap connector on the CRT post-accelerator cable.
It is shown in Figure 3-11 as item 1. Using a long flat-bladed
screwdriver with an insulated handle, carefully pry the connector
loose but do not disconnect the cable.
a. Using one hand, remove the end of the cable labeled item 2
in Figure
As the end of the cable becomes free, touch
the end of the cable to the CRT’s metal cover. A large arc of
high voltage should ground to the CRT cover. The CRT is not
discharged yet!
b. Reconnect the CRT post-accelerator cable, and repeat the above
step until high-voltage arcs no longer appear.
3. Leave the CRT post-accelerator cable disconnected, and remove
the cover on the
High Voltage Regulator.
4. Connect a jumper wire (insulated wire and two alligator clips)
between the shaft of a small screwdriver and the chassis ground
lug on the inside of the high-voltage shield.
Adjus tments 3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN
and Below)
5. While holding the insulated handle of the screwdriver, touch the
grounded blade to the following connections:
a. Both brown wires going to the rear of the CRT from
via
cable harness
b. The yellow, blue, and orange wires in the same cable as “a.
above.
c. The top lead of each of the 11 large vertical capacitors on the
High-Voltage Regulator Assembly.
6. Connect the jumper wire from chassis ground to the black wire
coming from the
connection to
High-Voltage Multiplier at the wire’s
H i g h V o l t a g e
1
Figure
Discharging the CRT Post-Accelerator Cable
7. Remove all jumper wires. The
High-Voltage Multiplier, and
discharged.
High-Voltage Regulator,
CRT assemblies should now be
8. A small bracket and screw secure the
Assembly to the Display Motherboard Assembly. The
bottom cover of the IF-Display Section must be removed to gain
High-Voltage Regulator
access to this screw prior to removal of the
High-Voltage
Regulator Assembly.
3-38 Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN
and Above)
2. High -Volta ge
Ad ju stm en t (SN
a n d Above)
This procedure is for IF-Display Sections with serial number prefixes
Note
and above. The procedure for serial prefixes
and below
is located immediately before this procedure.
This procedure should be performed whenever the
CRT or
Note
High Voltage Regulator Assembly is repaired or replaced.
IF-Display Section:
R efer en ce
A
Z-Axis Amplifier
High-Voltage Regulator
V Regulator
+ 120 V,
V Regulator
Descr ip tion
Wa r n in g
This procedure is intended for adjustment purposes only.
Voltages are present which, if contacted, could cause serious
personal injury. Approximately -2400 V dc can be present on
the
High Voltage Regulator Assembly even when the ac
line cord is disconnected. Do not attempt to remove the
High-Voltage Regulator Assembly from the instrument. Do not
disconnect the CRT’s post-accelerator cable; the CRT can hold a
+ 9500 V dc charge for several days.
If for any reason the
High Voltage Assembly or the
post accelerator cable must be removed, refer to “Discharge
Procedure for High Voltage and CRT” at the end of this
adjustment procedure.
A
divider probe is used to measure the CRT cathode voltage.
First, the high-voltage probe is calibrated by comparing measurements
of the + 120 V dc supply voltage with and without the probe. Any
measurement error due to the use of the high-voltage probe is
calculated into the adjustment specification of the CRT cathode
voltage, which is adjusted with the
the CRT cathode voltage is properly adjusted, the CRT filament
voltage will be V rms measured with CRT beam at
HV ADJUST control. When
cut-off, which is required for maximum CRT life. The filament voltage
is referenced to the high-voltage cathode and can only be measured
directly with special equipment.
Adjus tments 3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN
and Above)
Digital Voltmeter (DVM)
DC High-Voltage Probe (1000: 1 divider)
.HP
...................................
Equ ip m en t
.................. HP
High -Volta ge
Ad ju stm en t P r oced u r e
In the following procedure, it is necessary to probe voltages
which, if contacted, could cause serious personal injury. Use
a nonmetallic alignment tool when making adjustments. Be
extremely careful.
Wa r n in g
Do not attempt to measure the CRT filament voltage directly. The
filament voltage is referenced to the high-voltage cathode and
can only be measured safely with a special high-voltage true-rms
voltmeter and probe.
Wa r n in g
1. Set the spectrum analyzer’s LINE switch to STANDBY.
2. Remove the top cover from the IF-Display Section and connect
the equipment as shown in Figure
12.
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
Figure 3-12. High Voltage Adjustment Setup
3. Set the DVM to the
range, and connect the DVM to
without the high-voltage probe. See
Figure 3-13.
The accuracy of the high-voltage probe is specified for a probe
connected to a voltmeter with 10 MO input resistance. HP
and HP digital voltmeters have a 10 input resistance on the
Note
100 V and 1000 V ranges. All measurements in this procedure should
be performed with the DVM manually set to the 100 V range
on the HP
display).
Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN
and Above)
H I G H
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
Figure 3-13. Location of High Voltage Adjustments
4. Set the LINE switch to ON. Set the front-panel INTENSITY
control fully counterclockwise (CRT beam at cut-off) to prevent
possible damage to the CRT.
5. Note the DVM indication at
DVM Indication:
6. Connect the high-voltage probe to the DVM, and connect the
probe to
7. Note the DVM indication.
DVM Indication:
8. Divide the DVM indication in step 7 by the DVM indication in
step 5. This gives the calibration factor needed to compensate for
high-voltage probe error.
Calibration Factor:
9. Disconnect the high-voltage probe from
Set the
LINE switch to STANDBY. Remove the ac line cord from both
instrument sections.
The MAINS power-on indicator
(red LED) should
Wa r n in g
Wa r n in g
be completely off before proceeding with this procedure. See
Figure 3-13 The indicator will remain lit for several seconds after
the ac line cord has been removed, and will go out slowly (the
light becomes dimmer until it is completely out).
With the protective cover removed in the following step, do not
place hands near the
High-Voltage assembly. High voltage
(approximately -2400 V dc) can present even when the ac line
cord is disconnected.
10. Wait at least one minute for capacitors to discharge to a safe
level.
Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN
and Above)
11. Remove the protective cover from the
High-Voltage
Regulator Assembly. A label should be visible on the
High Voltage Assembly.
is mounted on the
non-component side of the High-Voltage Regulator Assembly as
shown in Figure 3-14.) Record the voltage listed on the label for
use in step 15. In cases where more than one voltage is listed on
this label, record the value which is closest to -2400 Vdc.
V dc
is at a voltage
With power supplied to the instrument,
level of approximately -2400 V dc. Be extremely careful.
Wa r n in g
12. Connect the high-voltage probe to
the location of the test point.
See Figure 3-14 for
L A B E L
Figure 3-14. Location of
Label and Test Point
13. Reconnect ac line cords to both instrument sections. Set the LINE
switch to ON.
14. Wait approximately 30 seconds for the
stabilize.
regulator circuits to
15. Adjust
calibration factor (calculated in step 8) times the voltage labeled
on the top of the High-Voltage Assembly (noted in step
HV ADJ for a DVM indication equal to the
11). See Figure 3-13 for the location of the adjustment.
V dc
EXAMPLE:
If the calibration factor calculated in step 8 is 0.00099, and
is labeled for -2400 V, then adjust
HV ADJ
for a DVM indication of:
0.00099 x (-2400 V) = -2.376 V dc
3-42 Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN
and Above)
16. With the front-panel INTENSITY control fully counter clockwise,
wait approximately 10 minutes to allow the high-voltage supply to
stabilize and the CRT to normalize. This
turn-on will extend
CRT life expectancy, particularly if a new CRT has just been
installed.
17. Readjust
HV ADJ for a DVM indication equal to the
voltage determined in step 15.
18. If a new CRT has just been installed do the following:
a. Set the front-panel INTENSITY control so the CRT trace is
barely visible.
b. Wait an additional 30 minutes for the CRT to normalize.
c. Readjust
HV ADJ for a DVM indication equal to the
voltage determined in step 15.
19. Set the LINE switch to STANDBY. Remove the ac line cord from
each instrument section.
20. Wait at least one minute for the MAINS power-on indicator
(red LED) to go out completely before proceeding.
21. Disconnect the high-voltage probe from
22. Replace the cover on the
High-Voltage Regulator Assembly.
23. The High-Voltage adjustments are now completed. If the
assembly has been repaired or replaced, perform adjustment
procedure 3, “Preliminary Display Adjustment (SN
and
Above)“, and then adjustment procedure 4, “Final Display
Adjustments (SN
and Above)“. If the
assembly
functions properly and does not require compensation, proceed
directly to adjustment procedure 4, “Final Display Adjustments
(SN
and Above)“.
The High-Voltage Adjustment procedure does not require the removal
Disch a r ge P r oced u r e
for High Volta ge a n d
CRT
or discharge of the Al
High-Voltage Regulator or
CRT
assemblies. However, if for any reason the
High Voltage
Regulator Assembly, the CRT, or the CRT post-accelerator cable must
be removed, perform the following procedure to ensure proper safety.
This procedure should be performed by qualified personnel only.
Voltages are present which, if contacted, could cause serious
personal injury. Approximately -2400 V dc can be present on the
High-Voltage Regulator assembly even when the ac line
cord is disconnected. The CRT can hold a + 9500 V dc charge
for several days if the post-accelerator cable is improperly
disconnected.
Wa r n in g
1. Remove the ac line cord from both instrument sections.
With the ac power cords disconnected, voltages can still be
present which, if contacted, could cause serious personal injury.
Wa r n in g
2. Obtain an electrician’s screwdriver which has a thin blade at least
eight inches long. The handle of the screwdriver must be made of
an insulating material.
Adjus tments 3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. High-Voltage Adjustment (SN
and Above)
3. Connect one end of a jumper wire (made of insulated wire and
two alligator clips) to the blade of the screwdriver. Connect the
other end of the jumper wire to the metal chassis of the IF Display
Section. This grounds the screwdriver.
4. Slide the screwdriver’s blade between the CRT and the sheet metal
as shown in Figure 3-15. Gently work the tip of the screwdriver
under the post-accelerator cable’s rubber shroud. Make sure that
the screwdriver’s tip touches the connection between the post
accelerator cable and the CRT. You should hear a cracking sound
when the cable discharges.
5. Remove the cover from the
6. Touch the screwdriver’s tip to the top lead of each of the 11 large
vertical capacitors on the High-Voltage Regulator assembly.
7. The High-Voltage Regulator and CRT assemblies should
High-Voltage Regulator assembly.
now be discharged.
G r o u n d i n g
W i r e
Figure 3-15. Discharging the CRT Post-Accelerator Cable
A small bracket and screw secure the High-Voltage Regulator
Assembly to the Display Motherboard Assembly. The bottom
Note
cover of the IF-Display Section must be removed to gain access to this
screw prior to removal of the High-Voltage Regulator Assembly.
3-44 Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Preliminary Display Adjustments (SN
and Below)
3. P r elim in a r y
Disp la y
Ad ju stm en ts (SN
a n d Below )
Keyboard
R efer en ce
Z-Axis Amplifier
X-Deflection Amplifier
Y-Deflection Amplifier
A1
Adjustment 2, “High-Voltage Adjustment,” should be performed before
performing the following adjustment procedure.
Not e
Not e
Perform this adjustment only if components have been replaced on
the
Z-Axis Amplifier,
X-Deflection Amplifier, or
Y
Deflection Amplifier Assemblies. Components
HF GAIN,
HF GAIN,
HF
GAIN,
and
are factory adjusted and normally do
not require readjustment.
The Al Display Section is adjusted to compensate the CRT drive
circuits for proper horizontal and vertical characteristics. These
preliminary adjustments are necessary only when a major repair has
been performed in the display section (for example, replacement or
De scr ip t ion
repair of the
Z Axis Amplifier,
X-Deflection Amplifier, or
Y-Deflection Amplifier assemblies). For routine maintenance,
CRT replacement, or minor repairs, only adjustment procedure 4,
“Final Display Adjustments,” needs to be performed.
Be sure not to allow a high intensity spot to remain on the spectrum
analyzer CRT. A fixed spot of high intensity may permanently damage
the CRT’s phosphor coating. Monitor the CRT closely during the
following adjustment procedures. If a spot occurs, move it off-screen
by adjusting either the front-panel INTENSITY control, or the
horizontal or vertical deflection position controls.
Ca u tion
....................................
HP
.................................. HP
Digitizing Oscilloscope
Pulse/Function Generator
Divider Probe, 10
Equ ip m en t
........... HP
required)
......
Display Adjustment PC Board
Termination, BNC 500
....................................
HP
Adapters:
Adapter, BNC tee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adapter, BNC(f) to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjus tments 3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Preliminary Display Adjustments (SN
and Below)
P r oced u r e
1. Connect a 10:1 (10
divider probe to the oscilloscope’s channel
X a n d Y Deflection
Am p lifier P u lse
1 input and a 10: 1 divider probe to the channel 4 input.
Resp on se Ad ju stm en ts
2. On the oscilloscope, press
to perform a soft reset.
more preset probe , select
On the oscilloscope, press
channel 1, and use the front-panel knob to select a
probe.
4. Select channel 4, and use the front-panel knob to select a
probe.
5. Press
6. Connect the channel 1 probe to the oscilloscope’s rear panel
PROBE COMPENSATION AC CALIBRATOR OUTPUT connector.
Press [AUTO-
Adjust the channel 1 probe for an optimum
square wave display on the oscilloscope.
7. Connect the channel 4 probe to the oscilloscope’s rear panel
PROBE COMPENSATION AC CALIBRATOR OUTPUT connector.
Press
SCALE_). Adjust the channel 4 probe for an optimum
square wave display on the oscilloscope.
Each probe is now compensated for the oscilloscope input to which it
is connected. Do not interchange probes without recompensating.
Note
8. Connect the channel 1
divider probe to
the
channel 4 probe to
as shown in Figure 3-16. Connect
the probe ground leads to chassis ground. See Figure 3-17 and
Figure 3-18 for the location of the assemblies and test points.
PULSE/FUNCTION
GENERATOR
Figure 3-16. Preliminary Display Adjustments Setup
9. Remove the cover over
Intensity Control Assembly. Insert the Display Adjustment
PC board (HP part number 85662-60088) into the slot. See
Figure 3-17 for the location of the assembly.
Digital Storage Section and remove
3-46 Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Preliminary Display Adjustments (SN
and Below)
Figure 3-17. Location of
and
HF
,
HF G AIN
G
Figure 3-18.
and
Adjustment Locations
10. Set the Pulse/Function Generator controls as follows:
MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . NORM
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waveform
Frequency (FRQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...250 ns
Width(WID)
Amplitude (AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V
Offset (OFS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Il. Connect the output of the Pulse/Function Generator to
input) on the Display Adjustment PC board in the
shown in Figure 3-16.
(X
slot as
The Pulse/Function Generator’s output must be terminated with 50
ohms. Use a BNC tee, a 500 termination, and a BNC female to SMB
female adapter. Install the 500 termination as close to the Display
Adjustment PC Board as possible.
Note
Adjus tments 3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Preliminary Display Adjustments (SN
and Below)
16. Three waveforms should be displayed on the oscilloscope, as
shown in Figure 3-20. The lower composite waveform represents
the combined X deflection voltage applied to the CRT. Use the
oscilloscope’s front-panel knob to adjust waveform fl sensitivity
for approximately 8 vertical divisions.
DISPLAY
s t o p p e d
r e m o t e l i s t e n
1 2 5 . 0 0 0
5 0 . 0
3 7 5 . 0 0 0
- 1 2 5 . 0 0 0 “ s
Figure 3-20. Composite X Deflection Waveform
17. Adjust
HF GAIN, and for minimum
overshoot and minimum rise and fall times of the composite X
deflection waveform.
Always adjust
and
in approximately equal
Note
amounts. Do not adjust one to its minimum value and the other to its
maximum value.
18. Use the oscilloscope
markers to measure the risetime,
falltime, and percent overshoot of the composite X defection
waveform. Rise and fall times should both be less than
approximately 65 ns between the 10% and 90% points on the
waveform. Overshoot should be less than 3% (approximately 0.25
divisions). See Figure 3-2 1.
OVERSHOOT
OVERSHOOT
Figure 3-2 1.
Rise and Fall Times and Overshoot Adjustment Waveform
Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Preliminary Display Adjustments (SN
and Below)
19. Connect the oscilloscope’s channel 1 probe to
and the
channel 4 probe to See Figure 3-18 for the location
of the test points. Connect the output of the pulse/function
generator to (Y input) on the Display Adjustment PC board in
the slot.
20. The Y Deflection Amplifier is identical to the X Deflection
Amplifier. Repeat steps 12 through 18 for the Y Deflection
Amplifier using
and
respectively.
21. Disconnect the oscilloscope channel 4 probe from the spectrum
analyzer. Connect the oscilloscope channel 1 probe to
and connect the probe’s ground lead to chassis ground.
P u lse Resp on se of
Con tr ol Ga te Z
Am p lifier to BLANK
In p u t
22. On the oscilloscope, press [RECALL) (CLEAR) to perform a soft reset.
Press
CHANNEL 1 on, more preset probe , and use the
front-panel knob to set the probe to 10.00: 1. Press more .
24. Set the oscilloscope controls as follows:
Press
amplitude scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0
offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...25.0000 V
Press
time scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125.000 ns
Press
level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.00000 V
Press
connect dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Press
25. Connect the output of the Pulse/Function Generator to
input) on the Display Adjustment PC Board in the
the board’s switch to the down position.
(Z
slot. Set
The pulse/function generator’s output must be terminated with 50
Note
ohms. Use a BNC tee, a
female adapter. Install the
termination, and a BNC female to SMB
termination as close to the Display
Adjustment PC Board as possible.
26. Set the pulse/function generator’s controls as follows:
MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NORM
Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..pulse
Frequency (FRQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Width(WID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Amplitude (AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offset (OFS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27. Set the spectrum analyzer’s front-panel INTENSITY control fully
clockwise. Note the display on the oscilloscope. The pulse should
be
peak-to-peak.
Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Preliminary Display Adjustments (SN
and Below)
28. Set the oscilloscope controls as follows:
Press
Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on
amplitude scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Press
29. Adjust
position the CRT beam off-screen (to prevent possible damage to
X POS and
Y POS to either extreme to
the CRT phosphor). If it is not sealed, adjust
fully clockwise.
INT GAIN
30. Adjust the spectrum analyzer’s front-panel INTENSITY control for
peak-to-peak (8 divisions) as indicated on the oscilloscope.
See Figure 3-22.
8
.
0
0
1
4 5 . 0 0
:
v
dc
10.00
3 7 5 . 0 0 0
1 2 5 . 0 0 0
5 0 . 0
50.00
v
Figure 3-22.
Signal
31. Adjust
HF GAIN and
for minimum overshoot
on rise and minimum rise and fall times of the pulse waveform.
32. Use the oscilloscope markers to measure the risetime,
falltime, and percent overshoot of the pulse waveform. Rise
and falltimes should be less than 50 ns and 90 ns respectively.
Overshoot on the rise should be less than 5% (approximately 0.4
divisions).
33. Set the spectrum analyzer’s LINE switch to STANDBY, and center
potentiometers
X POSN and
Y POSN.
34. Disconnect the oscilloscope channel 1 probe from the spectrum
analyzer. Remove the Display Adjustment PC board from the
slot, and reinstall the
Replace the
Intensity Control Assembly.
Section cover and cables.
35. Perform Adjustment Procedure 4,
and Below).
Display Adjustment (SN
Adjustments 3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. P r elim in a r y
Disp la y
Ad ju stm en ts (SN
a n d Above)
Keyboard
X, Z Axis Amplifier
R efer en ce
Not e
Al
Adjustment Procedure 2, “High-Voltage Adjustment,” should be
performed before performing the following adjustment procedure.
Perform this adjustment only if components have been replaced on
Not e
the
X, Y, Z Axis Amplifier Assembly. Components
and are factory adjusted and
normally do not require readjustment. Components affecting these
adjustments are located in function blocks H, M, N, 0, P, R, and S
of the X, Y, Z Axis Amplifier Assembly schematic diagram.
The X, Y, Z Axis Amplifier Assembly is adjusted to compensate the
CRT drive circuits for proper horizontal and vertical characteristics.
These preliminary adjustments are necessary only after replacement
Descr ip tion
or repair of the
X,
Z Axis Amplifier Assembly). For routine
maintenance, CRT replacement, or minor repairs, only Adjustment
Procedure 4, “Final Display Adjustments,” needs to be performed.
Be sure not to allow a fixed spot of high intensity to remain on the
spectrum analyzer CRT. A high intensity spot may permanently
damage the CRT’s phosphor coating. Monitor the CRT closely during
the following adjustment procedures. If a spot occurs, move it
off-screen by adjusting either the front-panel INTENSITY control, or
the horizontal or vertical deflection position controls.
Ca u tion
....................................
HP
.................................. HP
........... HP
Digitizing Oscilloscope
Pulse/Function Generator
10:1 Divider Probe, 10
Equ ip m en t
required)
......
Display Adjustment PC Board (service accessory)
Termination, BNC
....................................
HP
Adapters:
Adapter, BNC(f) to
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adapter, BNC tee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-52 Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Preliminary Display Adjustments (SN
and Above)
P r oced u r e
1. Connect a
1 input and a
(10
divider probe to the oscilloscope’s channel
divider probe to the channel 4 input.
X a n d Y Deflection
Am p lifier P u lse
Resp on se Ad ju stm en ts
2. On the oscilloscope, press (RECALL)
to perform a soft reset.
On the oscilloscope, press
more preset probe , select
channel 1, and use the front-panel knob to select a 10: 1 probe.
4. Select channel 4, and use the front-panel knob to select a
probe.
5. Press
6. Connect the channel 1 probe to the oscilloscope’s rear panel
PROBE COMPENSATION AC CALIBRATOR OUTPUT connector.
Press
SCALE). Adjust the channel 1 probe for an optimum
square wave display on the oscilloscope.
7. Connect the channel 4 probe to the oscilloscope’s rear panel
PROBE COMPENSATION AC CALIBRATOR OUTPUT connector.
Press [AUTO- SCALE]. Adjust the channel 4 probe for an optimum
square wave display on the oscilloscope.
Each probe is now compensated for the oscilloscope input to which it
is connected. Do not interchange probes without recompensating.
Note
8. Connect the channel 1
the channel 4 probe to
divider probe to
as shown in Figure 3-23.
See Figure 3-24
and
Connect the probe ground leads to
and Figure 3-25 for the location of the assemblies and test points.
W
Figure 3-23. Preliminary Display Adjustments Setup
9. Remove the cover over
Digital Storage Section and remove
Intensity Control Assembly. Insert the Display Adjustment
PC board (HP part number 85662-60088) into the
Figure 3-24 for the location of the assembly.
slot. See
Adjus tments 3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Preliminary Display Adjustments (SN
and Above)
Figure 3-24. Location of
and
Figure 3-25.
Adjustment Locations
10. Set the Pulse/Function Generator controls as follows:
MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NORM
Waveform
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency (FRQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Width(WID)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...250 ns
Amplitude (AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V
Offset (OFS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O.OOO
11. Connect the output of the Pulse/Function Generator to
input) on the Display Adjustment PC board in the
shown in Figure 3-23.
(X
slot as
The pulse/function generator’s output must be terminated with 50
Note
ohms. Use a BNC tee, a
termination, and a BNC female to SMB
female adapter. Install the
termination as close to the Display
Adjustment PC Board as possible.
3-54 Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Preliminary Display Adjustments (SN
and Above)
12. Set the oscilloscope controls as follows:
Press
Channel 1 .................................................... on
amplitude scale
offset .............................................. ..25.000 0 V
Channel 4 .................................................... on
amplitude scale
offset .............................................. ..60.000 0 V
Press (TRIG):
source ......................................................... 1 .
level ................................................. 25.0000 V
Press
time scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50.0
delay . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125.000 ns
Press (DISPLAY):
connect dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..on
Press
13. Set the spectrum analyzer’s front-panel INTENSITY control fully
counterclockwise, and then set the LINE switch to ON.
14. The X+ deflection and X- deflection waveforms should be
superimposed on the oscilloscope display, as shown in Figure 3-26.
If necessary, adjust
X POSN and
X GAIN
for a centered display of at least four vertical divisions. See
Figure 3-25 for the location of the adjustments.
r u n n in g
1
0
.
0
1
2 5 . 0 0
V
10.00
:
1
0
.
0
4
6 0 . 0 0
v
10.00
- 1 2 5 . 0 0 0
25.00
V
Figure 3-26. X + and X- Waveforms
15. Set the oscilloscope controls as follows:
Press
f l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
display . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. on
math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . channel 1 channel 4
sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...25.0
16. Three waveforms should be displayed on the oscilloscope, as
shown in Figure 3-27. The lower composite waveform represents
Adjus tments 3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Preliminary Display Adjustments (SN
and Above)
the combined X deflection voltage applied to the CRT. Use the
oscilloscope’s front-panel knob to adjust waveform fl sensitivity
for approximately 8 vertical divisions.
r u n n i n g
2
0
.
0
1
0 0
V
- 1 2 5 . 0 0 0
1 2 5 . 0 0 0
5 0 . 0
3 7 5 . 0 0 0
25.00
V
Figure 3-27. Composite X Deflection Waveform
17. Adjust
HF GAIN, and for
minimum overshoot and minimum rise and fall times of the
composite X deflection waveform.
Always adjust
and
in approximately equal
Note
amounts. Do not adjust one to its minimum value and the other to its
maximum value.
18. Use the oscilloscope
markers to measure the risetime,
falltime, and percent overshoot of the composite X defection
waveform. Rise and fall times should both be less than
approximately 65 ns between the 10% and 90% points on the
waveform. Overshoot should be less than 3% (approximately 0.25
divisions). See Figure 3-28.
OVERSHOOT
90%
OVERSHOOT
Figure 3-28.
Rise and Fall Times and Overshoot Adjustment Waveform
Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Preliminary Display Adjustments (SN
and Above)
19. Connect the oscilloscope’s channel 1 probe to
and the
channel 4 probe to
of the test points. Connect the output of the pulse/function
generator to (Y input) on the Display Adjustment PC board in
the slot.
See Figure 3-25 for the location
20. The Y Deflection Amplifier is identical to the X Deflection
Amplifier. Repeat steps 12 through 18 for the Y Deflection
Amplifier using
and
respectively.
Disconnect the oscilloscope channel 4 probe from the spectrum
analyzer. Connect the oscilloscope channel 1 probe to
and connect the probe’s ground lead to
P u lse Resp on se of 21.
Con tr ol Ga te Z
Am p lifier to BLANK
In p u t 22.
On the oscilloscope, press
to perform a soft reset.
23.
Press
CHANNEL 1 on, more preset probe , and use the
front-panel knob to set the probe to
Press more .
24.
Set the oscilloscope controls as follows:
Press
amplitude scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...45.0000 V
Press
time scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125.000 ns
Press (TRIG):
level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50.00000 v
Press
connect dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Press (SHOW).
25.
Connect the output of the Pulse/Function Generator to
input) on the Display Adjustment PC Board in the
the board’s switch to the down position.
(Z
slot. Set
The pulse/function generator’s output must be terminated with 50
ohms. Use a BNC tee, a 500 termination, and a BNC female to SMB
female adapter. Install the 500 termination as close to the Display
Adjustment PC Board as possible.
Not e
26. Set the Pulse/Function Generator’s controls as follows:
MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NORM
Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency (FRQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Width (WID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 ns
Amplitude (AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offset (OFS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27. Disconnect the black connector with three wires (8, 98, and 96)
from
and set
INT GAIN fully clockwise.
28. Set the spectrum analyzer’s front-panel INTENSITY control fully
clockwise. Adjust the oscilloscope trigger level for a stable display.
Note the display on the oscilloscope. The pulse should be
peak-to-peak.
Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Preliminary Display Adjustments (SN
and Above)
29. Set the oscilloscope controls as follows:
Press
Channel 1
amplitude scale
Press
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
on
.
.
.
.
30. Adjust the spectrum analyzer’s front-panel INTENSITY control for
peak-to-peak (8 divisions) as indicated on the oscilloscope.
See Figure 3-29.
r u n n i n g
1 2 5 . 0 0 0
5 0 . 0
- 1 2 5 . 0 0 0
50.00
v
Figure 3-29.
Signal
for minimum
31. Adjust
HF GAIN and
overshoot on rise and minimum rise and fall times of the pulse
waveform.
32. Use the oscilloscope
markers to measure the risetime,
falltime, and percent overshoot of the pulse waveform. Rise
and falltimes should be less than 50 ns and 90 ns respectively.
Overshoot on the rise should be less than 5% (approximately 0.4
divisions).
33. Set the spectrum analyzer’s LINE switch to STANDBY and
reconnect the cable to
34. Disconnect the oscilloscope channel 1 probe from the spectrum
analyzer. Remove the Display Adjustment PC board from the
slot, and reinstall the
Intensity Control Assembly.
Replace the Section cover and cables.
35. Reconnect the black connector with three wires (8, 98, and 96) to
and set INT GAIN approximately two-thirds
clockwise.
36. Perform Adjustment Procedure 4 Final Display Adjustment (SN
and Above).
3-58 Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Final Display Adjustments (SN
and Below)
4. F in a l Disp la y
Ad ju stm en ts (SN
a n d Below )
Keyboard
Z Axis Amplifier
R efer en ce
X Deflection Amplifier
Y Deflection Amplifier
This procedure is used to optimize the appearance of the CRT display
during routine maintenance or after CRT replacement or minor
repairs. First, the display is adjusted for best focus over the full CRT,
then the graticule pattern is adjusted for optimum rectangular display.
Descr ip tion
Note
Adjustment Procedure 2, High Voltage Adjustment (SN
Below) should be performed prior to performing the following
adjustment procedure.
and
1. With the spectrum analyzer LINE switch set to STANDBY, set the
potentiometers listed in 3-5 as indicated. See Figure 3-30 for
P r oced u r e
Note
the location of the adjustments.
In this procedure, do not adjust the following potentiometers and
precision variable capacitors on the
Z-Axis Amplifier,
Y-Axis Amplifier Assemblies:
HF GAIN, HF GAIN,
HF GAIN, or
These components are adjusted in Adjustment Procedure 2, High
Voltage Adjustments (SN and Below) and Adjustment Procedure
3, Preliminary Display Adjustments (SN and Below).
X-Axis Amplifier, or
INT LIMIT,
3-5. Initial Adjustment Positions
Position
Front-panel INTENSITY fully clockwise
Adjustment
Front-panel FOCUS
Front-panel ALIGN
INT GAIN
centered
centered
fully clockwise
2. Set the LINE switch to ON and wait at least 5 minutes to allow the
CRT and high-voltage circuits to warm up. The spectrum analyzer
power-up annotation should be visible on the CRT display.
3. For an initial coarse focus adjustment, adjust
LIMIT, ASTIG, and FOCUS GAIN in sequence
for best displayed results.
FOCUS
4. Adjust X POSN,
Y GAIN for optimum centering of the display annotation
and graticule pattern.
X GAIN,
Y POSN, and
Adjus tments 3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Final Display Adjustments (SN
and Below)
5. For best overall focusing of the display, adjust the following
potentiometers in the sequence listed below:
a.
FOCUS LIMIT for best focus of graticule lines (long
vectors)
vectors)
b.
c.
ASTIG
FOCUS GAIN for best focus of annotation (short
6. Adjust
ORTHO, the front-panel ALIGN control, and
PATT to optimize the orientation and appearance of the
rectangular graticule pattern on the CRT display.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 as needed to optimize overall display
focus and appearance.
AS T
G
P ATT
F O C US G AIN
GA IN
ORTHO
\
Figure 3-30.
Location of Final Display Adjustments on
and
Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Final Display Adjustments (SN
and Above)
4. F in a l Disp la y
Ad ju stm en ts (SN
a n d Above)
Keyboard
X, Y, Z Axis Amplifiers
R efer en ce
This procedure is used to optimize the appearance of the CRT display
during routine maintenance or after CRT replacement or minor
repairs. First, the display is adjusted for best focus over the full CRT,
then the graticule pattern is adjusted for optimum rectangular display.
Descr ip tion
Digital Photometer
Photometer Probe
........................
...................................
Option 02
56503
Equ ip m en t
Photometer interconnect cable
............... Tektronix 012-0414-02
Photometer light
....................
016-0305-00
P r oced u r e
Note
Adjustment Procedure 2, High Voltage Adjustment (SN
Above) should be performed prior to performing the following
and
adjustment procedure.
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-31.
ANALYZER
Figure 3-31. Final Display Adjustments Setup
2. Set the photometer probe to NORMAL. Press
on the
photometer to turn it on and allow 30 minutes warm-up. Zero the
photometer according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
3. With the spectrum analyzer’s LINE switch set to STANDBY,
set the potentiometers listed in the
3-6 as indicated. See
Figure 3-32 for the location of the adjustments.
In this procedure, do not adjust the following potentiometers and
Note
variable capacitors on the
X, Y, Z Amplifier Assembly:
or These components are
adjusted in the factory and in Adjustment Procedure 3, Preliminary
Display Adjustments (SN and Above).
Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Final Display Adjustments (SN
and Above)
Figure 3-32. Location of Final Display Adjustments on
3-6. Initial Adjustment Positions
Position
centered
Adjustment
Y GAIN
Y POSN
centered
X GAIN
centered
X POSN
centered
INT GAIN
two-thirds clockwise
FOCUS COMP centered
T/B FOC
T/B CTR
R/L FOC
R/L CTR
ORTHO
centered
centered
centered
centered
Al
Al
A
centered
centered
INT LIM
ASTIG
fully counterclockwise
centered
fully counterclockwise
centered
centered
Front-panel INTENSITY
Front-panel FOCUS
Front-panel ALIGN
4. Set the spectrum analyzer’s LINE switch to ON, and wait at least
5 minutes to allow the CRT and high-voltage circuits to warm up.
5. Set the front panel INTENSITY control fully counterclockwise and
adjust
INT LIM until the display is just visable. See
Figure 3-32.
6. Set the front-panel INTENSITY control fully clockwise.
7. Adjust X GAIN, X POSN,
Y
GAIN, and Y POSN for optimum centering of the
display annotation and graticule pattern.
3-62 Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Final Display Adjustments (SN
and Above)
8.
For an initial coarse focus, adjust the following potentiometers in
the sequence listed:
FOCUS LIMIT
ASTIG
FOCUS COMP
9. Press
the displayed noise to the top division of the graticule. Press
and key in 1 dB/DIV. The noise should now
PRESET), then adjust the reference level to bring
CENTER
completely fill the CRT graticule pattern, illuminating a large
rectangular area. If necessary, adjust the reference level until the
graticule pattern is completely filled.
10. Press
and then
to turn off the CRT
annotation and graticule pattern.
Connect a 56503 photometer probe to the Tektronix
photometer. Set the photometer to the Xl range.
digital
Place the photometer light probe hood against the IF-Display
11.
Section glass
filter, and adjust
INT GAIN for a
photometer reading of 80 NITS
This reading must be made with the glass
filter in place in front of
Note
Not e
the CRT. It might be necessary to slightly trim the top and bottom of
the photometer probe’s hood so that it will fit flush against the glass
filter.
If a standard
adjust
photometer is used (instead of metric option
for a photometer reading of 23.5 fl (footlamberts).
12. Set the LINE switch to STANDBY and then back to ON. The
spectrum analyzer power-up annotation should be visible on the
CRT display. (This includes the firmware datecode.)
13. For the best focus near the center of the CRT display, adjust the
following potentiometers in the sequence listed below. Repeat as
needed to optimize center-screen focus.
FOCUS LIMIT
ASTIG
for best focus of annotation (short vectors)
FOCUS COMP for best focus of graticule lines (long
vectors)
14. Adjust
the display.
FOC for best focus at the top and bottom of
15. Adjust R/L FOC for best focus at the right and left
sides of the display.
16. If the top and bottom (or right and left sides) of the display
achieve best focus at different potentiometer settings, adjust
T/B CTR or
T/B FOC or
R/L CTR, and then readjust
R/L FOC to optimize overall
focus.
Adjus tments 3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Final Display Adjustments (SN
17. Adjust
and Above)
ORTHO and the front-panel ALIGN control
to optimize the orientation and appearance of the rectangular
graticule pattern on the CRT display.
18. Repeat steps 13 through 17 as needed to optimize overall display
focus and appearance.
3-64 Adjus tments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Log Amplifier Adjustments
5. Log Am p lifier
Ad ju st m en t s
IF-Display Section
Log Amplifier-Filter
Log Amplifier-Detector
R efer en ce
Scale Fidelity Test
Rela ted P er for m a n ce
Tests
The
Log Amplifier-Filter and
Log Amplifier Detector
Note
are temperature compensated as a matched set at the factory. In
the event of a circuit failure, a new matched set must be ordered.
Contact your nearest HP Service Center.
First, the
and adjusted if necessary, then the
Log Amplifier-Detector ZERO adjustment is checked
Log Amplifier-Filter is set
Descr ip tion
for center frequency by injecting a signal and adjusting the
filter center adjustment for maximum DVM indication. The
filter amplitude is adjusted by monitoring the output of the filter
control line shorted and not shorted to the +
supply. Next, log
fidelity (gain and offset of the log curve) is adjusted by adjusting the
-12 VTV and the PIN diode attenuator. Last, the linear gain step
adjustments are performed to set the proper amount of step gain in
the linear mode of operation.
SYNTHESIZER LEVEL
DIGITAL VOLTMETER
S P ECTRUM ANALYZER
I
Figure 3-33. Log Amplifier Adjustments Setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP
HP
Digital Voltmeter (DVM)
Frequency Synthesizer
Equ ip m en t
P r oced u r e
1. Position instrument upright as shown in Figure 3-33, with top
cover removed.
2. Set LINE switch to ON and press (INSTR PRESET].
3. Key in [FREQUENCY SPAN) 0 Hz,
FREQUENCY] 7.6 MHz,
+ 10
10
and press LIN
pushbutton.
Adjustments 3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Log Amplifier Adjustments
4. Connect DVM to
Connect the frequency synthesizer to the RF INPUT. Key in
The frequency
and DVM ground to the IF casting.
80 MHz and [AMPLITUDE) -86.98
synthesizer will now provide a
Offset Adjustment Check
5. Adjust ZERO for 0.0000
for location of adjustment.
load.
V dc. See Figure 3-34
Z
E
R
O
-
1
2
LG 20
L O G
LO G AMP LIF IE R -
DETECTOR
F I L T E R
LG 10
CTR
AMPTD
Figure 3-34. Location of Log Amplifier Adjustments
Filter Center Adjustment
6. Press LOG (ENTER
7. Set the frequency synthesizer for 7.6000 MHz at
level.
output
8. Adjust
Figure 3-34 for location of adjustment. If
extreme of its adjustment range (fully meshed, maximum
capacitance, or unmeshed, minimum capacitance), increase or
CTR for maximum DVM indication. See
is at an
decrease value of
range of values.
and
Refer to
3-3 for
is a fine adjustment, and
is a coarse adjustment.
or
Note
If
is fully meshed, increase the value of
Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Log Amplifier Adjustments
Filter Amplitude Adjustment
9. Connect one end of a jumper wire to
other end of the jumper to
Connect the
Connecting the
(+
jumper to
first reduces the chance of shorting the +
to ground. Note DVM indication.
V dc
10. Remove the short from between
and
11. Adjust
noted in step 9
AMPTD for DVM indication the same as that
V dc. See Figure 3-34 for location of
adjustment. If unable to adjust
indication, increase or decrease value of
AMPTD for proper
(If
is fully counter-clockwise, increase the value of
Refer to 3-3 for range of values.
12. Repeat steps 9 through 11 until DVM indication is the same
V dc with
and
to
and with
not jumpered. Remove the jumper.
-12 VTV and
Adjustments
13. Press LIN pushbutton.
14. Adjust frequency synthesizer output level for DVM indication of
+ 1.000 V dc.
Synthesizer level:
Press LOG [ENTER
16. Wait three minutes for the log assemblies to stabilize.
17. Decrease the frequency synthesizer output level by 50
18. Adjust
12 VTV for DVM indication of + 500
1
dc.
See Figure 3-34 for location of adjustment.
19. Increase the frequency synthesizer output level by 50
level of step 14).
(to the
20. Adjust
for DVM indication of + 1.000
V
dc. See Figure 3-34 for location of adjustment. If unable to adjust
for proper indication, increase or decrease value
of
(If
is fully clockwise, increase the value of
Refer to
3-3 for range of values.
21. Repeat steps 17 through 20, until specifications of steps 18 and 20
are achieved without further adjustment. Because adjustments
and
are interactive, several iterations are
needed.
Linear Gain Adjustments
22. Press LIN pushbutton. DVM indication at
+ 1.000 V dc (+ 0.980 to + 1.020 V dc). If indication is
not within this range, repeat steps 14 through 21. If indication is
should be
within this range, press
IF step gains.
CENTER
This disables the
Adjustments 3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Log Amplifier Adjustments
23. Decrease the frequency synthesizer’s output level 10
and adjust the frequency synthesizer’s
output level for a DVM indication of + 1.00 Vdc.
Press
LEVEL) 0
24. Verify that attenuator is set at 10
synthesizer output level by 10
Decrease the frequency
Press [REFERENCE LEVEL] -60
25. Adjust
for DVM indication of + 1.000
V dc.
See Figure 3-34 location of adjustment. If unable to adjust
for proper indication, increase or decrease value of
Refer to Table 3-3 for range of values.
26. Decrease the frequency synthesizer output level by 10
27. Key in [REFERENCE
-70
28. Adjust
for DVM indication of + 1.000
V dc. See Figure 3-34 for location of adjustment. If unable to
adjust
for proper indication, increase or decrease value of
Refer to
3-3 for range of values.
29. Press
PRESET] to reenable IF Step Gains.
3.66 Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Video Processor Adjustments
6. Vid eo P r ocessor
Ad ju stm en ts
IF-Display Section
1 Video Processor
R efer en ce
Log Scale Switching Uncertainty Test
Rela ted P er for m a n ce
The CAL OUTPUT signal is connected to the RF INPUT through a
step attenuator. The instrument is placed in zero frequency span to
Descr ip tion
produce a dc level output from the log amplifier. The
ZERO
adjustment, which sets the dc offset of the output buffer amplifier of
the log board, is checked and adjusted if necessary. The dc level into
the video processor is adjusted by varying the input signal level and
reference level. The offsets and gains on the
Video Processor
are adjusted for proper levels using a DVM.
DIGITAL VOLTMTER
STEP ATTENUATOR
Figure 3-35. Video Processor Adjustments Setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP
HP
Digital Voltmeter (DVM)
10 Step Attenuator
Equ ip m en t
Note
The voltage at
during this adjustment. Allow
least one-half hour prior to adjustment.
may drift noticeably with temperature
(Video Processor) to warm up at
Position instrument upright as shown in Figure 3-35. Remove the
top cover.
1.
P r oced u r e
2. Set LINE switch to ON and press
PRESET).
3. Connect DVM to
and DVM ground to the IF casting.
Connect CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT through 10
attenuator.
step
4.
Key in [CENTER FREQUENCY) 20 MHz and [FREQUENCY SPAN) 0 Hz.
5.
Press LIN pushbutton.
Adjustments 3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Video Processor Adjustments
Set step attenuator to 120
DVM indication should be 0.000
6.
V dc. (If DVM indication is out of tolerance, adjust
ZERO on the log amplifier-detector board..)
Set step attenuator to 0
7.
8.
Key in
and adjust DATA knob for DVM indication as
V dc as possible. (It may be necessary to
close to + 1.000
slightly adjust the front panel AMPTD CAL control to achieve
required tolerance.)
Connect DVM to
9.
Adjust
OS for a DVM indication of 0.000
Vdc.
10.
See Figure 3-36 for the location of the adjustment.
ZERO
P r o c e s s o r
F S
Figure 3-36. Location of Video Processor Adjustments
Connect the DVM to
11.
12. Set the step attenuator to 120
Adjust
ZERO for a DVM indication of 0.000
Set the step attenuator to 0
Adjust FS for DVM indication of
Vdc.
13.
14.
15.
16.
0.001 V dc.
Repeat steps 12 through 15 until specifications of steps 13 and 15
are met.
LOG Offset Adjust
17. Set step attenuator to 40
LOG
(ENTER
(SHIFT)
18. Key in
LEVEL] -50
19. Connect DVM to
Record DVM indication. Indication
V dc.
should be approximately
V de
using the step key.
LG OS for DVM indication of V
20. Decrease reference level to -60
21. Adjust
dc greater than the DVM indication recorded in step 19. See
Figure 3-36 for location of adjustment.
Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Video Processor Adjustments
22. Decrease reference level to -70
23. DVM indication should be
using the step key.
l
0.002 V dc greater than the
indication recorded in step 19. If not, readjust
LG OS.
24. Decrease reference level to -90
25. DVM indication should be
using the step key.
V dc greater than the
indication recorded in step 19. If not, readjust
LG OS.
26. Repeat steps 17 through 25 until the specifications are met.
Adjustments 3-7 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. 3 MHz
Ba n d w id th F ilter
Ad ju stm en ts
IF-Display Section
3 MHz Bandwidth Filter
R efer en ce
Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Test
Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test
Rela ted P er for m a n ce
Descr ip tion
With the CAL OUTPUT signal connected to the RF INPUT, the 18.4
MHz oscillator can be adjusted with the FREQ ZERO control (on the
front panel) to peak the IF signal for maximum amplitude for the
center of the 3 MHz bandpass. Each of the five stages of the 3 MHz
Bandwidth Filter is adjusted for
centering and symmetry.
Four crystal filter bypass networks are required for alignment of the
filter stages. See Figure 3-91 for information concerning the bypass
networks.
A stable 21.4 MHz signal is then applied to the IF section of the
instrument from a frequency synthesizer. Each of the first four stages
of the 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter is peaked in a 10 Hz bandwidth using
an oscilloscope display. The final stage is peaked using the spectrum
analyzer CRT display.
After all five filter stages are adjusted for centering, symmetry, and
peaking, the CAL OUTPUT signal is used to match the 10 Hz and 1
bandwidth amplitudes.
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
Figure 3-37. 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments Setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency Synthesizer
Oscilloscope
Equ ip m en t
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP
See Figure 3-91
Crystal Filter Bypass Network
Test Cable: BNC to SMB snap-on
required)
. . . . . . . . . . HP 85680-60093
3-72 Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments
Position instrument upright as shown in Figure 3-37 and remove
top cover.
P r o c e d u r e
2.
Set LINE switch to ON and press
PRESET).
Frequency Zero Check
3. Connect CAL OUTPUT signal to RF INPUT
4. Key in
5. Adjust front panel FREQ ZERO control for maximum signal
amplitude on the CRT display.
Filter Center and Symmetry Adjustments
6. Key in
FREQUENCY) 20 MHz,
10
and press LIN pushbutton. Press
LEVEL] and adjust reference level, using step keys and
front-panel knob to place signal peak near top CRT graticule line.
1
7. On the assembly, connect crystal filter bypass networks
between the pins above
SYM,
SYM,
SYM, and
SYM.
8. Adjust
CTR for minimum amplitude signal peak. Adjust
SYM for best symmetry of signal. Repeat adjustments to
ensure that the signal is
and adjusted for best symmetry.
See Figure 3-38 for location of adjustments.
You may find it helpful to widen and narrow the frequency span of
Note
the instrument to adjust the
each filter stage.
symmetry and centering for
3
B a n d w i d t h F i l t e r
Figure 3-38.
Location of Center, Symmetry, and 10
Amplitude
Adjustments
9. Remove crystal filter bypass network near
SYM.
Adjustments 3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments
10. Adjust
Adjust
CTR for minimum amplitude of signal peak.
SYM for best symmetry. Repeat adjustments to
ensure that the signal is
and adjusted for best symmetry.
See Figure 3-38 for location of adjustments.
11. Remove crystal filter bypass network near
SYM.
12. Adjust
Adjust
CTR for minimum amplitude of signal peak.
SYM for best symmetry of signal. Repeat
adjustments to ensure that signal is
and adjusted for best
symmetry. See Figure 3-38 for location of adjustments.
13. Remove crystal filter bypass network near
SYM.
14. Adjust
Adjust
CTR for minimum amplitude of signal peak.
SYM for best symmetry of signal. Repeat
adjustments to ensure that signal is
and adjusted for best
symmetry. See Figure 3-38 for location of adjustments.
15. Remove crystal filter bypass network near
SYM.
16. Adjust
Adjust
CTR for minimum amplitude of signal peak.
SYM for best symmetry of signal. Repeat
adjustments to ensure that the signal is
and adjusted for
best symmetry. See Figure 3-38 for location of adjustments.
17. Signal should be centered on center graticule line on CRT display.
If signal is not centered, go back to step 3 and repeat adjustments
of each filter stage.
Filter Peak Adjust
18. Press
PRESET].
19. Key in
TIME] 20 ms, [FREQUENCY SPAN) 0 Hz,
10 Hz,
[REFERENCE LEVEL) -20
20. Set the frequency synthesizer for 21.400 MHz at an amplitude
level of -25.0
21. Disconnect cable 97 (white/violet) from
output of the frequency synthesizer to
snap-on cable.
and connect
using BNC to SMB
22. Set the oscilloscope following settings:
Channel 1
amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.005
time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...0.2
mag x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (vertical)
coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..ac
probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel 2
.
amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ac
probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23. Connect oscilloscope Channel 1 probe to
SYM) and Channel B probe to
SYM).
(left side of
(left side of
24. Adjust frequency synthesizer output frequency to peak Channel 1
display.
3-74 Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments
25. Adjust
PK for maximum peak-to-peak signal on Channel
2 display. See Figure 3-39 for location of adjustment. If unable to
achieve a “peak” in signal amplitude, increase or decrease value
of
Refer to
3-3 for range of values.
3
MH z B a n d w i d t h F i l t e r
Figure 3-39. Location of 3 MHz Peak Adjustments
26. Move Channel 2 probe to (left side of SYM).
27. Adjust frequency synthesizer output frequency to peak Channel 1
display.
28. Adjust
PK for maximum peak-to-peak signal on Channel
2 display. See Figure 3-39 for location of adjustment. If unable to
achieve a “peak” in signal amplitude, increase or decrease value
of
Refer to Table 3-3 for range of values.
29. Move Channel 2 probe to
(left side of
SYM).
30. Adjust frequency synthesizer output frequency to peak Channel 1
display.
31. Adjust
PK for maximum peak-to-peak signal on Channel
2 display. See Figure 3-39 for location of adjustment. If unable to
achieve a “peak” in signal amplitude, increase or decrease value
of
Refer to
3-3 for range of values.
32. Disconnect Channel 2 probe from
33. Adjust frequency synthesizer output frequency to peak Channel 1
display.
34. Adjust [REFERENCE
using step keys to place signal near top
CRT graticule line.
35. Adjust
PK for maximum signal amplitude on the CRT
display. See Figure 3-39 for the location of adjustment. If unable
to achieve a “peak” in signal amplitude, increase or decrease
value of
Refer to Table 3-3 for range of values.
36. Disconnect Channel 1 probe from
‘frequency synthesizer output from
97 (white/violet).
Disconnect
and reconnect cable
Adjustments 3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. 3
Bandwidth Filter Adjustments
10 Hz Amplitude Adjustments
Connect CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT. Key in
PRESET),
37.
38.
39.
9,
10 Hz.
Adjust the instrument front panel FREQ ZERO control for
maximum signal amplitude on the CRT display.
Key in U
s1
aind DISnPLAY LgINE
t
h
e
DATA knob, place the display line at the signal trace.
Key in 10 Hz.
40.
41.
Adjust the instrument front panel FREQ ZERO control for
maximum signal amplitude on the CRT display.
Adjust
10 Hz AMPTD and
10 Hz AMPTD equal
42.
43.
amounts to set the signal level the same as the reference level set
in step 39. See Figure 3-38 for location of 10 Hz AMPTD adjusts.
Repeat steps 37 through 42 until no further adjustment is
required.
3-76 Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. 21.4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments
8. 21.4 MHz
Ba n d w id th F ilter
Ad ju stm en ts
IF-Display Section
Bandwidth Filter
Attenuator-Bandwidth Filter
R efer en ce
IF Gain Uncertainty Test
Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty test
Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test
Rela ted P er for m a n ce
Tests
First the LC Filters (100
Bandwidth Filter are adjusted. The crystal filter poles (3
to 3 MHz bandwidths) on the
Descr ip tion
to 30
bandwidths) are then adjusted for center and symmetry by
bypassing all but one pole at a time and adjusting the active pole.
Next, the LC filters and the crystal filter poles on the
Attenuator-Bandwidth Filter are adjusted in the same manner as on
the
Bandwidth Filter.
Last, the 10
and 20
attenuators on the
Bandwidth Filter are adjusted for the proper amount of attenuation.
This is done by connecting the CAL OUTPUT signal to the RF INPUT
through two step attenuators, keying in the necessary reference level
to activate the 10
and the 20
control lines, adjusting the step
attenuators to compensate for the attenuation, and adjusting the
attenuators for the proper amount of attenuation.
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
I
DIGITAL VOLTMETER
STEP
ATTENUATOR ATTENUATOR
STEP
Figure 3-40. 21.4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments Setup
Adjustments 3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. 21.4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments
Digital Voltmeter (DVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HP
Equ ip m en t
10
Step Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP
Step Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP
Option
Option
1
. . . . Refer to Figure 3-91
Crystal Filter Bypass Network (2 required)
1. Position instrument upright as shown in Figure 3-40 and remove
top cover.
P r oced u r e
2. Set LINE switch to ON and press
+ 10 V Temperature Compensation Supply Check
3. Connect DVM to (+ 10 VF).
4. DVM indication should be between
PRESET].
V dc and + 10.0 V dc. If
voltage is within tolerance, proceed to next step. If voltage is not
within tolerance, refer to Adjustment 10, Step Gain and 18.4 MHz
Local Oscillator Adjustments, for adjustment procedure.
LC Adjustments
5. Set step attenuators to 0
6. Disconnect cable 97 (white/violet) from
1.
and connect to
7. Key in
20 MHz,
and press LIN pushbutton.
100
[FREQUENCY SPAN)
200
8. Press (REFERENCE LEVEL) and adjust front-panel knob to set signal
peak on screen two divisions from the top graticule.
9. Adjust
LC CTR and
LC CTR for maximum
MARKER level as indicated by CRT annotation. See Figure
for location of adjustments. If unable to adjust LC CTR
adjustments for satisfactory signal amplitude, increase or decrease
value of
values.
and
Refer to
3-3 for range of
\
Figure 3-41.
21.4 MHz LC Filter Adjustments
Location of
3-78 Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. 21.4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments
10. Key in
1 MHz, and
1 MHz.
SEARCH], MARKER
200
11. Press MARKER
12. Key in
100
and MARKER
[PEAK SEARCH).
13. Adjust
LC to align markers on display. MARKER A level
should indicate 1.00 X. See Figure 3-41 for location of adjustment.
14. Repeat steps 10 through 13 until no further adjustment is
necessary.
XTAL Adjustments
15. Press MARKER
Key in
30
and
[FREQUENCY
100
16. Press [REFERENCE LEVEL) and adjust DATA knob to set signal peak
on screen two divisions from the top graticule line.
17. Connect crystal filter bypass networks between
and between and
and
18. Adjust
line. Adjust
CTR to center signal on center graticule
SYM for best symmetry of signal. See
Figure 3-42 for location of adjustments. If unable to adjust SYM
for satisfactory signal symmetry, increase or decrease value of
Refer to Table 3-3 for range of values.
B a n d w i d t h F i l t e r
Figure 3-42.
Location of
21.4 MHz Crystal Filter Adjustments
19. Remove crystal filter bypass network from between
and
20. Adjust
Adjust
CTR to center signal on center graticule line.
SYM for best symmetry of signal. See Figure 3-42
SYM
for location of adjustments. If unable to adjust
for satisfactory signal symmetry, increase or decrease value of
Refer to Table 3-3 for range of values.
21. Remove crystal filter bypass network from between
and
Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. 21.4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments
22. Adjust
Adjust
CTR to center signal on center graticule line.
SYM for best symmetry of signal. See Figure 3-42
for location of adjustments. If unable to adjust
for satisfactory signal symmetry, increase or decrease value of
Refer to 3-3 for range of values.
SYM
23. All crystal filter bypass networks are removed. Signal should be
centered and symmetrical. If not, go back to step 16 and repeat
adjustments.
24. Press MARKER
SEARCH] and MARKER In].
25. Key in
SPAN] 20
3
and MARKER
SEARCH].
26. Adjust
XTAL to align markers on display. MARKER
A level should indicate 1.00 X. See Figure 3-42 for location of
adjustment.
LC Adjustments
27. Disconnect cable 97 (white/violet) from
Reconnect cable 89 (gray/white) to
and reconnect to
28. Key in
100
and [FREQUENCY SPAN] 200
29. Press [REFERENCE LEVEL) and adjust DATA knob to place signal peak
two division from the top graticule line.
30. Adjust
MARKER level as indicated by CRT annotation. See Figure 3-43
for location of adjustments. If unable to adjust and
LC CTR adjustments for satisfactory signal amplitude,
LC CTR and
LC CTR for maximum
increase or decrease value of
3-3 for range of values.
and
Refer to
A t t e n u a t o r
F i l t e r
Figure 3-43.
Location of
21.4 MHz LC Filter and Attenuation
Adjustments
31. Key in
1 MHz and
1 MHz.
32. Press MARKER (PEAK SEARCH] and MARKER
Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. 21.4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments
100 200 and MARKER
33. Key in
[PEAK SEARCH].
34. Adjust
LC to align makers on display. MARKER A level
should indicate 1.00 X. See Figure 3-43 for location of adjustment.
35. Repeat steps 31 through 34 until no further adjustment is
necessary.
Adjustments
36. Key in
MARKER
30
[FREQUENCY SPAN] 100
Press
37. Connect crystal filter bypass network between
and
38. Press (REFERENCE LEVEL) and adjust DATA knob to place signal peak
two division from the top graticule line.
39. Adjust
Adjust
CTR to center signal on center graticule line.
SYM for best symmetry of signal. See Figure 3-44
for location of adjustments. If unable to adjust
SYM
for satisfactory signal symmetry, increase or decrease value of
Refer to Table 3-3 for range of values.
A t t e n u a t o r - B a n d w i d t h F i l t e r
Figure 3-44.
Location of
21.4 MHz Crystal Filter Adjustments
40. Remove crystal filter bypass network from between
and
41. Adjust
CTR to center signal on center graticule line.
SYM for best symmetry of signal. See Figure 3-44
SYM
for satisfactory signal symmetry, increase or decrease value of
Adjust
for location of adjustments. If unable to adjust
Refer to
3-3 for range of values.
42. Press MARKER
SEARCH) and MARKER
43. Key in [FREQUENCY SPAN] 10
44. Key in
3
and MARKER
SEARCH).
Adjustments 3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. 21.4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments
45. Adjust
XTAL to align markers on display. MARKER
A level should indicate 1.00 X. See Figure 3-44 for location of
adjustment.
Dip Adjustments
46. Refer to the Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty
Performance Test, and check all bandwidth amplitudes. If
amplitude of 300
bandwidth is low but amplitude of 100
and 1 MHz bandwidths are within tolerance, LC DIP adjustments
must be performed. If all bandwidth amplitudes are within
tolerance, do not perform the following adjustments.
Set LINE switch to STANDBY.
4 7 .
48.
Disconnect cable 97 (white/violet) from
J1.
and connect to
49. Remove
Bandwidth Filter and install on extenders.
Set LINE switch to ON. Press
PRESET).
50.
51. Key in [CENTER FREQUENCY] 20 MHz,
100
SPAN] 1 MHz,
0
and LOG (ENTER
2
Short
to ground.
52.
53.
Adjust.
LC DIP for minimum amplitude of signal peak.
See Figure 3-41 for location of adjustment. Key in
SEARCH)
MARKER
and adjust LC DIP again to offset the signal peak
approximately -17
(to the left). This is done to compensate
for the effect of placing the board on extenders. If unable to
achieve a “dip” in signal amplitude, increase or decrease value of
Refer to Table 3-3 for range of values.
Remove short, from
and short
LC DIP for minimum amplitude of signal peak.
See Figure 3-41 for location of adjustment. Key in [PEAK SEARCH)
to ground.
54.
55.
Adjust
MARKER In], and adjust
peak approximately -17
LC DIP again to offset the signal
(to the left). If unable to achieve a
“dip” in signal amplitude, increase or decrease value of
Refer to 3-3 for range of values.
Set LINE switch to STANDBY.
56.
57.
Reinstall
Short
Bandwidth Filter without extenders.
and to ground. Remove
Attenuator-Bandwidth Filter and install on extenders. Reconnect
cable 97 to and reconnect cable 89 to
Set, LINE switch to ON. Press
PRESET).
58.
59.
Key in [CENTER FREQUENCY) 20 MHz,
100
(FREQUENCY SPAN) 1 MHz,
0
and LOG (ENTER
60. Short
to ground.
LC DIP for minimum amplitude of signal peak.
61. Adjust
See Figure 3-43 for location of adjustment. Key in
SEARCH)
MARKER and adjust LC DIP again to offset the signal peak
3-82 Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. 21.4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments
approximately -17
(to the left). If unable to achieve a “dip”
in signal amplitude, increase or decrease value of
Refer
to 3-3 for range of values.
62. Remove short from and short
LC DIP for minimum amplitude of signal peak.
See Figure 3-43 for location of adjustment. Key in [PEAK SEARCH)
MARKER and adjust LC DIP again to offset the signal peak
approximately -17 (to the left). If unable to achieve a “dip”
in signal amplitude, increase or decrease value of
to 3-3 for range of values.
Set LINE switch to STANDBY.
to ground.
Adjust
63.
Refer
64.
65.
Reinstall
Attenuator-Bandwidth Filter without extenders.
Remove short. from
Set LINE switch to ON. Press
PRESET].
66.
67.
Go back and repeat LC adjustments for both the
filter and the Attenuator-Bandwidth Filter.
Bandwidth
AlOdB and Adjustments
Set, step attenuators to 25
68.
69. Key in
FREQUENCY] 20 MHz,
and [REFERENCE
3
-30
0
1
Key in LOG [ENTER
1
then press MARKER (PEAK SEARCH)
70.
MARKER
Key in [REFERENCE LEVEL) -20
Set step attenuators to 15
71.
72.
Adjust
AlOdB to align markers on display. MARKER
A level should indicate 0.00
See Figure 3-43 for location of
adjustment.
Key in (REFERENCE LEVEL) -10
Set step attenuators to 5
73.
74.
Adjust
to align markers on display. MARKER
A level should indicate 0.00
See Figure 3-43 for location of
adjustment.
Adjustments 3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. 3
Ba n d w id th
Ad ju stm en ts
IF-Display Section
IF Control
R efer en ce
Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test
Rela ted P er for m a n ce
Test
The CAL OUTPUT signal is connected to the RF INPUT. Each of the
adjustable resolution bandwidths is selected and adjusted for the
Descr ip tion
proper bandwidth at the 3
point.
Do not perform this adjustment on Option 462 instruments. Option
462 instruments require a different procedure. Adjustment 9 for
Note
Option 462 (6
Option 462.
or Impulse Bandwidth) is located in Chapter 4,
No test equipment is required for this adjustment.
1. Position instrument upright and remove top cover.
Equ ip m en t
P r oced u r e
2. Set LINE switch to ON and press
3. Connect CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT.
PRESET].
4. Key in [CENTER FREQUENCY_) 20 MHz, (FREQUENCY SPAN) 5 MHz, LIN,
and
3 MHz.
5. Press
LEVEL] and adjust DATA knob to place signal
peak near top CRT graticule line. Signal should be centered about
the center line on the graticule. If not, press (PEAK SEARCH) and
6. Press MARKER
7. Using DATA knob, adjust marker down one side of the displayed
signal to the 3
point; CRT MKR A annotation indicates
X.
8. Adjust
3 MHz for MKR A indication of 1.5 MHz while
maintaining marker at 3
point
X) using DATA knob. See
Figure 3-45 for location of adjustment.
3-84 Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. 3
Bandwidth Adjustments
IF CONTROL
\
Figure 3-45. Location of 3
Bandwidth Adjustments
9. Press MARKER
of signal (CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1.00 X). There are now
two markers; one on each side of the signal at the 3 points.
Adjust marker to 3
point on opposite side
10. CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the 3
MHz bandwidth. 3 bandwidth should be 3.00
bandwidth of the 3
MHz.
11. Key in
1 MHz and [FREQUENCY SPAN] 2 MHz. If necessary,
readjust [REFERENCELEVELaFREQUENCY), using DATA
knob to place signal peak near top of graticule and centered on
center graticule line.
12. Press MARKER [OFF), then MARKER
13. Using DATA knob, adjust marker down one side of displayed signal
to the 3
point; CRT MKR A annotation indicates
X.
14. Adjust
1 MHz for MKR A indication of 500
while
maintaining marker at 3
Figure 3-45 for location of adjustment.
point
X) using DATA knob. See
point on opposite side
15. Press MARKER Adjust marker to 3
of signal (CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1.00 X). There are now
two markers; one on each side of the signal at the 3 point.
16. CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the 3
bandwidth of the 1
MHz.
MHz bandwidth. 3
17. Key in 300
necessary, readjust
bandwidth should be 1.00
and
SPAN) 500
If
LEVEL) and [CENTER FREQUENCY],
using DATA knob to place signal peak near top of graticule and
centered on center graticule line.
18. Press MARKER (OFF), then MARKER
19. Using DATA knob, adjust marker down one side of the displayed
signal to the 3
point; CRT MKR A annotation indicates
X.
20. Adjust
300 for MKR A indication of 150
while
maintaining marker at 3
Figure 3-45 for location of adjustment.
point
X) using DATA knob. See
point on opposite side
2 1. Press MARKER Adjust marker to 3
of signal (CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1.00 X).
Adjustments 3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. 3
Bandwidth Adjustments
22. CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the 3
bandwidth of the
bandwidth should be 300.0
300
bandwidth. 3
23. Key in
10
and [FREQUENCY
20
If
necessary, readjust
and [CENTER FREQUENCY),
using DATA knob to place signal peak near top of graticule and
centered on center graticule line.
24. Press MARKER
then MARKER [ ].
25. Using DATA knob, adjust marker down one side of the displayed
signal to the 3 point; CRT MKR A annotation indicates X.
26. Adjust 10 for MKR A indication of 5.00 while
maintaining marker at 3 point 707 X) using DATA knob. See
Figure 3-45 for location of adjustment.
27. Press MARKER A. Adjust marker to 3
point on opposite side of
signal (CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1.00 X).
28. CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the 3
bandwidth of the
10
bandwidth. 3
3
bandwidth should be 10.0 fl.O
29. Key in
and If necessary,
SPAN) 5
readjust [REFERENCELEVEL) and [CENTER FREQUENCY], using DATA
knob to place signal peak near top of graticule and centered on
center graticule line.
30. Press MARKER (OFF), then MARKER
31. Using DATA knob, adjust marker down one side of the displayed
signal to the 3
32. Adjust
maintaining marker at 3
Figure 3-45 for location of adjustments.
33. Press MARKER Adjust marker to 3
point; CRT MKR A annotation indicates
X.
3
for MKR A indication of 1.5 while
point
X) using DATA knob. See
point on opposite side
of signal (CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1.00 X).
34. CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the 3 bandwidth of the 3
bandwidth. 3 bandwidth should be 3.00
Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Step Gain and 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments
10. Step Ga in a n d
18.4 MHz Loca l
Oscilla t or
Ad ju stm en ts
IF-Display Section
R efer en ce
3 MHz Bandwidth Filter
Step Gain
Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test
IF Gain Uncertainty Test
Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test
Rela ted P er for m a n ce
Tests
First, the IF signal from the RF Section is measured with a power
De scr ip t ion
meter and adjusted for proper level. Next, the 10
gain steps are
adjusted by connecting the CAL OUTPUT signal through two step
attenuators to the RF INPUT and keying in the REFERENCE LEVEL
necessary to activate each of the gain steps, while compensating for
the increased gain with the step attenuators.
The 1
gain steps are checked in the same fashion as the 10
gain steps, and then the variable gain is adjusted. The 18.4 MHz
oscillator frequency is adjusted to provide adequate adjustment range
of front-panel FREQ ZERO control; and last, the +
temperature
compensation supply used by the Bandwidth Filter and
Attenuator-Bandwidth Filter is checked and adjusted if necessary.
METER
DIGITAL VOLTMETER
STEP
1
STEP
ATTENUATOR ATTENUATOR
Figure 3-46.
Step Gain and 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments Setup
Adjustments 3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Step Gain and 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments
Digital Voltmeter (DVM)
Power Meter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equ ip m en t
A
Power Sensor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP
10
1
Step Attenuator
Step Attenuator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP
Option
Option
1. Position instrument upright as shown in Figure 3-46 and remove
top cover.
P r oced u r e
2. The validity of the results of this adjustment procedure is based
in part on the performance of the Log Amplifiers, the Video
Processor, and the Track and Hold. These adjustments must be
done before proceeding with the adjustment procedure of the
Step Gain and 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator.
3. Set instrument LINE switch to ON and press
Connect CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT.
PRESET).
4. Key
in [CENTER FREQUENCY] 20 MHz, [REFERENCE L E V E L ]
- 1 0
0
[FREQUENCY SPAN) 0 Hz,
1
100
Hz, and [SWEEP TIME) 20 ms.
IF Gain Adjustment
5. Disconnect cable 97 (white/violet) from
and connect cable
to power meter/power sensor. Refer to Figure 3-47 for location of
cable 97 and
6. Adjust front-panel AMPTD CAL adjustment for a power meter
indication of -5
7. Disconnect power meter and reconnect cable 97 to
8. Press LIN pushbutton and MARKER
9. Note MARKER amplitude in
and adjust
CAL to
70.7 (top CRT graticule line). See Figure 3-47 for location of
adjustment.
3
D T H
1
S TE P G AIN
F ILTE R
CAL
Figure 3-47. Location of IF Gain Adjustment
3-88 Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Step Gain and 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments
10. If
CAL adjustment does not have sufficient range to
adjust trace to the top CRT graticule line, increase or decrease the
value of
range of
of
as necessary to achieve the proper adjustment
CAL adjustment. See Figure 3-39 for the location
Refer to Table 3-3 for range of values for
10
Gain Step Adjustment
11. Connect CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT through 10
step
-30
attenuator and 1
step attenuator.
12. Key in LOG (ENTER
13. Set step attenuators to 25
1
and [REFERENCE
14. Key in MARKER A. Signal trace should be at the center CRT
graticule line, and MKR A level, as indicated by CRT annotation,
should be .OO
15. Key in [REFERENCE LEVEL] -40
Set step attenuators to 35
16. Adjust
for MKR A level of .OO (CRT MKR A
annotation is now in upper right corner of CRT display). See
Figure 3-48 for location of adjustment.
S
T E P
1
Figure 3-48. Location of 10
Gain Step Adjustments
17. If
adjustment does not have sufficient range to
perform adjustment in step 16, increase or decrease the value of
as necessary to achieve the proper adjustment range of
See Figure 3-39 for the location of
3-3 for range of values for
Refer
Repeat steps 3
to
through 16 if the value of
is changed.
18. Key in [REFERENCE LEVEL] -50
Set step attenuators to 45
19. Adjust
for MKR A level of .OO See
Figure 3-48 for location of adjustment.
20. Key in
LEVEL) -70
Set step attenuators to 65
21. Adjust
for MKR A level of .OO
See
Figure 3-48 for location of adjustment.
Adjustments 3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Step Gain and 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments
Gain Step Checks
1
22. Key in [REFERENCE LEVEL) -19.9
Set step attenuators to 15
Press MARKER
twice to establish a new reference.
23. Key in (REFERENCE LEVEL) -17.9
Set step attenuators to 13
24. MKR A level, as indicated by CRT annotation, should be .OO
If not, increase or decrease the value of
3-3 for range of values.
Refer to
25. Key in (REFERENCE LEVEL) -15.9
Set step attenuators to 11
26. MKR A level should be .OO
If not, increase or decrease
the value of
Refer to Table 3-3 for range of values.
27. Key in [REFERENCE LEVEL) -11.9
Set step attenuators to 7
28. MKR A level should be .OO
If not, increase or decrease
3-3 for range of values.
the value of
Gain Step Adjustment
29. Key in LIN, (SHIFT) (AUTO] (resolution bandwidth), and
Set step attenuators to 13
Refer to
(REFERENCE LEVEL) -19.9
Press
MARKER
twice to establish a new reference.
30. Key in [REFERENCE LEVEL) -18.0
Set step attenuators to 11
31. Adjust VR for MKR A level of + 0.10 See Figure 3-49
for location of adjustment.
32. Remove all test equipment from the spectrum analyzer. Connect
CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT.
18.4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustment
33. Press
34. Set front-panel FREQ ZERO control to midrange.
35. Adjust FREQ ZERO to peak signal trace on CRT. See
Figure 3-49 for location of adjustment.
PRESET] and
Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Step Gain and 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments
S T E P G A I N
F R E O
Z E R O C O A R S E
“ R
A D J
Figure 3-49.
Location of
Gain Step, 18.4 MHz LO, and +
Adjustments
36. Key in [FREQUENCY
1
100 Hz, and
[PEAK SEARCH]
37. Adjust front-panel FREQ ZERO control fully clockwise. Press
SEARCH]. Signal should move at least 60 Hz away from
center CRT graticule line.
38. Adjust front-panel FREQ ZERO control fully counterclockwise.
Press [PEAK
Signal should move at least 60 Hz away from
center CRT graticule line.
39. If proper indications are not achieved, increase or decrease
value of
and repeat adjustment from step 33. Refer to
3-3 for range of values.
40. Press
PRESET) and
41. Adjust front panel FREQ ZERO to peak the signal trace on the
CRT.
+
Temperature Compensation Supply Adjustment
42. Connect DVM to (+
43. If DVM indication is between
adjustment is required.
V dc and 10.0 V dc, no
44. If DVM indication is not within tolerance of step 43, adjust
+
ADJ for DVM indication of
V dc at
normal room temperature of approximately
Voltage change
is approximately 30
higher or lower than
lower, accordingly.
Therefore, if room temperature is
adjustment should be made higher or
Adjustments 3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Dow n /Up
Con ver t er
Ad ju stm en ts
IF-Display Section
Down/Up Converter
R efer en ce
Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Test
Rela ted P er for m a n ce
Test
The CAL OUTPUT signal is connected to the RF INPUT connector of
the instrument and controls are set to display the signal in a narrow
bandwidth. A marker is placed at the peak of the signal to measure
the peak amplitude. The bandwidth is changed to a wide bandwidth
and the Down/Up Converter is adjusted to place the peak amplitude
of the signal the same as the level of the narrow bandwidth signal.
Optionally, the input signal is removed and the IF signal is monitored
at the output of the Bandwidth Filters using a spectrum analyzer with
an active probe. The 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator and all harmonics are
then adjusted for minimum amplitude.
De scr ip t ion
HP
HIGH FREOUENCY PROBE
SUPPLY
Figure 3-50. Down/Up Converter Adjustments Setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP
HP
Spectrum Analyzer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equ ip m en t
P r oced u r e
Active Probe
1. Position Instrument upright as shown in Figure 3-50 and remove
top cover.
2. Set LINE switch to ON and press
3. Connect CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT.
PRESET].
4. Key in [CENTER FREQUENCY) 20 MHz, (FREQUENCY SPAN) 10
LIN pushbutton, [PEAK SEARCH),
P
0
1
and then MARKER
5. Key in 1 MHz.
3-92 Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Down/Up Converter Adjustments
6. Adjust
WIDE GAIN to align markers on CRT display.
MKR A level should indicate 1.00 X. See Figure 3-51 for location of
adjustment.
7. Disconnect CAL OUTPUT from RF INPUT.
Op tion a l
Not e
Perform the following procedure if the
or the 21.4 MHz Amplifier Filter is worked on.
assembly is replaced
1. Disconnect CAL OUTPUT from RF INPUT.
2. Key in [REFERENCE LEVEL) -70
1
and MARKER
3. Set the second spectrum analyzer’s to the following settings:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 MHz
FREQUENCY SPAN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.4 MHz
CENTER FREQUENCY
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
RF ATTENUATION
REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOG 10
4. Connect the second spectrum analyzer to
active probe. See Figure for test setup.
using and
5. Adjust 18.4 MHz NULL to null the 18.4 MHz Local
Oscillator signal and all displayed harmonics. See Figure 3-51 for
location of adjustment.
DOWN/ UP CONVERTER
,
4
NIJLL
r
Figure 3-51. Location of Down/Up Converter Adjustments
6. 18.4 MHz signal and displayed harmonics should be below -10
(-30
on display due to
divider). If unable to adjust
18.4 MHz NULL for proper indication, increase value
of
to
See Figure 3-49 for the location of
3-3 for range of values.
Refer
Adjustments 3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Down/Up Converter Adjustments
Dow n Con ver ter Ga in
Ad ju st m e n t
If a gain problem is suspected in the 10 Hz to 1
resolution
bandwidths, perform the following procedure to test and adjust the
gain through
Note
1. Place
on extender boards.
2. On the spectrum analyzer being tested, press
the spectrum analyzer to the following settings:
PRESET], and set
CENTER FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 MHz
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH
FREQUENCY SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Hz
REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -10
INPUT ATTENUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3. Connect an active probe to a second spectrum analyzer, and set the
spectrum analyzer to the following settings:
CENTER FREQUENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.4 MHz
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH
FREQUENCY SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REFERENCE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -30
INPUT ATTENUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Hz
SCALE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOG 1 dB/div
4. Measure the signal at
using the active probe and
record below. The signal level should be approximately -33
Signal level at
5. Change the center frequency of the spectrum analyzer used
for measuring the signals to 3 MHz. Measure the signal at
The signal level should be 10
lower than
the signal measured in the previous step.
Signal level at
6. If the signal at
(Decreasing
needs adjusting, change
ten percent increases the signal level by 0.6
Refer to Table 3-3 for the acceptable range of values for
3-94 Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Time Base Adjustment (SN
and Below, also
and Above)
12. Tim e Ba se
Ad ju stm en t (SN
a n d Below ,
a lso
a n d Above)
RF Section:
R efer en ce
10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator
Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test
Rela ted P er for m a n ce
Test
The frequency of the internal 10 MHz Frequency Standard is
compared to a known frequency standard and adjusted for minimum
frequency error. This procedure does not adjust the short-term
stability or long-term stability of the 10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator,
which are determined by characteristics of the particular oscillator
and the environmental and warmup conditions to which it has been
recently exposed. The spectrum analyzer must be ON continuously
(not in STANDBY) for at least 72 hours immediately prior to oscillator
adjustment to allow both the temperature and frequency of the
oscillator to stabilize.
Descr ip tion
1
Figure 3-52. Time Base Adjustment Setup
HP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency Standard
Frequency Counter
Equ ip m en t
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP
Cables:
BNC cable, 122 cm (48 in) (2 required) . . . . . . . . HP
Adjustments 3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Time Base Adjustment (SN
and Below, also
and Above)
P r oced u r e
Note
The spectrum analyzer must be ON continuously (not in STANDBY) for
at least 72 hours immediately prior to oscillator adjustment to allow
both the temperature and frequency of the 10 MHz Quartz Crystal
Oscillator to stabilize. Adjustment should not be attempted before the
oscillator is allowed to reach its specified aging rate. Failure to allow
sufficient stabilization time could result in oscillator misadjustment.
The
10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator (HP P/N 0960-0477)
will typically reach its specified aging rate again within 72 hours
after being switched off for a period of up to 24 hours. If extreme
environmental conditions were encountered during storage or
shipment (i.e. mechanical shock, temperature extremes) the oscillator
could require up to 30 days to achieve its specified aging rate.
1. Set the rear-panel FREQ REFERENCE switch on the spectrum
analyzer RF Section to INT.
The
the
Vdc STANDBY supply provides power to the heater circuit in
10 MHz Frequency Standard assembly whenever line power
Not e
Note
is applied to the RF Section. This allows the
10 MHz Frequency
Standard oven to remain at thermal equilibrium, minimizing
frequency drift due to temperature variations. The OVEN COLD
message should typically appear on the spectrum analyzer display for
10 minutes or less after line power is first applied to the RF Section.
The rear-panel FREQ REFERENCE switch enables or disables the RF
Section
Vdc switched supply, which powers the oscillator circuits
in the
10 MHz Frequency Standard. This switch must be set to
INT and the spectrum analyzer must be switched ON continuously
(not in STANDBY) for at least 72 hours before adjusting the frequency
of the
10 MHz Frequency Standard.
2. Set the LINE switch to ON. Leave the spectrum analyzer ON
(not in STANDBY) and undisturbed for at least 48 hours to allow
the temperature and frequency of the
Standard to stabilize.
10 MHz Frequency
3. Press
TRACE B [CLEAR-WRITE]
to turn off the display. This
prolongs CRT life while the spectrum analyzer is unattended. To
turn the CRT back on press TRACE B
4. Connect the (Cesium Beam) Frequency Standard to the Frequency
Counter’s rear-panel
Figure 3-52.
IN/OUT connector as shown in
5. Disconnect the short jumper cable on the RF Section rear panel
from the FREQ REFERENCE INT connector. Connect this output
(FREQ REFERENCE INT) to INPUT A on the Frequency Counter.
A REF UNLOCK message should appear on the CRT display.
Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Time Base Adjustment (SN
and Below, also
and Above)
6. Set the Frequency Counter controls as follows:
INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A
ATTENUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Coupled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
1
input impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
100
INT/EXT switch (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXT
7. On the Frequency Counter, select a 10 second gate time by
pressing,
8. Offset the displayed frequency by -10.0 MHz by pressing,
MATH 10
10
6
SELECT/ENTER]. The Frequency Counter should now display the
difference between the frequency of the INPUT A signal
10 MHz Frequency Standard) and 10.0 MHz with a displayed
resolution of 1
(0.001 Hz).
9. Wait at least two gate periods for the Frequency Counter to settle,
and record the frequency of the
as reading
10 MHz Frequency Standard
Reading 1:
10. Allow the spectrum analyzer to remain powered (not in
STANDBY) and undisturbed for an additional 24 hours.
11. Repeat steps 3 through 7 and record the frequency of the
MHz Frequency Standard as reading
10
Reading 2:
12. If the difference between reading
and reading
is greater
than 1 the 10 MHz Frequency Standard has not
achieved its specified aging rate; the spectrum analyzer should
remain powered (not in STANDBY) and undisturbed for an
additional
interval. Then, repeat steps 3 through 7,
recording the frequency of the 10 MHz Frequency Standard at the
end of each
mHz/day
interval, until the specified aging rate of 1
is achieved.
Reading 3:
Reading 4:
Reading 5:
Reading 6:
Reading 7:
Reading 8:
Reading 9:
Reading 10:
13. Position the spectrum analyzer on its right side as shown
in Figure 3-52 and remove the bottom cover. Typically, the
frequency of the
slightly when the spectrum analyzer is reoriented. Record this
shifted frequency of the 10 MHz Frequency Standard.
10 MHz Frequency Standard will shift
Adjustments 3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Time Base Adjustment (SN
and Below, also
and Above)
Reading 11:
Subtract the shifted frequency reading in step 11 from the
last recorded frequency in step 10. This gives the frequency
14.
correction factor needed to adjust the
10 MHz Frequency
Standard.
Frequency Correction Factor:
15. On the Frequency Counter, select a 1 second gate time
pressing, The Frequency Counter should
now display the difference between the frequency of the INPUT
A signaland 10.0 MHz with a resolution of Hz (10
Remove the two adjustment cover screws from the
1
10 MHz
16.
Quartz Crystal Oscillator. See Figure 3-53 for the location of the
10 MHz Frequency Standard.
Do not use a metal adjustment tool to tune an oven-controlled
crystal oscillator (OCXO). The metal will conduct heat away from the
oscillator circuit, shifting the operating conditions.
Note
17. Use a nonconductive adjustment tool to adjust the
ADJ capacitor on the 10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator for
a Frequency Counter indication of 0.00 Hz. See Figure 3-53 for
FREQ
the location of the
10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator.
R F S e c t i o n ( b o t t o m
Figure 3-53. Location of
Adjustment
On the Frequency Counter, select a 10 second gate time by
18.
pressing,
10
The Frequency Counter
should now display the difference between the frequency of the
INPUT A signal and 10.0 MHz with a resolution of 0.001 Hz (1
Wait at least 2 gate periods for the Frequency Counter to settle,
19.
and then adjust the
Frequency Standard for a stable Frequency Counter indication of
(0.000 + Frequency Correction Factor) Hz.
FINE adjustment on the
10 MHz
Replace the RF Section bottom cover and reconnect the short
jumper cable between the FREQ REFERENCE INT and EXT
connectors,
20.
3-98 Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Time Base Adjustment (SN
to
12. Tim e Ba se
Ad ju stm en t (SN
t o
RF Section:
R efer en ce
Frequency Standard Regulator
10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator
Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test
Rela ted P er for m a n ce
De scr ip t ion
The frequency of the internal 10 MHz Frequency Standard is
compared to a known frequency standard and adjusted for minimum
frequency error. This procedure does not adjust the short-term
stability or long-term stability of the 10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator,
which are determined by characteristics of the particular oscillator
and the environmental and warmup conditions to which it has been
recently exposed. The spectrum analyzer must be ON continuously
(not in STANDBY) for at least 72 hours immediately prior to oscillator
adjustment to allow both the temperature and frequency of the
oscillator to stabilize.
D
Figure 3-54. Time Base Adjustment Setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP
HP
Frequency Standard
Frequency Counter
Equ ip m en t
Cables:
BNC cable, 122 cm (48 in) (2 required) . . . . . . . . HP
P r oced u r e
Not e
The spectrum analyzer must be ON continuously (not in STANDBY)
for at least 72 hours immediately prior to oscillator adjustment.
This allows both the temperature and frequency of the oscillator to
stabilize. Adjustment should not be attempted before the oscillator is
allowed to reach its specified aging rate. Failure to allow sufficient
stabilization time could result in oscillator misadjustment.
Adjustments 3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Time Base Adjustment (SN
to
The
10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator (HP P/N 1081
11)
typically reaches its specified aging rate again within 72 hours after
being switched off for a period of up to 30 days, and within 24 hours
after being switched off for a period less than 24 hours. If extreme
environmental conditions were encountered during storage or
shipment (i.e. mechanical shock, temperature extremes) the oscillator
could require up to 30 days to achieve its specified aging rate.
Replacement oscillators are factory-adjusted after a complete warmup
and after the specified aging rate has been achieved. Readjustment
should typically not be necessary after oscillator replacement, and is
generally not recommended.
1. Set the rear-panel FREQ REFERENCE switch on the spectrum
analyzer RF Section to INT.
The + 22 Vdc STANDBY supply provides power to the heater circuit in
Not e
Not e
the
10 MHz Frequency Standard assembly whenever line power
10 MHz Frequency
is applied to the RF Section. This allows the
Standard oven to remain at thermal equilibrium, minimizing
frequency drift due to temperature variations. The OVEN COLD
message should typically appear on the spectrum analyzer display for
10 minutes or less after line power is first applied to the RF Section.
The rear-panel FREQ REFERENCE switch enables or disables the RF
Section
in the
Vdc switched supply, which powers the oscillator circuits
10 MHz Frequency Standard. This switch must be set to
INT and the spectrum analyzer must be switched ON continuously
(not in STANDBY) for at least 72 hours before adjusting the frequency
of the
10 MHz Frequency Standard.
2. Set the LINE switch to ON. Leave the spectrum analyzer ON
(not in STANDBY) and undisturbed for at least 48 hours to allow
the temperature and frequency of the
Standard to stabilize.
10 MHz Frequency
3. Press
TRACE B (CLEAR-WRITE)
to turn off the display. This
prolongs CRT life while the spectrum analyzer is unattended. To
turn the CRT back on press TRACE B (MAX HOLD)
4. Connect the (Cesium Beam) Frequency Standard to the Frequency
Counter’s rear-panel
Figure 3-54.
IN/OUT connector as shown in
5. Disconnect the short jumper cable on the RF Section rear panel
from the FREQ REFERENCE INT connector. Connect this output
(FREQ REFERENCE INT) to INPUT A on the Frequency Counter.
A REF UNLOCK message should appear on the CRT display.
6. Set the Frequency Counter controls as follows:
INPUT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A
ATTENUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Coupled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
1
input impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
AUTO TRIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ON
100
FILTER
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Time Base Adjustment (SN
to
INT/EXT switch (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXT
7. On the Frequency Counter, select a 10 second gate time by
pressing,
8. Offset the displayed frequency by -10.0 MHz by pressing,
10
10
MATH (SELECT/ENTER]
6
(SELECT/ENTER). The Frequency Counter should now display the
difference between the frequency of the INPUT A signal
10 MHz Frequency Standard) and 10.0 MHz with a displayed
resolution of 1
(0.001 Hz).
9. Wait at least two gate periods for the Frequency Counter to settle,
and record the frequency of the
as reading
10 MHz Frequency Standard
Reading 1:
The
10 MHz
Quartz Crystal Oscillator has a typical adjustment range of
Hz. The oscillator frequency should be within this range
Not e
after 48 hours of continuous operation.
10. Allow the spectrum analyzer to remain powered (not in
STANDBY) and undisturbed for an additional 24 hours.
11. Repeat steps 3 through 7 and record the frequency of the
MHz Frequency Standard as reading
10
Reading 2:
12. If the difference between reading
and reading
is greater
than 1 10 MHz Frequency Standard has not
the
achieved its specified aging rate; the spectrum analyzer should
remain powered (not in STANDBY) and undisturbed for an
additional
interval. Then, repeat steps 3 through 7,
recording the frequency of the 10 MHz Frequency Standard at the
end of each
mHz/day
interval, until the specified aging rate of 1
is achieved.
Reading 3:
Reading 4:
Reading 5:
Reading 6:
Reading 7:
13. Position the spectrum analyzer on its right side as shown
in Figure 3-54 and remove the bottom cover. Typically, the
frequency of the
10 MHz Frequency Standard will shift
slightly when the spectrum analyzer is reoriented. Record this
shifted frequency of the
10 MHz Frequency Standard.
Reading 8:
14. Subtract the shifted frequency reading in step 8 from the last
recorded frequency in step 7. This gives the frequency correction
factor needed to adjust the
10 MHz Frequency Standard.
Frequency Correction Factor:
Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Time Base Adjustment (SN
to
15. On the Frequency Counter, select a 1 second gate time by
pressing,
1
The Frequency Counter should
now display the difference between the frequency of the INPUT
A signal and 10.0 MHz with a resolution of 0.01 Hz (10
Do not use a metal adjustment tool to tune an oven-controlled
crystal oscillator (OCXO). The metal will conduct heat away from the
oscillator circuit, shifting the operating conditions.
Note
Use a nonconductive adjustment tool to adjust the
ADJ capacitor on the
FREQ
10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator for
a Frequency Counter indication of 0.00 Hz. See Figure 3-55 for
16.
the location of the
10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator.
R F S e c t i o n ( b o t t o m
Figure 3-55. Location of
Adjustment
On the Frequency Counter, select a 10 second gate time by
17.
pressing,
10
The Frequency Counter
should now display the difference between the frequency of the
INPUT A signal and 10.0 MHz with a resolution of 0.001 Hz (1
18. Wait at least 2 gate periods for the Frequency Counter to settle,
and then adjust the FREQ ADJ capacitor on the 10
MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator for a stable Frequency Counter
indication of (0.000 + Frequency Correction Factor)
Hz.
Replace the RF Section bottom cover and reconnect the short
jumper cable between the FREQ REFERENCE INT and EXT
connectors.
19.
3-102 Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. 20 MHz Reference Adjustments
13. 20 MHz
R efer en ce
Ad ju stm en ts
RF Section:
20 MHz Reference
R efer en ce
Calibrator Amplitude Accuracy Test
Rela ted P er for m a n ce
Descr ip tion
The 20 MHz output is peaked and amplitude checked for proper level.
The INTERNAL REFERENCE output level is then checked for proper
output level as compared to input from
Time Base. Finally, the
COMB DRIVE and CAL OUTPUT are adjusted for proper power levels.
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
SYNTHESIZER LEVEL
POWER METER
DIGITAL VOLTMETER
(Devise Under
Figure 3-56. 20
Reference Adjustments Setup
HP
HP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spectrum Analyzer
Equ ip m en t
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Voltmeter (DVM)
Frequency Synthesizer
HP
A
Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Sensor
HP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digitizing Oscilloscope
HP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Divider Probe
Adapters:
1250-0780
1250-1474
Type N (m) to BNC (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type N (f) to BNC (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cables:
BNC to SMB cable Snap-On (2 required) . . . . . . 85680-60093
Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. 20 MHz Reference Adjustments
1. Position instrument on right side as shown in Figure 3-56 and
remove bottom cover. Remove 20 MHz Reference and install
on extenders. See Figure 3-57 for the location of components.
P r oced u r e
2. Set LINE switch to ON and press
PRESET).
3. Set rear-panel FREQ REFERENCE INT/EXT switch to INT.
Disconnect cable 2 (red) from
output of Time Base
Connect power meter to
using cable 2 (red). Note power
meter indication for reference later.
4. Reconnect
5.
Time Base output to
to Ground. Set the HP
Spectrum
Analyzer to [CENTER FREQUENCY) 20 MHz,
SPAN) 1 MHz,
LEVEL)
and
100
Connect
to RF INPUT of HP
Analyzer and set
[REFERENCE
to place of signal at reference line (top graticule
line).
6. Set HP
Spectrum Analyzer to 1 dB/division SCALE and
reset reference level to place peak of signal at reference line.
7. Connect DVM to
COMB DRIVE
and ground to
for DVM indication of + 0.1 V dc.
Adjust
Disconnect DVM. (If DVM remains connected, it may load circuit.)
See Figure 3-57 for location of adjustment.
R E F E R E N C E
Figure 3-57. Location of 20 MHz Reference Adjustments
8. Adjust
3
DOUBLER
Adjust CENTER FREQ
to lower signal peak approximately
to peak signal on HP
Spectrum Analyzer display. Next, adjust
for signal peak.
DOUBLER
9. Disconnect cable 2 (red) from
frequency synthesizer to
and connect
Set FREQUENCY of frequency
Set HP
OUTPUT of
synthesizer to 10.17 MHz and set AMPLITUDE to + 3
3-104 Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. 20 MHz Reference Adjustments
Spectrum Analyzer (CENTER FREQUENCY_) to 20.34 MHz and
SCALE to 10 dB/division.
10. Adjust 20.34 MHz NULL
as indicated by HP
for minimum 20.34 MHz
Spectrum Analyzer
signal at
display. With signal
the plates of the NULL adjustment
capacitor should be meshed approximately halfway. If fully
meshed or fully unmeshed, a circuit malfunction is indicated.
11. Disconnect frequency synthesizer from
and reconnect cable
2 (red) to
Connect power meter to rear-panel INT REF
OUT connector.
12. Power meter indication should be no more than 5
less than
that noted in step 3
Time Base output).
13. Disconnect
from ground. Connect power meter to
14. Adjust
+ 10.0
COMB DRIVE
for power meter indication of
15. Connect power meter to
through cable 3 (orange). Power
meter indication should be at least -15
(orange) to
Reconnect cable 3
16. Connect power meter to
through cable 4 (yellow). Power
meter indication should be at least -10
(yellow) to
Reconnect cable 4
17. On the oscilloscope, key in
reset.
to perform a soft
18. Connect the channel 1 probe to the oscilloscope’s rear panel
PROBE COMPENSATION AC CALIBRATOR OUTPUT connector.
Press [AUTO SCALE). Adjust the channel 1 probe for an optimum
square wave display on the oscilloscope.
19. Connect oscilloscope with the HP
probe to
and
the ground to the analyzer’s chassis ground.
20. Set the oscilloscope controls as follows:
Press
Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..on
div
amplitude scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..OV
coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..dc
probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . off
Press
EDGE TRIGGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . trig’d auto
source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 mv edge
Press
time scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 ns
delay . . . . . . .
reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..CNTR
Press
connect dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on
DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... AVG
Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. 20 MHz Reference Adjustments
Press
Press
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..on
Vmarker 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
start marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . place at
. place at next
crossing
crossing
stop marker . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 1. Oscilloscope display should be a 10 MHz signal of TTL level; less
than
to greater than
See Figure 3-58 for a typical
signal.
1 4 0 . 0 0 0
4 0 . 0 0 0
2 0 . 0
- 6 0 . 0 0 0
Figure 3-58. Typical Signal at
22. Install
20 MHz Reference without extenders and reconnect
cable 7 (violet) to
23. Connect power meter to front-panel CAL OUTPUT.
24. Adjust
-10.0
CAL LEVEL
for power meter indication of
25. the
Comb Generator must be readjusted after adjusting the
20 MHz Reference. Refer to Adjustments 22, Comb Generator
Adjustments, for adjustment procedure.
Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14. 249 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustments
14. 249 MHz P h a se
Lock Oscilla tor
Ad ju stm en ts
RF Section:
249 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator
R efer en ce
Two center frequencies are chosen: one which will tune the 249 MHz
Oscillator to its low-end frequency and one which will tune the 249
MHz Oscillator to the high-end frequency. The voltage is monitored
with a DVM at the output of the oscillator, and the oscillator
frequency is adjusted to produce the proper dc voltage output for
De scr ip t ion
each frequency (low-end and high-end). Next, the 500
Trap is
adjusted to null the 500
249 MHz signal.
sidebands using the sixth harmonic of the
DIGITAL VOLTMETER
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
ANALYZER
J
Figure 3-59. 249 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustments Setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP
Spectrum Analyzer
Amplifier
HP
Equ ip m en t
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP
Digital Voltmeter (DVM)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 1250-0670
Tee, SMB Male
Adapters:
1250-1250
Type N (m) to BNC (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cables:
BNC cable, 122 cm (48 in) (2 required) . . . . . . . . . . . .
BNC to SMB Snap-On cable (2 required) . . . . . . 85680-60093
Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14. 249 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustments
Place instrument on right side with IF-Display Section facing right
P r o c e d u r e
as shown in Figure 3-59.
2. Set LINE switch to ON and press
PRESET].
Connect DVM to
and ground to
3.
4. Key in [CENTER FREQUENCY) 17.6 MHz and [FREQUENCY SPAN) 0 Hz
on HP
5. Adjust
PLO
for DVM indication between
V dc and
V dc. See Figure 3-60 for location of adjustment.
2 4 9 M H z
P HAS E LOCK OS CILLATOR
Figure 3-60.
Location of 249 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustments
6. Key in
FREQUENCY] 37.1 MHz.
DVM indication should be between + 12.9 V dc and + 16.9 V dc. If
DVM indication is within the given range, disconnect DVM from
7.
and proceed to step 18. Otherwise, key in
2, SET
LINE switch to STANDBY, and place
249 MHz PLO on extender
(with DVM still connected to
Set LINE switch to ON and key in
Spectrum Analyzer.
2 on HP
8.
9.
Adjust
PLO
for DVM indication of + 13.0
V dc.
10. Key in [CENTER FREQUENCY) 17.6 MHz,
SPAN] 0 Hz, and
1.
Adjust
PLO
slug should be near center of coil form when
properly adjusted.)
for DVM indication of
V dc.
is
11.
Key in 2 and adjust
for + 13.0 fO.l V dc at
for V dc.
and need no further
12.
13. Press 1 (RECALL 1) and adjust
14. Repeat steps 12 and 13 until
adjustment.
Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14. 249 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustments
Set LINE switch to STANDBY. Adjust
one-half turn
15.
counterclockwise before placing
249 MHz PLO in HP
Spectrum Analyzer without extender. (Leave DVM connected to
16. Set LINE switch to ON and key in
should be between V dc and
1. DVM indication
V
17. Press 2 (RECALL 2). DVM indication should be between + 12.9 V
dc and + 16.9 V dc. Disconnect DVM from
Set LINE switch to STANDBY and place
extender.
249 MHz PLO on
18.
19. Set LINE switch to ON, press
as follows:
PRESET), and set the analyzer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[C E N T E R F R E Q U E N C Y )
NCY SPAN)
16.5 MHz
. . . 0 Hz
..................................................................
20. Disconnect cable from
and connect cable 89 (gray/white) to
one branch of a tee. Using a short coaxial cable (see Note below),
connect the other branch of the tee back to Connect the
stem of the tee to the HP Spectrum Analyzer RF INPUT.
The short cable 9 (white) in the IF-Display Section
can be disconnected and used for this adjustment. Be sure to
reconnect the cable 9 (white) when finished.
to
Note
Press
on the HP
Spectrum Analyzer and
21.
key in (FREQUENCY SPAN) 5 MHz, [CENTER FREQUENCY) 1547 MHz,
SEARCH) and
22. On the HP
Spectrum Analyzer, key in [SIGNAL TRACK),
[FREQUENCY SPAN) 10
300 Hz, [REFERENCE LEVEL)
-50
and
0
On the HP
and set
Analyzer. Press [CENTER FREQUENCY), then
Spectrum Analyzer, turn off [SIGNAL TRACK_]
23.
24.
STEP SIZE) to 500
on the HP
Spectrum
key.
Disconnect cable from the HP
Spectrum Analyzer RF
INPUT and connect cable (from tee) to PRE AMP input of HP
Amplifier. Connect cable from PRE AMP output to the HP
Spectrum Analyzer RF INPUT.
Adjust
the 500
500
for location of adjustments.
Press 1 on HP
to STANDBY and place
500
TRAP adjustments
and
to null
25.
26.
sideband displayed on the spectrum analyzer. The
sideband should be less than -90
See Figure 3-60
Spectrum Analyzer. Set LINE switch
249 MHz PLO in HP
Spectrum
Analyzer without extender (leave tee connected).
Set LINE switch to ON and press
1. Verify that 500
27.
28.
remains less than -90
in amplitude.
Disconnect tee and reconnect cable 89 (gray/white) to
1.
Adjustments
09
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15. 275 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustment
2
7
5
P HAS E LOCK OS CILLATOR
0
1
U
Figure 3-62. Location of 275 MHz PLO Adjustment
7. Disconnect test equipment from instrument.
Adjustments
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16. Secon d IF
Am p lifier a n d
Th ir d Con ver ter
Ad ju st m en t
RF Section:
Second IF Amplifier
R efer en ce
Third Converter
A synthesized sweeper is used to inject a signal of 301.4 MHz at -20
Descr ip tion
in to the
displayed on a scalar network analyzer. The amplifier is adjusted for
of greater than 7 MHz and less than 14 MHz centered at
301.4 MHz. Its gain should be greater than 14 and less than 17
A spectrum analyzer is used to view the output of the 280 MHz
Second IF Amplifier. The output of the amplifier is
a
Oscillator on the
Third Converter and the oscillator is centered in
its adjustment range.
ANALYZE
SYNTHESIZED WEEPER
METER
2 0
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
Under
ATTENUATOR
NETWORK ANALYZER
Figure 3-63. Second IF Amplifier Adjustments Setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP
HP
Spectrum Analyzer
Synthesized Sweeper
Scalar Network analyzer
Equ ip m en t
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Splitter
HP
Opt. 001
A
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP
HP
Opt. 020
Power Sensor
Detector (2 required)
20
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attenuator
HP
Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16. Second IF Amplifier and Third Converter Adjustment
Adapters:
Type N (f) to
(f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1745
Type N (m) to BNC (f) required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-0780
Type N (f) to BNC (f) required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1474
APC 3.5 (f) to APC 3.5 (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1749
Cables:
BNC to SMB Snap-On
Accessory) (2 required) . 85680-60093
BNC 122 cm (48 in) (3 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMA (m) to (m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5061-5458
1. Position instrument on right side as shown in Figure 3-63, with
bottom cover removed.
P r oced u r e
2. Set LINE switch to ON and press
HP and HP
PRESET] on HP
HP
3. Connect 20
Attenuator and power splitter to RF OUTPUT
Secon d IF Am p lifier
Ad ju st m e n t s
of synthesized sweeper. Connect one arm of power splitter
to R input of scalar network analyzer through Detector. See
Figure 3-63.
Set synthesized sweeper FREQUENCY MARKERS
to 291.4
4.
MHz and
to 311.4 MHz.
MHz on synthesized sweeper.
Connect Power meter to other power splitter port and set
synthesized sweeper [POWER LEVEL) for Power Meter indication of
-20.0
5. Press
6.
7.
Disconnect Power Meter and connect power splitter output to
using adapter and a BNC to SMB test cable. Refer to
Figure 3-64.
Connect
to A input of scalar network analyzer, using
8.
9.
adapter and another BNC to SMB test cable.
Connect synthesized sweeper SWEEP OUTPUT (rear panel),
Z-AXIS BLANK/MKRS (rear panel), and PULSE MODULATION
INPUT to proper rear-panel connectors on scalar network
Analyzer, as shown in Figure 3-63.
On the scalar network analyzer, turn Channel 2 off and press
(A/R).
Set scalar network analyzer
LEVEL) to + 14 Set REF POSN (press REF POSN) to the fourth
division from bottom using the data knob.
to 1
and set
(RF
12. On synthesized sweeper, press (ON)
and
Set
to 500 ms.
Adjust
301.4 MHz
Filter,
through
for
the best
filter response with a gain of + 14
See Figure 3-64 for the location of the
but
+ 17
adjustments.
Adjustments
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16. Second IF Amplifier and Third Converter Adjustment
See Figure 3-65 for the typical response when the
filter
is properly adjusted.
14.
On the scalar network analyzer, press
A, ON and set the cursor to the -3
filter response
MAX. Press cursor
point on the low side of the
15. Press cursor A and set the cursor to the -3
point on the high
side on the filter response. The cursor A should read 0 fO.l
I F A MP L I F I E R
\
CONVERTER
AMPTD
Figure 3-64.
Location of 301.4
BPF and 280 MHz AMPTD Adjustments
Figure 3-65.
301.4 MHz
Filter Adjustment Waveform
On the synthesized sweeper, press
and set the Marker to the
16.
17.
-3
point on the low side of the filter response.
On the synthesized sweeper, press
and set the Marker to the
-3
point on the high side of the filter response.
3-114 Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16. Second IF Amplifier and Third Converter Adjustment
Place the Markers as accurately as possible within the cursor markers
for maximum frequency accuracy.
Note
18. On the synthesized sweeper, press
between 7 and 14 MHz.
should read
19. On the synthesized sweeper, press
OFF and
OFF.
20. Set the synthesized sweeper FREQUENCY MARKERS
MHz and to 351.4 MHz.
to 251.4
21. Set the Scalar Network Analyzer
to 10
and set
(REF LEVEL) to + 14
from the top.
Set the REF POSN to one division down
22. Adjust
for minimum amplitude response at 258.4 MHz.
adjustments.
Refer to Figure 3-64 for the location of the
Refer to Figure 3-66 for the typical response when the
filter is properly adjusted.
2 8 0
Figure 3-66. Minimum Image Response at 258.4 MHz
23. Repeat the adjustments in steps 13 and 22 to assure that the
is between 7 MHz and 14 MHz and the image response
at 258.4 MHz is minimized.
Remember to use the appropriate set up for steps 13 and 20.
Not e
24. Disconnect the cables from
and
and reconnect the
instrument cables.
Disconnect cable 83 (gray/orange) from
and connect
25.
26.
Th ir d Con ver ter
Ad ju st m e n t
to the input of HP
Spectrum Analyzer, using a BNC to
SMB test cable.
Press
PRESET) on the HP Spectrum Analyzer, then
key in [CENTER FREQUENCY) 280 MHz, [FREQUENCY SPAN) 2 MHz. Set
MARKER
1
+ 2
and [ENTER
Adjust
AMPTD
for maximum signal level as indicated
27.
28.
on spectrum analyzer display.
Disconnect spectrum analyzer and reconnect cable 83
(gray/orange) to
Adjustments 3-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16. Second IF Amplifier and Third Converter Adjustment
17. P ilot Secon d IF
Ad ju stm en ts
RF Section:
Pilot Second IF Amplifier
R efer en ce
Pilot Third Converter
A synthesized sweeper is used to inject a signal of 269 MHz at
De scr ip t ion
-20
amplifier is displayed on a scaler network analyzer. The amplifier is
adjusted for a of greater than 21 MHz centered at 269 MHz
into the
Pilot Second IF Amplifier. The output of the
and a gain of greater than + 10
SYNTHESIZED
METER
ANALYZER
Figure 3-67. Pilot Second IF Amplifier Adjustments Setup
HP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scalar Network analyzer
Synthesized Sweeper
Equ ip m en t
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP
Opt. 001
Power Splitter
Power Meter
Power Sensor
A
A
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detector (2 required)
HP
Opt. 020
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
Attenuator
Adapters:
Type N (f) to
1250-1745
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(f)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-0780
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1474
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1749
Type N (m) to BNC (f)
Type N (f) to BNC (f)
APC 3.5 (f) to APC 3.5 (f)
required)
required)
Cables:
BNC to SMB Snap-On (Service Accessory)
required) . 85680-60093
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BNC 122 cm (48 in) (3 required)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5061-5458
SMA (m) to (m)
3-116 Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17. Pilot Second IF Amplifier Adjustments
1. Position instrument on right side as shown in Figure 3-67, with
bottom cover removed.
P r oced u r e
2. Set LINE switch to ON and press
PRESET) on HP
(DUT), HP
and HP
3. Connect 20
Attenuator and power splitter to RF OUTPUT of
synthesized sweeper. Connect one arm of power splitter to R
input of scalar network analyzer through detector as shown in
Figure 3-67.
4. Set synthesized sweeper FREQUENCY MARKERS
to 254 MHz
and
to 284 MHz.
5. Press
269 MHz on synthesized sweeper.
6. Connect Power Meter to the other power splitter port and set
synthesized sweeper
of -20.0
LEVEL) for a Power Meter indication
7. Disconnect Power Meter and connect power splitter output to
using adapter and BNC to SMB test cable.
8. Connect
to A input of scalar network analyzer through
detector, using adapter and another BNC to SMB test cable.
9. Connect synthesized sweeper SWEEP OUTPUT (rear panel),
Z-AXIS BLANK/MKRS (rear panel), and PULSE MODULATION
INPUT (front panel) to proper rear-panel connectors on scalar
network analyzer, shown in Figure 3-67.
10. On scalar network analyzer, turn channel 2 off and press
(A/R).
11. Set the scalar network analyzer
LEVEL) to + 10.00 Set REF POSN (press REF POSN) to the
fourth division from the bottom using the data knob.
to 1
and set
(REF
12. On synthesized sweeper, press
Set SWEEP TIME to 500 ms.
(ON),
SWEEP), and
13. Adjust REF LEVEL for a mid-screen response of signal on HP
14. Adjust
269 MHz
for best
than + 10 (above REF 1 line). See Figure 3-68 for location
Filter,
and
filter response with gain of greater
of adjustments. Figure 3-69 shows typical response when the
filter is properly adjusted.
Adjustments
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17. Pilot Second IF Amplifier Adjustments
P I L O T
I F A MP L I F I E R
P I L O T
CONVERTER
F I L T E R
\
Figure 3-68.
Location of 269 MHz
Filter Adjustments
3
2
1
Figure 3-69.
Filter Adjustments Waveforms
269 MHz
15. On the scalar network analyzer, press
A, ON and set the cursor to the -3
filter response
MAX. Press cursor
point on the low side of the
16. Press cursor A and set the cursor to the -3
point on the high
side on the filter response. The cursor A should read 0
17. Press on synthesized sweeper and set to three divisions down
(3
from top of
filter response. Press
and set to
three divisions down on opposite side of
filter response.
18. Press MKR A on synthesized sweeper.
should be greater
than 21 MHz.
19. Disconnect cable 80
from
from
and cable 81
and reconnect instrument cables.
Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18. Frequency Control Adjustments
18. F r equ en cy
Con tr ol
Ad ju stm en ts
RF Section:
Frequency Control
R efer en ce
Sweep Time Accuracy Test
Frequency Span Accuracy Test
Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test
Rela ted P er for m a n ce
Tests
The sweep reference voltage is adjusted and then the sweep times are
adjusted for proper tolerances. The sweep tune voltage is adjusted.
Descr ip tion
Then the YTO DAC,
DAC, and LSD
DAC are adjusted, each
to within its tolerance. Next, the Start and Stop frequencies are
adjusted. FM Span is adjusted next for the proper amount of FM
deviation.
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
DIGITAL VOLTMETER
FREPUENCY COUNTER
Figure 3-70. Frequency Control Adjustments Setup
Digital Voltmeter (DVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP
Frequency Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP
Equ ip m en t
P r oced u r e
1. Place instrument on right side with IF-Display facing right as
shown in Figure 3-70 and remove bottom cover.
2. Set LINE switch to ON and press
3. Connect DVM to and ground to
PRESET).
4. Adjust
dc.
REF
for DVM indication of 10.00
V
See Figure 3-71 for location of adjustment.
Adjustments
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18. Frequency Control Adjustments
S TART
FM S P AN
STOP
FREOUENCY CONTROL
T I L T
YTO
R E F
REF
FAS T
Figure 3-71. Location of Frequency Control Adjustments
5. Connect DVM to
6. Adjust TUNE REF
V dc. See Figure 3-71 for location of adjustment.
and ground to
for DVM indication of -10.285
7. Key in [CENTER FREQUENCY) 10 MHz,
A [CLEAR-WRITE), Sweep
SPAN] 0 Hz, Trace
Scale LIN.
8. Key in
TIME)
Marker
Adjust marker to the
then key in (SHIFT)
Sta r t-Up Tim e
left
edge of the CRT. Key in (SHIFT)
three times. CRT annotation should indicate SWEEP
GEN measured sweep time.
1 second start-up time:
The start-up time measured in step 8 uses the
Note
function that displays a sweep time value which is 1% to 5%
longer than the actual spectrum analyzer sweeptime. This error is
compensated when using the shift F function to adjust the sweep
times in the following procedure.
9. Key in Marker
then
three times and note the CRT
annotation. The annotation should indicate SWEEP GEN
measured sweep time of (1 .OO + start-up time from step 8)
10. Key in [SHIFT)
Slow Sw eep
Ad ju st m e n t
s. To adjust sweep time, adjust
SLOW slightly, then
and note new SWEEP GEN measured
key in
sweep time as indicated by CRT annotation. Repeat this process
until the 1 sweep time is within
Adjusting
CW decreases the sweeptime.
Note
Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18. Frequency Control Adjustments
11. Repeat Start-Up Time Measurement procedure in step 8 and step 9
F u ll Sw eep
Ad ju st m e n t
for (SWEEP TIME) of 20 ms. Note value of measurement.
20 ms start-up time:
12. Key in [Shift_)
The annotation should indicate SWEEP GEN measured sweeptime
of (20 ms + start-up time noted in step ms. If it is not in
three times and note the CRT annotation.
determine the difference between this measured sweep time
and the target sweep time of 20 ms + start-up time noted in step
11.
(measured sweep time)
(20.00 ms + start-up time) =
13. Adjust
the opposite direction, as noted in step 12. See note below.
Adjust slightly then key in [SHIFT) and note
FAST for three times the difference; and in
new SWEEP GEN measured sweep time as indicated by CRT
annotation. Repeat this process until the 20 ms sweep time is set
to the value calculated in this step.
Adjusting
CW increases the sweeptime. If the difference
Not e
between the measured 20 ms sweep time and the target sweep time
is less than approximately 0.3 ms, adjust
for the target
sweeptime. Adjusting to 3 times the difference noted in step
12 is only needed if the difference noted in step 12 is greater than 0.3
ms.
14. Repeat the adjustments in step 8 through step 13 until the
measured sweep time at 20 ms is 20 ms plus the Start-Up Time
measured in step 11
ms) and the measured sweep time at 1
is 1.00 plus the start-up time measured in step 8 (50.01 s).
Key in
15.
STEP SIZE)
0 MHz. The CRT annotation should
YTO a n d
DAC
indicate DACS 0.
Ad ju st m e n t s
16. Connect DVM to
and ground to
If using an HP
DVM, note
If not using an HP
then
voltage indication for reference later.
17. Key in
STEP
1023 MHz. (CRT annotation may still
indicate DACS 1023.)
Adjust YTO
V dc. If not using an HP
for DVM indication of + 10.230
DVM, adjust for specified voltage
18.
plus the DVM indication noted in step 16. See Figure 3-71 for
location of adjustment.
19. On the HP
Press
Connect DVM to
20.
21. Key in
STEP SIZE) 0 Hz. If using an HP
DVM,
then
If not using an HP
indication for reference later.
DVM, note voltage
Adjustments 3-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18. Frequency Control Adjustments
22. Key in
Adjust
STEP
1023 Hz.
LSD
for DVM indication of
23.
V dc. If not using an HP
DVM, adjust for specified
voltage plus the DVM indication in step 20. See Figure 3-71 for
location of adjustment.
24. On the HP
press
25. Connect frequency counter to rear-panel
connector.
LO OUTPUT
CRT
START a n d STOP
Ad ju st m e n t s
26. Press
PRESET), then key in
STEP
annotation should indicate DACS 0.
27. Adjust
of 2.050
START
0.002
for frequency counter indication
See Figure 3-71 for location of
adjustment.
28.
Key in
STEP
1023 MHz. CRT annotation should
indicate DACS 1023.
29. Adjust STOP
STOP
for frequency counter
indication of 3.7891
adjustment.
See Figure 3-71 for location of
30. Press
PRESET), then key in (CENTER FREQUENCY) 10 MHz,
F M SP AN Ad ju stm en t
[FREQUENCY SPAN] 20 MH Z.
Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2.
31.
32.
Adjust
FM SPAN
so that the LO Feedthrough signal is
centered on the left edge graticule and the 20 MHz CAL OUTPUT
signal is centered on the right edge graticule. See Figure 3-71 for
location of adjustment.
3-122 Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
19. Second Converter Adjustments
19. Secon d
Con ver t er
Ad ju stm en ts
RF Section:
RF Converter
R efer en ce
RF Gain Uncertainty Test
Spurious Responses Test
Rela ted P er for m a n ce
T e st
First, the second LO frequency is adjusted for proper frequency and
then the LO shift is adjusted by using the front-panel keys to shift the
Descr ip tion
LO up and down. Next, the Pilot IF
Filter is adjusted for
proper
and amplitude, then the signal IF
Filter
is adjusted. The second LO frequency and shift are checked and
readjusted, if necessary.
SYNTHESIZED WEEPER
POWER METER
R
PDWER
SENSOR
2 0
ATTENUATOR
Figure 3-72. Second Converter Adjustments Setup
HP
HP
HP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency Counter
Equ ip m en t
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scalar Network Analyzer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synthesized Sweeper
Amplifier
Power Splitter
Power Meter
Power Sensor
HP
Opt. 001
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A
A
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
required)
HP
Detector
Adjustments 3-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
19. Second Converter Adjustments
1. Remove
RF Converter assembly from HP
Spectrum
P r oced u r e
Analyzer. Removal and installation procedures are contained as
a repair procedure in the RF Section of the Troubleshooting and
Repair Manual, Volume 1.
2. Position instrument on right side as shown in Figure 3-72 with the
RF Converter removed but with cables still connected.
3. Set HP
Spectrum Analyzer LINE to ON and press
Secon d LO F r equ en cy
a n d Sh ift Ad ju stm en ts
PRESET].
The second LO and pilot second LO output power is typically -35
Not e
or less. An HP
amplify the LO power to a
meter.
amplifier is used in steps 1 through 26 to
level for the counter and power
The following adjustment tools are required to adjust the
Note
second converter:
driver (08555-20121) and hex nut driver
(08555-20122). Place the
driver through the center hole of the
hex nut driver. Loosen the adjustment nut using the hex nut driver
while adjusting the
with the
driver. Do not over
tighten the nut on the second converter.
4. Connect the amplifier’s input to
the amplifier’s output.
and the power meter to
for maximum power meter
5. Adjust
MIXER
indication. See Figure 3-73 for location of adjustment.
2 0 5 2
5
R F C O NVE R TE R
I F B P F
Ml XER
2 0 1 7 . 6
P I L O T
I F B P F
Figure 3-73. Location of Second Converter Adjustments
6. Disconnect power meter and connect frequency counter to
amplifier’s output.
7. Adjust
LO FREQ
for frequency counter
indication of 1748.6 MHz fl.O MHz. See Figure 3-73 for location
of adjustment.
8. Disconnect frequency counter and reconnect power meter to
amplifier’s output.
24 Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
19. Second Converter Adjustments
9. Readjust
indication.
MIXER
for maximum power
10. Disconnect the amplifier’s input from
and connect to
11. Adjust PILOT MIXER
for maximum power
meter indication. See Figure 3-73 for location of adjustment.
12. Disconnect power meter and connect frequency counter to
amplifier’s output.
to shift Second LO up and
to shift
13. Key in [SHIFT)
Second LO down.
14. Continue to shift Second LO up and down while adjusting
LO SHIFT for a frequency difference of 5.0
MHz fO.l MHz. Ignore the absolute value of either frequency.
Clockwise rotation of
decreases the frequency
difference.
15. Key in (SHIFT)
(Second LO shifted down).
LO FREQ for frequency counter
indication of 1748.6 MHz fO.l MHz.
16. Adjust
17. Repeat steps 13 through 16 until specifications of steps 14 and 16
are achieved.
18. Disconnect frequency counter and connect power meter to the
amplifier’s output.
19. Shift Second LO up and down, using
while adjusting PILOT
power out in both states of Second LO.
and (SHIFT)
for equal
MIXER
20. Power difference between Second LO shifted up and shifted down
should be less than 0.5
21. Disconnect amplifier’s input from
and connect to
22. Shift Second LO up and down, using
and
while adjusting
MIXER
for equal power out
in both states of the Second LO.
23. Power differences between Second LO shifted up and shifted
down should be less than 0.5
24. Disconnect power meter and connect frequency counter to
amplifier’s output.
Note frequency counter indication. If
LO FREQ for frequency
25. Key in
necessary, readjust
counter indication of 1748.6 fO.l MHz.
26. Shift Second LO up and down, using
and
and note frequency difference between low and high state
of Second LO. If necessary, readjust LO SHIFT
for a frequency difference of 5.0 MHz fO.l. Repeat
steps 27 and 28 until specifications contained in each step are
achieved.
Adjustments 3-125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
19. Second Converter Adjustments
27. Key in
[FREQUENCY SPAN] 0 Hz.
Secon d Con ver ter
F ilter
28. On the synthesized sweeper, key in
240 MHz,
50 MHz,
Ad ju stm en ts
and 10
29. Connect the synthesized sweeper’s SWEEP OUTPUT (rear panel),
Z-AXIS BLANK/MKRS (rear panel), and PULSE MODULATION
INPUT (front panel) to the proper rear-panel connectors on the
scalar network analyzer as shown in Figure 3-73.
30. On the scalar network analyzer, press PRESET, turn channel 2 off,
and press
(A/R).
31. Connect the synthesized sweeper’s output to the power splitter as
shown in Figure 3-72.
32. Connect one arm of power splitter to scalar network analyzer R
input. Connect other arm of power splitter to A input, using a
BNC to SMB snap-on test cable and necessary adapters.
33. Set the scalar network analyzer
LEVEL) to -16.00 Set REF POSN (press REF POSN) to the
fourth division from the bottom using the data knob.
to 1
and set
(REF
34. On the synthesized sweeper, press
(ON),
SWEEP), and
Set to 500 ms.
35. Adjust REF LEVEL for a mid-screen response of the
signal on the scalar network analyzer.
36. Connect the test cable from the power splitter output arm to
Pilot First IF IN.
37. Connect cable 80 (gray/black) from
the scalar network analyzer’s A input. Set
(PILOT
to 10
IF) to
38. On the spectrum analyzer, key in [SHIFT]
Hold (SHIFT] in until the LED lights, then press
sweep is free running.
until the
Not e
39. On the synthesized sweeper, set
MHz and to 50 MHz.
for a frequency of 2017.6
40. Adjust on the synthesized sweeper to center the
signal.
41. Adjust
and
for best
shape and
flatness at maximum amplitude of signal displayed on Scalar
network analyzer. A typical properly-adjusted
filter
response is shown in Figure 3-74. See Figure 3-73 for location
of adjustments. The
filter response at the 3
points
should be
PILOT
LO
MHz. See Figure 3-74 and Figure 3-75 for a typical
response for a SHIFT LO and a SHIFT
IF
3-126 Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
19. Second Converter Adjustments
Figure 3-74. Typical PILOT
IF
(SHIFT
Figure 3-75. Typical PILOT
IF
(SHIFT
42. Key in
and note amplitude of signal. Key in
and note amplitude of the
signal peak.
43. Continue to key in
then
while adjusting
for maximum amplitude and the same amplitude in both
states of the Second LO l
44. Check the at the 3
and On the scalar network analyzer, press
cursor A (ON) and set the cursor at the -3
points for both the
LO
Max. Press
point fO.l
Press
cursor A, cursor A, and set the cursor to the corresponding -3
point on the opposit side of the signal. The cursor should now
read 0 fO.l
45. On the synthesized sweeper, press
and place the marker on
either cursor A. Press and place the marker on the cursor A
on the opposite side of the trace.
46. On the synthesized sweeper, press
and read the
shown on the ENTRY DISPLAY. Press
Figure 3-74 and Figure 3-75.
OFF. See
47. Disconnect the detector from cable 80 (gray/black) and connect
cable 92 (white/red) from
analyzer’s A input.
IF) to the scalar network
Adjustments 3-127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
19. Second Converter Adjustments
48. Disconnect cable connected to
and connect to
IF IN). Reconnect semi-rigid cable to that was
disconnected in step 36.
49. Set the synthesized sweeper’s
for 2052.5 MHz
signal.
MHz.
Adjust
to center the
50. Adjust
and
for best
shape and
flatness at maximum amplitude of signal displayed on Scalar
network analyzer. A typical properly-adjusted
filter
response is shown in Figure 3-76 and Figure 3-77. See Figure 3-73
for location of adjustments. The
MHz.
response should be
i
i
i ii i I
Figure 3-76. Typical
(SHIFT
Figure 3-77. Typical
(SHIFT
and note amplitude of the
and note amplitude of the
signal
51.
peak. Key in (SHIFT)
signal peak.
52. Continue to key in
then
while adjusting
for maximum amplitude and the same amplitude in both
states of the Second LO
3-128 Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
19. Second Converter Adjustments
53. Repeat steps 14 through 19 to ensure that Second LO frequency
and shift are still properly adjusted.
Secon d Con ver ter
F in a l Ad ju stm en ts
54. Check the
and On the scalar network analyzer, press
cursor A and set the cursor at the -3
at the 3
points for both the
LO
Max. Press
Press
point
cursor A, cursor A, and set the cursor to the corresponding -3
point on the opposite side of the signal. The cursor should now
read 0
55. On the synthesized sweeper, press
and place the marker on
either cursor A. Press and place the marker on the cursor A
on the opposite side of the trace.
56. On the synthesized sweeper, press
and read the
shown on the ENTRY DISPLAY. Press
OFF. See
Figure 3-74 and Figure 3-75.
57. Disconnect all test equipment from HP
Spectrum Analyzer
and reconnect all cables within the instrument: cable 80
(gray/black) between and and cable 92 (white/red)
between
and
58. Connect HP
Spectrum Analyzer CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL
INPUT 2. Key in (CENTER FREQUENCY) 20 MHz, (FREQUENCY SPAN) 1
MHz, (REFERENCE
-7
SCALE LOG [ENTER
1
300
59. Key in
, (PEAK SEARCH] Key in
and note
signal amplitude as indicated by marker level CRT annotation.
60. Continue to key in then (SHIFT) while adjusting
for maximum amplitude and the same amplitude in both
states of the Second LO
61. Reinstall RF Converter in instrument. See installation procedure
in RF Section of Troubleshooting and Repair Manual, Volume 1.
Adjustments 3-129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20. 50 MH z
Volta ge-Tu n ed
Oscilla tor
Ad ju st m en t s
RF Section:
R efer en ce
All 50 MHz Voltage-Tuned Oscillator (VTO)
Frequency Span Accuracy Test
Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test
Rela ted P er for m a n ce
Test
First, the voltage reference for the Shaping network is set by
measuring the voltage required to tune the 50 MHz Oscillator to its
high limit (57.5 MHz) and then setting the reference voltage (+ 15 VR)
to that voltage.
Descr ip tion
Next, the
tuning accuracy is adjusted at both the low and high
end by setting the tune voltage to the proper levels to tune the
to its low and high end limits (42.5 MHz and 57.5 MHz). This is done
using the output of the tuning DACS from the
Frequency Control;
therefore, it is necessary that the DAC adjustments on the Frequency
Control have been performed before adjusting the 50 MHz VTO.
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
DIGITAL VOLTMETER
Figure 3-78. 50 MHz Voltage-Tuned Oscillator Adjustments Setup
Digital Voltmeter (DVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP
Equ ip m en t
P r oced u r e
1. Position Instrument on right side as shown in Figure 3-78 and
remove bottom cover. Remove All 50 MHz Voltage-Tuned
Oscillator and place on extenders.
2. Set LINE switch to ON and press
PRESET).
3-130 Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20. 50 MHz Voltage-Tuned Oscillator Adjustments
3. Connect DVM to
and ground lead to
0 Hz. If using an
DACS Accu r a cy Ch eck
4. Key in [SHIFT)
STEP
DVM,
then
DVM, note voltage
If not using an HP
indication for reference later.
5. Key in
STEP SIZE)
1023
DVM, voltage indication should typically be
If not using an HP DVM, voltage
6. If using an HP
be + 10.230
V
indication should be + 10.230
V
plus the indication
noted in step 4. If voltage is within tolerance, proceed to next
step. If voltage indication is incorrect, go to Adjustments 18,
Frequency Control Adjustments, and perform YTO and
DAC
adjustments.
7. On the HP
press MATH off.
8. Key in &ENTER FREQUENCY) 1 MHz, [FREQUENCY SPAN) 1 MHz.
P ositive Su p p ly
Ad ju st m e n t
Connect DVM to
and ground lead to Al 1 cover.
9. Key in
STEP SIZE)
12
(CRT annotation should
indicate DACS 12.)
10. Key in (SHIFT)
(CRT annotation should indicate
frequency of approximately 28.75 MHz. This corresponds
to a
frequency of 57.5 MHz, since the counter indication is
divided by two.)
11. Adjust All OFFSET
frequency of 28.750 MHz
and/or All GAIN
for
MHz as indicated by CRT
annotation. See Figure 3-79 for location of adjustment.
A l
1
J NED OS CILLATOR
Al
1
Figure 3-79. Location of 50 MHz
Adjustments
12. Note DVM indication for reference later.
13. Connect DVM to
(located on All cover).
Adjustments 3-131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20. 50 MHz Voltage-Tuned Oscillator Adjustments
14. Adjust All POS SUPPLY
for a DVM indication the same as
that noted in step 12. See Figure 3-79 for location of adjustment.
Key in
STEP SIZE]
and
High -F r equ en cy
En d Ad ju stm en t
16. Adjust All OFFSET
for VTP frequency indication 28.000
MHz
MHz.
Key in
STEP SIZE)
and
18. Adjust All GAIN
MHz MHz.
for
frequency indication of 28.750
19. Repeat steps 15 through 18 until specifications of steps 16 and 18
are achieved.
20. Key in
STEP SIZE]
Low -F r equ en cy
En d Ad ju stm en t
21. Adjust All SHAPING ATTN
for
indication of 22.000
MHz
MHz. See Figure 3-78 for location of adjustment.
22. Key in
STEP
and
for
23. Adjust All SHAPING OFFSET
indication of 21.250 MHz
frequency
MHz. See Figure 3-78 for
location of adjustment.
24. Repeat steps 21 through 23 until specifications of steps 20 and 23
are achieved.
25. Go back to step 15 and repeat both High-Frequency End and
Lo-Frequency End adjustments until specifications of both
(contained in steps 16, 18, 21, and 23 are achieved.
26. Key in
STEP SIZE) 512
and
Cen t er -F r eq u en cy
Ch eck s
27. frequency indication should be 25.00 MHz
MHz. If
it is not, and specifications of steps 16, 18, 21, and 23 are met,
a malfunction is indicated. The most likely suspects would be
varactor diodes
28. Key in
29.
and
STEP SIZE] 612
and
frequency indication should be 24.25 MHz
MHz. If
it is not, and specifications of steps 16, 18, 21, and 23 are met,
a malfunction is indicated. The most likely suspects would be
varactor diodes
and
30. Set LINE switch to STANDBY.
31. Replace Al1 50 MHz Voltage-Tuned Oscillator in instrument
without extenders and replace screws in cover.
3-132 Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 1. Slope Compensation Adjustments
21. Slop e
Com p en sa tion
Ad ju stm en ts
RF Section:
Frequency Control
R efer en ce
Frequency Response Test
Rela ted P er for m a n ce
Test
The HP
Spectrum Analyzer is swept between 10 MHz and
Descr ip tion
1500 MHz, using a synthesized sweeper which has been power-meter
leveled. The resulting response curve is displayed on the HP
Spectrum Analyzer CRT and the slope compensation (TILT) adjustment
is performed to compensate for the frequency response roll-off of the
first mixer.
SYNTHESIZED
PDWER METER
SENSOR
ADAPTER
PMR SPLITTER
Figure
Slope Compensation Adjustment Setup
Synthesized Sweeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP
Equ ip m en t
Power Meter
Power Sensor
A
A
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Splitter
HP
Opt. 001
Adapters:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type N (m) to N (m)
Type N (m) to APC 3.5 (f)
APC 3.5 (f) to APC 3.5 (f)
1250-0778
1250-1744
1250-1749
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cables:
SMA (m) (m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5061-5458
Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 1. Slope Compensation Adjustments
1. Place instrument on right side as show in Figure 3-80, and remove
P r oced u r e
bottom cover.
2. Connect equipment as shown in Figure 3-80 with power splitter
connected to the output of the synthesized sweeper with a cable.
Connect one arm of the splitter directly to the SIGNAL INPUT of
the HP
Spectrum Analyzer, using a Male-to-Male adapter,
and the other arm to the power sensor.
3. Connect the power meter’s recorder output to the HP
LEVELING EXT INPUT.
4. Press
PRESET] on the synthesized sweeper, and set its
controls to the following settings:
CW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POWER LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -9.0
RF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..on
LEVELING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INT
5. On the synthesized sweeper, press (POWER LEVEL] and adjust the
ENTRY knob as necessary for a power meter indication of -15.00
at 100 MHz.
6. On the power meter, press [RANGE HOLD] (turning it on).
7. On the synthesized sweeper, press [POWER LEVEL] and adjust the
ENTRY knob for a power meter indication of -10.00
at 100 MHz.
8. On the synthesized sweeper, press
LEVELING and adjust
the ENTRY knob (REF in
with ATN: 0 for a power meter
indication of -10.00
at 100 MHz.
Do not vary the synthesized sweeper POWER LEVEL setting
(internal leveling) or METER REF and METER ATN settings (external
power meter leveling) for the remaining steps in this section of the
adjustment procedure. The frequency response adjustments are
Not e
referenced to the -10.00
power level at 100 MHz.
9. Set the synthesized sweeper to the following settings:
START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1500 MHz
SWEEP TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SWEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SINGLE
10. Set HP
LINE switch to ON and press
PRESET].
11. Key in (START
10 MHz, 1500 MHz,
(REFERENCE LEVEL) -10
LOG CENTER
1
12. On the spectrum analyzer, press TRACE A, (CLEAR WRITE), and
13. Trigger two full sweeps on the synthesized sweeper.
3-134 Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
21. Slope Compensation Adjustments
At this sweep time, some trace discontinuities are common.
Note
Note
14. Adjust
TILT for best flatness (clockwise rotation increases
the power slope), and trigger two sweeps on the synthesized
sweeper. See Figure 3-81 for the location of
the resultant trace with the specification. Continue adjusting
until best flatness is achieved.
Compare
Best flatness is achieved when the maximum number of frequency
points are on or near the -14
reference.
FREOUENCY CONTROL
I
T I L T
Figure 3-81. Location of
15. Press TRACE A,
Adjustment
[PEAK SEARCH], and [MARKER DELTA). Using
the data knob, place the marker on the lowest power peak. The
marker’s absolute value should be less than 2
16. See Figure 3-82 for examples of typical displays of frequency
response correctly and incorrectly adjusted.
FREQUENCY RE
PROPERLY
L I MI T S
TED
Figure 3-82. Slope Compensation Adjustment Waveforms
Adjustments 3-135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22. Com b
Gen er a tor
Ad ju stm en ts
RF Section:
RF Converter
R efer en ce
20 MHz Reference
The output of the Pilot First Converter is connected to the signal
input of the Second Converter. This allows the comb teeth from the
Comb Generator to be displayed on the CRT display. The
Descr ip tion
phase lock flags are disabled, using a shift key function to prevent the
instrument from “locking up” due to the phase lock loops being open.
A display line is placed on the CRT at the level to which the comb
teeth are to be adjusted. the comb teeth are adjusted for best overall
flatness and to the proper amplitude.
COMB DRIVE
IRATOR
COMB
I
\
HF PEAK
C o v e r )
COMB BIAS
COMB PEAK
Figure 3-83. Location of Comb Generator Adjustments
3-136 Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22. Comb Generator Adjustments
Cable, SMA (m) to SMA (m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 85680-20094
Equ ip m en t
Set instrument LINE switch to ON and press
Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2.
PRESET).
P r oced u r e 1.
2.
3.
Key in
FREQUENCY) 20 MHz, [FREQUENCY SPAN] 100
LOG [ENTER
0
2
4. Adjust front-panel AMPTD CAL for signal peak at top graticule
line (-10
5. Press
6.
Key in
7. Position instrument on right side and remove bottom cover.
8. Disconnect cables from (PILOT IF OUT) and
This disables phase lock flags.
IF IN) and connect a short, low-loss coaxial cable with SMA
male connectors ( do not use adapters) between and
Use coaxial cable, HP Part Number 85680-20094. If not
available, remove
FILTER and use between
and
to adjust comb generator.
9. Key in (START
40 MHz. Wait for CRT annotation at lower
left of CRT display to indicate START 40 MHz.
10. Key in 1560 MHz. Wait for CRT annotation at lower
right of CRT display to indicate STOP 1560 MHz.
11. Key in [REFERENCE LEVEL] -20
0
LOG
(ENTER
2
DISPLAY LINE
-30
12.
Adjust
COMB DRIVE
for peak amplitude of CRT
trace until comb teeth begin to “wiggle.” Then adjust COMB
DRIVE slightly counterclockwise until the lowest comb
tooth (near START frequency) just begins to fall. See Figure 3-84
for a typical comb tooth display. See Figure 3-83 for location of
adjustments.
UP P E R LIMIT
DIS P LAY LINE
A T - 3 0
LO WE R LIMIT
-
3
6
Figure 3-84. Comb
Display
13. Adjust COMB BIAS
for peak amplitude of CRT trace
until comb teeth begin to “wiggle. Then adjust COMB BIAS
slightly counterclockwise until the lowest comb tooth
(near START) frequency) just begins to fall. See Figure 3-84 for
Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22. Comb Generator Adjustments
a typical comb tooth display. See Figure 3-83 for location of
adjustments.
14. The majority of the comb teeth should be above the -30
Display Line. No comb teeth should exceed -22
comb teeth should be less than -36
and no
15. If unable to adjust comb teeth as described in previous steps,
proceed with the next step. If comb teeth are adjusted properly,
do not perform the adjustments in the following steps. Skip to
step 21.
16. Adjust
COMB PEAK
for maximum amplitude of
comb teeth. See Figure 3-83 for location of adjustment.
17. If the highest-frequency comb tooth is too low
remove screws from cover of
Comb Generator and lift
cover from housing, being careful not to break wire connections
to internal circuit. It will be necessary to hold cover away from
housing while performing the following adjustment.
18. Adjust
HF PEAK
for maximum amplitude of the
highest-frequency comb tooth displayed ( comb tooth to far right
of CRT). See Figure 3-84 for location of adjustment.
19. Replace cover on
20. Go back to step 12 and proceed with adjustments.
21. Remove cable from between and
and install screws.
1 and
reconnect instrument cables to connectors from which they were
removed.
3-138 Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
23. Analog-To-Digital Converter Adjustments
23.
An a log-To-Digita l
Con ver ter
Ad ju st m en t s
Analog-to-Digital Converter
R efer en ce
Descr ip tion
The Analog-to-Digital Ramp Converter is adjusted at zero and
full-scale by injecting a 0 V dc input and + 10 V dc input and adjusting
the OFFS and GAIN controls until the ramp output at
toggles high to low. This sets the horizontal end points for the CRT
trace display; when the sweep ramp input is at 0 V dc (the left
graticule edge), trace position 1 is set, and when the sweep ramp
input is at + 10 V
(the right graticule edge), trace position 1000 is
set.
This procedure requires a + 10 V dc source which is stable and
noise-free. A simple supply circuit which can be built with common
components is illustrated in Figure 3-93. If these components are
unavailable, the alternate procedure provided below (using only the
digital voltmeter) can then be used.
. 1-’
HP
OSCILLOSCOPE
DIGITAL VOLTKTER
Figure 3-85. Analog-To-Digital Converter Adjustments Setup
................................................. HP 54501
Oscilloscope
Equ ip m en t
...........................................
HP
Digital Voltmeter
.....................
See Figure 3-93
Low-Noise DC Supply (Optional)
Adjustments 3-139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
23. Analog-To-Digital Converter Adjustments
1. Position instrument upright as shown in Figure 3-85 and remove
P r oced u r e
top cover.
2. Set LINE switch to ON and press
PRESET).
3. Procedure using Low-Noise DC Supply is illustrated in Figure 3-93.
a. Key in TRACE A and SWEEP
b. Disconnect cable 0 (black) from sweep ramp input
c. Short to or connect SMB snap-on short to
Sta n d a r d P r oced u r e
1.
d. Connect the oscilloscope’s
the probe’s ground to the
probe to
section’s card cage.
and ground
e. Set the oscilloscope settings as follows:
amplitude scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . 0.1
time scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
f. Adjust
OFFS for a square wave displayed on the
oscilloscope. The square wave should be approximately 4 Vp-p.
See Figure 3-86 for location of adjustment.
ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER
( B e n e a t h C o v e r )
GAIN
OFFS
Figure 3-86.
Location of Analog-To-Digital Converter Adjustments
g. Remove short from
and
or disconnect the
SMB snap-on short from
h. Press
PRESET).
i. Press MARKER
1498 (MHz), and
and ground to
j. Connect DVM to
for V
Set DVM
k. Connect output of the Low-Noise DC Supply to
Adjust
the Low-Noise DC Supply for DVM indication of + 10.000
dc.
Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
23. Analog-To-Digital Converter Adjustments
1. Adjust
GAIN for a square wave displayed on the
oscilloscope. The square wave should be approximately 4
See Figure 3-86 for location of adjustment.
4. Procedure without using Low-Noise DC Supply:
a. Press
Alter n a te P r oced u r e
b. Key in TRACE A
c. Disconnect cable 0 (black) from sweep ramp input
d. Short to or connect SMB snap-on short to
and SWEEP (SINGLE).
e. Connect DVM to
and ground to
OFFS until the level at
Set DVM
is at a
for V ac.
f. Adjust
maximum ac voltage as indicated by the DVM (approximately
2.0 V ac). See Figure 3-86 for location of adjustment.
g. Remove short from
and
Reconnect cable 0
Set DVM
(black) to
1.
h. Press
PRESET].
i. Connect DVM to
for V dc.
and ground to
j. Press SWEEP
Note DVM reading at end of the sweep.
The voltage will begin to drift immediately after the sweep
ends. Therefore, the first indication after the sweep ends is the
valid indication. It may be helpful to press
several times
to ensure a valid indication at the end of the sweep.
k. If DVM indication is 10.020
V dc at the end of the
sweep, no further adjustment is necessary. Otherwise, adjust
GAIN and repeat step j until the voltage at the end of
the sweep is + 10.020
V dc.
Adjustments 3-141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24. Tr a ck a n d Hold
Ad ju stm en ts
Track and Hold
R efer en ce
The CAL OUTPUT signal is connected to the RF INPUT. The
instrument is placed in zero frequency span to produce a dc level
output from the IF-Video section and this dc level is regulated by
adjusting the reference level. The Offsets and Gains on the Track and
Hold assembly are adjusted for proper levels using a DVM.
De scr ip t ion
SPECTRUM
ANALYZER
DIGITAL
Figure 3-87. Track and Hold Adjustments Setup
Digital Voltmeter (DVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP
Equ ip m en t
P r oced u r e
1. Place instrument upright as shown in Figure 3-87 with top and
Digital Storage covers removed.
2. Set LINE switch to ON and press (INSTR PRESET].
3. Connect CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT.
4. Connect DVM to
and ground to
5. Key in
FREQUENCY) 20 MHz,
SPAN] 0 Hz.
6. Disconnect cable 7 (violet) from
7. Short
to
or use an SMB snap-on short to
DVM indication should be 0.000
V
8. Key in
TRACE A (CLEAR-WRITE], MARKER
MARKER
SWEEP
TRACE A
9. Adjust
(T/H) OFS until MARKER level indication as
indicated by CRT annotation flickers back and forth between .OO
and See Figure 3-88 for location of adjustment.
3-142 Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24. Track and Hold Adjustments
AS
ES
CAL ADJ
I
‘LER MATCH
CAL OUTP UT
Figure 3-88. Location of Track and Hold Adjustments
10. Key in
11. Adjust
TRACE A
OFFS POS until MARKER A level indication as
indicated by CRT annotation flickers back and forth between .OO
and
12. Key in
13. Adjust
TRACE A
OFS NEG until MARKER A level indication as
indicated by CRT annotation flickers back and forth between .OO
and . 10
14. Key in
TRACE A
15. Remove short from between
the SMB short from
and
or remove
Reconnect cable 7 (violet) to
16. Connect the DVM to
section’s casting.
Connect
ground to the IF
17. Press [REFERENCE LEVEL] and adjust DATA knob and front-panel
AMPTD CAL adjust for a DVM indication of
at
V dc
18. Disconnect DVM from instrument.
19. Key in
TRACE A (CLEAR-WRITE], MARKER
MARKER In], SWEEP
20. Adjust
T/H GAIN for GAIN for MARKER A level
indication as indicated by CRT annotation of 100
2 1.
Key in
TRACE A
GPOS for MARKER A level indication as
22. Adjust
indicated by CRT annotation of 100 fO.l
23. Key in [SHIFT) TRACE A (VIEW)
Adjustments 3-143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24. Track and Hold Adjustments
24. Adjust
GNEG for MARKER A level indication as
indicated by CRT annotation of 100
25. Repeat steps 4 through 24 until no further adjustments are
required.
3-144 Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
25. Digital Storage Display Adjustments
25. Digita l Stor a ge
Disp la y
Ad ju stm en ts
1 Trigger
Intensity Control
Line Generator
R efer en ce
First, preliminary CRT graticule adjustments are performed to position
the graticule on the CRT. These preliminary adjustments assume that
repair has been performed on the associated circuitry. If no repair
has been performed on the assemblies listed under REFERENCE, the
preliminary adjustments are not necessary.
De scr ip t ion
Next, the Sample and Hold Balance adjustments are performed. The
horizontal and vertical Offset and Gain adjustments are performed,
then the final CRT graticule adjustments are performed.
Last, the CRT annotation adjustments are performed to place the CRT
annotation in proper location with respect to the CRT graticule.
DIGITAL VOLTMETER
Figure 3-89. Digital Storage Display Adjustments Setup
Digital Voltmeter (DVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP
Equ ip m en t
P r oced u r e
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP
Digitizing Oscilloscope
1. Place instrument upright as shown in Figure 3-89 with top and
Digital Storage cover removed.
2. Set LINE switch to ON and press
PRESET]
3. Press TRACE A
P r elim in a r y Gr a ticu le
Ad ju st m e n t s
4. Adjust
X GAIN and
Y GAIN to place graticule
information completely on CRT. See Figure 3-90 for location of
adjustment.
Adjustments 3-145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Digital
25.
Storage Display Adjustments
LINE
GENERATOR
INTENS ITY
CONTROL
TRIGGER
S WP OFFS ET
X
H
Y
H BAL
Figure 3-90. Location of Digital Storage Display Adjustments
5. Adjust
LL THRESH fully clockwise. See Figure 3-90 for
location of adjustment.
6. Adjust XLL so that horizontal graticule lines just meet
the vertical graticule lines at the left and right sides of the
graticule. See Figure 3-90 for location of adjustment.
7. Adjust
YLL so that vertical graticule lines just meet the
horizontal graticule lines at the top and bottom of the graticule.
See Figure 3-90 for location of adjustment.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until horizontal and vertical lines are
adjusted so that they meet the edges of the graticule but do not
overshoot.
9. Adjust
LL THRESH fully counterclockwise.
10. Adjust
XSL so that horizontal graticule lines just meet the
vertical graticule lines at the left and right sides of the graticule.
11. Adjust
YSL so that the vertical graticule lines just
meet the horizontal graticule lines at the top and bottom of the
graticule.
12. Repeat steps 10 and 11 until horizontal and vertical graticule lines
are adjusted so that they meet at the edges of the graticule but do
not overshoot.
3-146 Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
25. Digital Storage Display Adjustments
13. Set LINE switch to STANDBY.
14. Place Line Generator on extender boards.
15. Set LINE switch to ON. Press
16. Key in (RECORDER LOWER LEFT) 0 [Hz). Press
(RECORDER UPPER RIGHT) 1028
17. Connect oscilloscope to
18. Connect to oscilloscope External Trigger Input and
adjust oscilloscope controls for display as shown in Figure 3-91.
19. Adjust X S&H BAL for minimum offset between the
Sa m p le a n d Hold
Ba la n ce Ad ju stm en ts
PRESET].
level of the signal inside the two pulses to the signal level outside
the two pulses. Figure 3-91 shows a properly adjusted waveform.
Figure 3-92 shows the waveform before adjustment. Refer to
Figure 3-90 for location of adjustment.
50.0
1
0 . 0 0 0
V
10.00
2 . 1 0 0 0 0
5
0
0
Figure 3-91. Sample and Hold Balance Adjustment Waveforms
5 0 . 0
1
0 . 0 0 0
1
v
dc
10.00
2 . 1 0 0 0 0
- 4 0 0 . 0 0 0
- 2 . 9 0 0 0 0
5
0
0
Figure 3-92. Waveform Before Adjustment
Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
25. Digital Storage Display Adjustments
20. Connect oscilloscope to
21. Adjust Y S&H BAL for minimum dc offset between the
level of the signal inside the two pulses to the signal level outside
the two pulses.
Set LINE switch to STANDBY.
22.
23.
Reinstall
boards.
Line Generator in instrument without extender
24. Set LINE switch to ON.
Press
X a n d Y Offset a n d
Ga in Ad ju stm en ts
25.
Key in [FREQUENCY SPAN] 0 Hz, [SWEEP TIME) 100
27. Disconnect cable 9 (white) from
test connector on
and connect to
Intensity Control; the other end of
the cable remains connect connected to
Select TRIGGER and adjust front-panel LEVEL control for
a stable display on instrument CRT.
29. Adjust SWP OFFSET so that the signal trace begins at
1.
28.
the left edge graticule line. Refer to Figure 3-90 for location of
adjustment.
Adjust
X GAIN for twenty cycles displayed on the
30.
CRT graticule. This may be made easier by adjusting
SWP OFFSET so that the first peak is centered on the left edge
graticule line, then adjusting
per division with the twentieth cycle being centered on the
right edge graticule line. SWP OFFSET must then be
X GAIN for two cycles
readjusted so that the trace begins at the left edge graticule line.
See Figure 3-90. for location of adjustment.
Remove the cable 9 (white) from
and reconnect to
test connector
to
31.
32.
Remove cable 7 (violet) from
Short
or connect an SMB snap-on short to
Connect DVM to and DVM ground to
33.
34.
35.
36.
Press LIN pushbutton.
DVM indication should be 0.000
Adjust YOS to align the bottom graticule line with the
V dc.
fast sweep signal trace.
Remove the short between
and
(or the SMB
37.
snap-on short) and reconnect cable 7 (violet) to
38. Key in [CENTER FREQUENCY) 20 MHz. Connect CAL OUTPUT to RF
INPUT. Press LOG (ENTER
10
Connect the DVM to
casting.
and the DVM ground to the IF
39.
Press [REFERENCE LEVEL) and adjust DATA knob and the frontpanel
40.
AMPTD CAL adjust for DVM indication of
50.002 V dc.
Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
25. Digital Storage Display Adjustments
41. Adjust
Y GAIN to align the top graticule line with the
fast sweep signal trace.
42. Press
43. Set
PRESET], TRACE A
F in a l Gr a ticu le
Ad ju st m e n t s
LL THRESH fully clockwise.
44. Adjust
XLL and
YLL to align horizontal and
vertical lines so that each line meets the edge line (right, left, top,
or bottom) but does not overshoot.
45. Adjust
LL THRESH fully counterclockwise.
46. Adjust
XSL and YSL to align horizontal and
vertical graticule lines so that each line meets the edge line (right,
left, top, or bottom) but does not overshoot.
47. Adjust
LL THRESH clockwise until all graticule lines
switch over to long lines. This is indicated by a noticeable
increase in graticule line intensity. (All graticule lines should
increase in intensity.)
48. Press
49. Key in MARKER
50. Adjust X EXP to center the letter “F” in “REF” (CRT
PRESET).
X a n d Y Exp a n d
Ad ju st m e n t s
annotation in upper left corner of display) over the left edge
graticule line.
51. Adjust
Y EXP to align the remainder of the CRT
annotation so that the upper annotation (MARKER data) is above
the top graticule line and the lower annotation (START and STOP
data) is below the bottom graticule line. Adjust for equal spacing
above and below the graticule pattern.
Adjustments 3-149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Low-Noise DC Supply shown in Figure 3-93 can be constructed
using the parts listed in 3-7.
Low -Noise DC
OUTP UT
o
r
V d c
Figure 3-93. Low-Noise DC Supply
3-7. Parts for Low-Noise DC Supply
Reference/Designation HP Fart Number
Description
CAPACITOR FXD
CD
9
Cl
J l
0160-2055
1250-0083
0698-0083
0757-0442
0757-0442
0757-0465
0757-0290
2
1
CONNECTOR BNC
RESISTOR FXD
RESISTOR FXD
RESISTOR FXD
RESISTOR FXD
1%
8
9
9
6
5
6
3
1%
1%
1%
RESISTOR FXD 6.19 K 1%
RESISTOR VARIABLE
20%
RESISTOR FXD
RESISTOR FXD
1%
1%
0757-0280
0757-0280
3101-1792
1826-0092
1902-0049
1902-0049
3
8
SWITCH TOGGLE, S-POSITION
IC DUAL OP-AMP
3
2
DIODE BREAKDOWN
2
RESISTOR FXD
1%
Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Crystal Filter Bypass Network Configuration
The Crystal Filter Bypass Network Configuration shown in Figure 3-94
Cr ysta l F ilter
Byp a ss Netw or k
Con figu r a tion
can be constructed using the parts listed in
3-8 list the parts required for the construction of 21.4 MHz
IF crystal-filter bypass networks used with the and
3-8 and Table 3-9.
assemblies. Two 21.4 MHz bypass networks are required. Table 3-9
list the parts required for the construction of 3 MHz IF crystal-filter
bypass networks used with the
networks are required.
assembly. Four 3 MHz bypass
21.4 MHz
BYPASS
3 MHz
BYPASS
CAPACITOR
CAPACITOR
Figure 3-94. Crystal Filter Bypass Network Configurations
3-8.
Crystal Filter Bypass Network Configuration for
and
(21.4 MHz)
Value Qty. CD HP Part Number
Part
Resistor
31.662
2
2
2
4
2
9
9
1
0698-7200
0160-4801
0160-6146
1251-3720
Capacitor 100
Capacitor 910
Receptacle
3-9.
Crystal Filter Bypass Network Configuration for
(3 MHz)
Value Qty. CD
Part Number I
0683-0275
Resistor
2.70
4
4
8
4
9
1
Capacitor 0.047
Receptacle
0170-0040
1251-3720
Adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Opt ion 4 6 2
This chapter contains modified performance tests and adjustment
procedures for Option 462 instruments. When working on Option
462 instruments, substitute the procedures in this chapter for the
standard versions contained in chapters two and three. For earlier
In tr od u ction
Option 462 instruments (HP
serial prefixes below
in
which impulse bandwidths are specified, use the tests and adjustment
under “Impulse Bandwidths” .The procedures included in this chapter
are listed below:
6
Bandwidths:
Performance Tests
Test 4, 6
Test 5, 6
Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test . . . 4-2
Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test
Adjustment Procedure
A d j u s t m e n t 9 , 6
B a n d w i d t h A d j u s t m e n t s . 4 - 2 3
Impulse Bandwidths:
Performance Tests
4-4
4-13
Test 4, Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test
Test 5, Impulse and Resolution Selectivity Test
Test 6, Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Switching
Uncertainty
Test
.
.
.
Adjustment Procedure
4-26
Adjustment 9, Impulse Bandwidth Adjustments..
Option 462
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. 6
Resolu tion
Ba n d w id th
Accu r a cy Test
6
Bandwidth Adjustments
Rela ted Ad ju stm en t
Sp ecifica tion
3 MHz bandwidth
30 Hz to 1 MHz bandwidths
-0%, 10 Hz bandwidth
+
30
and 100
bandwidth accuracy figures only applicable
C.
Relative Humidity,
The 6
bandwidth for each resolution bandwidth setting is
Descr ip tion
measured with the MARKER function to determine bandwidth
accuracy. The CAL OUTPUT is used for a stable signal source.
None required
Equ ip m en t
P r oced u r e
1. Press
PRESET).
2. Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2.
3. Key in spectrum analyzer settings as follows:
[CENTER FREQUENCY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MHZ
NCY SPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MHz
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 MHz
[REFERENCE LEVEL] .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -10
4. Press SCALE LIN pushbutton. Press
bandwidth) for units in
(resolution
5. Adjust [REFERENCE LEVEL) to position peak of signal trace at (or just
below) reference level (top) graticule line. Press SWEEP (SINGLE_).
6. Press MARKER [NORMAL) and place marker at peak of signal trace
with DATA knob. Press MARKER
down from the stationary marker on the positive-going edge
of the signal trace (the MARKER A amplitude readout should be
-6.00 It may be necessary to press SWEEP
and position movable marker
6
and adjust [CENTER FREQUENCY] to center trace on screen.
7. Press MARKER
from the signal peak on the negative-going edge of the trace (the
MARKER Aamplitude readout should be .OO The 6
bandwidth is given by the MARKER A frequency readout. (See
Figure 1.) Record this value in Table 1.
and position movable marker 6
down
Option 462
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Impulse and
Resolution
Bandwidth
Accuracy
Impulse Bandwidth Adjustments
3 MHz bandwidth
Relat ed Adju st m en t
Specificat ion
1 MHz to 1
bandwidths
-0,
300 Hz to 10 Hz (6
bandwidths)
A frequency synthesizer and pulse/function generator are used
to input pulses to the spectrum analyzer. The amplitude of the
pulses is measured, and the impulse bandwidths are calculated for
De s c rip t ion
each impulse bandwidth from 3 MHz to 1
The 6
resolution
bandwidths are then measured using the spectrum analyzer
function. The CAL OUTPUT signal is used as a stable signal source to
measure the 6
resolution bandwidths.
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
PULSE/FUNCTION
GENERATOR
SYNTHESIZER
LEVEL GENERATOR
.
.
L
J
Figure 4-2. Impulse Bandwidth
Setup
Frequency Synthesizer ..................................... HP
Pulse/Function Generator .................................. HP
Equ ipm en t
Procedu re
1. Set the frequency synthesizer for a 15 MHz, + 13
Connect the output of the frequency synthesizer to the EXT
INPUT of the pulse/function generator.
output.
2. Set the pulse/function generator controls as follows:
MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRIG
EXT INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . positive-going
EXT INPUT LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . midrange
OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pulse
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .OV
HIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WIDTH (WID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 ns
DISABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . off
4-4 Option 462
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy
17.
to 30
On the
Set the frequency synthesizer
SWEEP TIME]
spectrum analyzer key in [FREQUENCY
RKER (PEAK SEARCH). Record
MA
0.5 seconds, SWEEP
-2.
4
MARKER amplitude in
18.
Calculate the Impulse BW of the 300
in step 8. Record in 4-2.
filter using the formula
19. Set the frequency synthesizer (FREQUENCY] to 1 MHz. Set the
pulse/function generator WID to 100 ns.
20. On the spectrum analyzer key in:
100
(i),
400
1 MHz, [CENTER FREQUENCY) 1 MHz,
SWEEP TIME
SWEEP
MARKER [PEAK SEARCH].
Record MARKER amplitude in
4-2.
21. Set the frequency synthesizer [FREQUENCY] to 10
On the
spectrum analyzer, key in: [FREQUENCY SPAN) 0 Hz, (SWEEP TIME]
0.5 seconds, SWEEP
MARKER [PEAK SEARCH). Record
MARKER amplitude in Table 4-2.
22. Calculate the Impulse BW of the 100
in step 8. Record in 4-2.
filter using the formula
23. Set the frequency synthesizer (FREQUENCY] to 300
Set the
pulse/function generator WID to 333 ns.
24.
On the spectrum analyzer, key in:
30
(i),
300
SWEEP TIME
FREQUENCY) 300
[FREQUENCY
120
SEARCH).
SWEEP
MARKER,
Record MARKER amplitude in Table 4-2.
25. Set the frequency synthesizer
to 3
On the
spectrum analyzer, key in: (FREQUENCY SPAN] 0 Hz,
TIME)
0.5 seconds, SWEEP
MARKER (PEAK SEARCH]. Record
MARKER amplitude in Table 4-2.
26. Calculate the Impulse BW of the 30
step 8. Record in Table 4-2.
filter using the formula in
27. Set the frequency synthesizer [FREQUENCY) to 100
Set the
pulse/function generator WID to 1
z (i),
28. On the spectrum analyzer key in
10
SPAN) 40
EEP (SINGLE), MARKER [PEAK SEARCH).
100
SWEEP TIME
FREQUENCY] 100
SW:
de in
4-2.
Record MARKER amplituc
Set the frequency synthesizer
spectrum analyzer key in: (FREQUENCY
0.5 seconds, SWEEP
1
On the
29.
0 Hz, [SWEEP TIME]
SEARCH). Record
KER
MAR
MARKER amplitude in Table
Calculate the Impulse BW of the 10
step 8. Record in 4-2.
filter using the formula in
30.
31. Set the frequency synthesizer [FREQUENCY) to 30
Set the
pulse/function generator WID to 3.33
32. On the spectrum analyzer key in:
30
3
(i),
(CENTER FREQUENCY) 30
[FREQUENCY SPAN) 12
Option 462
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test
6
resolution bandwidth measurements are used in Performance
Not e
Test 5, Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test.
A
Figure 4-3. 6
Resolution Bandwidth Measurement
46. Select the spectrum analyzer
and
4-3. Press SWEEP
bandwidth for each resolution bandwidth
SPAN)
settings according to
measure the 6
and
setting using the procedure of steps 43 through 45 and record the
value in 4-3. The measured bandwidths for 300 Hz, 100
Hz, 30 Hz, and 10 Hz should fall between the limits shown in the
table.
4-2. Impulse Bandwidth Accuracy
Marker Readouts for:
Calculated
Minimum
Bandwidth
Maximum
1
Frequency
Low Frequency
Actual
Repetition Rate
R
epetition Rate
3
MHz (i)
3
3
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
2.40 MHz
900
3.60 MHz
1.1 MHz
330
1 MHz (i)
3
300
(i)
(i)
(i)
(i)
(i)
(i)
270
100
30
10
3
1
110
90
27
300
100
30
10
33
9
11
2.7
3.3
1
1.1
900 Hz
4-8 Option 462
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy
4-3. 6
Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy
Res
BW
1
Frequency
MARKER A Readout of 6
Bandwidth
Span
1
Minimum
Actual
Maximum
T
3
MHz (i)
5
2
MHz
MHz
1 MHz (i)
(i)
(i)
500
200
50
20
5
30
(i)
(i)
(i)
(i)
10
3
1
2
300 Hz (i)
100 Hz (i)
30 Hz (i)
10 Hz (i)
300 Hz
100 Hz
30 Hz
10 Hz
450 Hz
150 Hz
45 Hz
15 Hz
Option 462 4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. 6
Resolution
Bandwidth
Selectivity Test
3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments
21.4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments
Step Gain and 18.4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments
Relat ed Adju st m en t s
Specificat ion
60
bandwidth ratio:
MHz to 100
1, 3
bandwidths
1, 30
to 30 Hz bandwidths
60
points on 10 Hz bandwidth are separated by
Hz
Bandwidth selectivity is found by measuring the 60
and dividing this value by the 6
bandwidth setting from 30 Hz to 3 MHz. The 60
bandwidth
bandwidth for each resolution
Descript ion
points for the 10
Hz bandwidth setting are also measured. The CAL OUTPUT provides
a stable signal for the measurements.
None required
Equ ipm en t
Not e
Performance Test 4, 6
be performed before starting this test.
Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test, must
1. Press
Procedu re
2. Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2.
3. Key in analyzer control settings as follows:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[CENTER FREQUENCY)
NCY SPAN]
MHz
20 MHz
MHz
...................................................
.................................................
100 Hz
SWEEP
4. Press MARKER
and position marker at peak of signal
and position movable marker 60
trace. Press MARKER
down from the stationary marker on the positive-going edge of
the signal trace (the MARKER A amplitude readout should be
-60.00
and adjust
It may be necessary to press SWEEP
FREQUENCY_) so that both 60 points are
displayed. (See Figure 4-4.)
5. Press MARKER and position movable marker 60
down from
the signal peak on the negative-going edge of the signal trace (the
MARKER A amplitude readout should be .OO
6. Read the 60
setting from the MARKER A frequency readout (Figure 4-4) and
record the value in 4-4.
bandwidth for the 3 MHz resolution bandwidth
4-10 Option 462
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. 6
Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity
7.
Vary spectrum analyzer settings according to Table 4-4. Press
SWEEP and measure the 60 bandwidth for each
resolution bandwidth setting by the procedure of steps 4 through
6. Record the value in 4-4.
8.
9.
Record the 6
bandwidths from Table
in
4-4.
Calculate the bandwidth selectivity for each setting by dividing
the 60 bandwidth by the 6 bandwidth. The bandwidth
ratios should be less than the maximum values shown in
4-4.
10. The 60
bandwidth for the 10 Hz resolution bandwidth setting
should be less than 100 Hz.
Figure 4-4. 60
Bandwidth Measurement
Option 462
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. 6
Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test
4-4. 6
Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity
Maximum
Selectivity Selectivity Ratio
BW
Measured Measured Bandwidth
Spectrum Analyzer
r
6
60
Bandwidth
6
BW)
3 MHz
1 MHz
100 Hz
300 Hz
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
20 MHz
15 MHz
5 MHz
2 MHz
500
30
10
200
3
50
10
1
5
300 Hz
100 Hz
30 Hz
10 Hz
2
500 Hz
100 HZ
60
points separated by
Hz
4-12 Option 462
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity
0 . 0
- 0 .
10
Figure 4-5. 60
Bandwidth Measurement
4. Press MARKER In] and position the positive movable marker 60
down from the signal peak on the negative-going edge of the signal
trace (the MARKER
amplitude readout should be 0.00
5. Read the 60
bandwidth for the 3 MHz resolution bandwidth
frequency readout (see Figure 4-5)
setting from the MARKER
and record the value in Table 4-5.
6. Select the spectrum analyzer
SPAN), and
according to
for each resolution bandwidth setting by the procedure of steps 3
through 5 and record the value in 4-5.
4-5. Measure the 60
bandwidth
7. Record the 6
from 4-3 in
bandwidths for each resolution bandwidth setting
4-5.
8. Calculate the bandwidth selectivity for each setting by dividing the
60 bandwidth by the 6 bandwidth. The bandwidth ratios
should be less than the maximum values shown in 4-5.
9. The 60 bandwidth for the 10 Hz resolution bandwidth setting
should be less than 100 Hz.
Option 462
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test
4-5. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity
Measured Measured Bandwidth Maximum
60 Selectivity
Bandwidth Bandwidth (60
Spectrum Analyzer
Res
6
BW
Ratio
BW
Span
6
BW)
3 MHz (i)
1 MHz (i)
20 MHz 100 Hz
15 MHz 300 Hz
5 MHz AUTO
2 MHz AUTO
300
(i)
(i)
(i)
(i)
(i)
(i)
100
30
10
3
500
200
50
10
5
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
1
300 Hz (i)
100 Hz (i)
30 Hz (i)
2
500 Hz AUTO
100 Hz AUTO
60
points separated by
Hz
10 Hz (i)
Option 462
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Impulse and
Resolution
Bandwidth
Switching
Uncertainty
3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments
21.4 Bandwidth Filter Adjustments
Down/Up Converter Adjustments
Relat ed Adju st m en t
10 Hz bandwidth
30 Hz bandwidth
Specificat ion
100 Hz to 1 MHz bandwidth
1 .O
30
applicable
3 MHz bandwidth
and 100 bandwidth switching uncertainty figures only
Relative Humidity.
The CAL OUTPUT signal is applied to the input of the spectrum
analyzer. The deviation in peak amplitude of the signal trace is then
measured as each resolution bandwidth filter is switched in.
De s c rip t ion
None required
Equ ipm en t
Procedu re
1. Press
Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2.
Key in the following control settings:
(CENTER FREQUENCY]
2.
3.
MHz
MHz
5
8
1
S P A N )
.
. -
MHz
Press LOG [ENTER
(PEAK SEARCH)
and key in 1
Press MARKER
4.
5.
Key in settings according to
4-6. Press MARKER
[PEAK SEARCH) at each setting, then read the amplitude deviation
from the MARKER
(see Figure
readout at the upper right of the display
allowable deviation for each resolution
bandwidth setting is shown in the table.
Option 462
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty
A
I I I I I I I
M A R
0
\
Figure 4-6. Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Measurement
4-6. Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty
Allowable
Deviation
Res
BW
Frequency
Span
Deviation
(MKR A
Readout,
1 MHz (i)
3 MHz (i)
5 MHz
5 MHz
5 MHz
500
0 (ref.)
0 (ref.)
1.0
0.5
300
(i)
(i)
(i)
(i)
(i)
(i)
0.5
100
30
10
3
0.5
500
50
0.5
0.5
50
1
10
0.5
0.5
1
300 Hz (i)
100 Hz (i)
30 Hz (i)
10 Hz (i)
1
0.5
0.8
200 Hz
100 Hz
2.0
Option 462 4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test 4. 6
Resolution
Bandwidth
Accuracy
2-19,
(p/o
Performance Test
Record)
Step 8. 6
Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy
FREQUENCY SPAN)
Readout of 3
Actual
Bandwidth
Max
Min
2.400 MHz
3.600 MHz
1.100 MHz
330.0
2 MHz
270.0
90.0
110.0
27.00
9.00
33.00
11.00
2.700
3.300
2
1.100
330 Hz
33.0 Hz
15.0 Hz
27.0 Hz
10.0 Hz
4-18 Option 462
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test 4. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test (p/o
2-19, Performance
Record)
Test 4. Impulse
and Resolution
Bandwidth
Accuracy Test (p/o
2-19,
Performance Test
Record)
Steps 1 through 38. Impulse Bandwidth Accuracy
Calculated Impulse Bandwidth
Minimum Actual Maximum
Marker Readouts for:
High Frequency Low Frequency
Repetition Rate Repetition Rate
3
1
MHz (i)
3
3
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
2.40 MHz
900
3.60 MHz
1.1 MHz
330
MHz (i)
270
3
300
100
30
10
3
(i)
(i)
(i)
(i)
(i)
(i)
110
1
90
33
27
300
100
30
10
9
11
3.3
2.7
1.1
900 Hz
1
Option 462 4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test (p/o
Steps 39 through 46. 6
2-19, Performance Test Record)
Resolution Bandwidth
Accuracy
Res
BW
5
2
MHz
MHz
3
1
MHz (i)
MHz (i)
300
(i)
(i)
(i)
(i)
(i)
(i)
500
200
50
20
5
30
10
3
1
2
450 Hz
150 Hz
45 Hz
15 Hz
300 Hz (i)
100 Hz (i)
30 Hz (i)
10 Hz (i)
500 Hz
200 Hz
100 Hz
100 Hz
300 Hz
100 Hz
30 Hz
10 Hz
4-20 Option 462
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test 5. 6
Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity (p/o
2-19, Performance
Record)
Test 5. 6
Resolution
Bandwidth
Selectivity (p/o
2-19,
Performance
Record)
Step 9. 6
Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity
Maximum
Spectrum Analyzer
Measured Bandwidth
Selectivity Selectivity Ratio
Measured
60
Bandwidth
6
( F R E Q U E N C Y S P A N ] [ V I D E O ]
Bandwidth (60
BW
6
BW)
3 MHz
1 MHz
20 MHz
100 Hz
15 MHz 300 Hz
5 MHz
2 MHz
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
300
100
30
10
3
500
200
50
10
5
1
300 Hz
2
100 Hz
30 Hz
10 Hz
500 Hz
100 HZ
60
points separated by
Hz
Option 462 4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test 5. Impulse
and Resolution
Bandwidth
Selectivity (p/o
2-19,
Performance
Record)
Steps 5 through 9. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth
Selectivity
Measured Measured Bandwidth Maximum
Selectivity Selectivity
Spectrum Analyzer
60
Bandwidth Bandwidth (60
Res
BW
BW
Ratio
3
MHz (i)
20 MHz 100 Hz
15 MHz 300 Hz
5 MHz AUTO
2 MHz AUTO
1 MHz (i)
300
(i)
(i)
(i)
(i)
(i)
(i)
30
10
3
500
200
50
10
5
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
1
300 Hz (i)
100 Hz (i)
30 Hz (i)
10 Hz (i)
2
500 Hz AUTO
100 Hz AUTO
60
points separated by
Hz
4-22 Option 462
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty (p/o
2-19, Performace Test Record)
6. Impulse
and Resolution
Bandwidth
Switching
Uncertainty (p/o
2-19,
Performace
Record)
Step 5. Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth
Switching Uncertainty
Deviation
(MKR A
Allowable
Deviation
Res
BW
Frequency
Span
Readout,
1 MHz (i)
3 MHz (i)
5 MHz
5 MHz
5 MHz
500
0 (ref.)
0 (ref.)
1.0
0.5
300
100
30
10
3
(i)
0.5
(i)
(i)
(i)
0.5
500
0.5
50
0.5
(i)
(i)
50
0.5
1
10
0.5
1
300 Hz (i)
100 Hz (i)
30 Hz (i)
10 Hz (i)
0.5
1
0.8
200 Hz
100 Hz
2.0
Option 462 4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. 6
Resolution
Bandwidth
Adjustments
IF-Display Section
IF Control
Re fe re n c e
6
Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test
Relat ed Perform an ce
Te st
The CAL OUTPUT signal is connected to the RF INPUT. Each of the
adjustable resolution bandwidths is selected and adjusted for the
proper bandwidth.
Descript ion
No test equipment is required for this adjustment.
Equ ipm en t
Procedu re
Position the instrument upright and remove the top cover.
1.
Set the LINE switch to On, press
SIGNAL INPUT 1.
PRESET) and select
2.
Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 1.
3.
4. Key in (CENTER FREQUENCY) 100 MHz, [FREQUENCY SPAN) 5 MHz
MHz, and
5. Press [REFERENCE LEVEL) and adjust the DATA knob to place the
signal peak near the top CRT graticule. The signal should be
centered about the center line on the graticule.
6. Press PEAK SEARCH , MKR
and MARKER (al.
Using the DATA knob, adjust the marker down one side of the
7.
8.
9.
display signal to the 6
x
point; CRT MKR A annotation indicates
Adjust
maintaining the marker at
Figure 4-7 for the adjustment location.
3 MHz for MKR In] indication of 1.5 MHz while
X using the DATA knob. Refer to
Press MARKER Adjust the marker to the 6
point on the
opposite side of the signal (CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1.00
X. There are now two markers; one on each side of the signal at
the 6
point.
CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the 6
MHz bandwidth filter. The bandwidth should be 3.00 MHz
MHz
bandwidth of the 3
10.
11.
Key in
and
1 MHz,
SPAN) 2 MHz, (PEAK SEARCH),
If necessary, readjust by pressing
LEVEL) and using the DATA knob to place the signal
peak near the top of the graticule.
Press MARKER then MARKER
12.
4-24 Option 462
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. 6
Resolution Bandwidth Adjustments
13. Using the DATA knob, adjust the marker down one side of the
display signal to the 6
x.
point; CRT MKR A annotation indicates
I
IF CONTROL
\
~000000000000000000
000000000000000000
Figure 4-7. Location of Bandwidth Adjustments
1 MHz for MKR A indication of 500 while
14. Adjust
maintaining the marker at 0.500 X using the DATA knob. Refer to
Figure 4-7 for the adjustment location.
15. Press MARKER
Adjust marker to the opposite side of the
signal (CRT MKR A annotation indicate 1.00 X). There are now
two markers; one on each of the signal at the 6
point.
16. The CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the 6
bandwidth of
the 1 MHz bandwidth filter. The 6
bandwidth should be 1.00
MHz
MHz.
17. Key in
300
SPAN) 500
[PEAK SEARCH), and
If necessary, readjust by pressing
[REFERENCE LEVEL]] and using the DATA knob to place the
signal peak at the top of the graticule.
18. Press MARKER
19. Using the DATA knob, adjust the marker down one the displayed
signal to the 6 point; CRT MKR A annotation indicates X.
20. Adjust while
maintaining marker at
then MARKER
300
for MKR A indication of 150
X using the data knob. Refer to
Figure 4-7 for location of adjustment.
21. Press MARKER In]. Adjust the marker to the 6
point on the
opposite side of the signal (CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1.00
22. The CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the bandwidth of the
300
bandwidth filter. The bandwidth should be 300.00
23. Key in
10
If necessary, readjust by pressing
and using the DATA knob to place the signal
peak near the top of the graticule.
(FREQUENCY
20
[PEAK SEARCH),
and
Option 462 4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. 6
Resolution Bandwidth Adjustments
Press MARKER
then MARKER In].
24.
25.
Using the DATA knob, adjust the marker down one side of the
displayed signal to the 6
point; CRT MKR annotation indicates
x.
Adjust
10
maintaining the marker at
Figure 4-7 for the adjustment location.
for MKR A indication of 5.00
while
26.
27.
28.
X using the DATA knob. Refer to
Press MARKER Adjust the marker to the 6
opposite side of the signal (CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1.00
point on the
The CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the 6
bandwidth of
the 10 bandwidth filter. The bandwidth should be 10.0 fl.O
29. Key in
3
(FREQUENCY SPAN] 5
(PEAK SEARCH], and
If necessary, readjust by pressing [REFERENCE LEVEL]
and using the DATA knob to place the signal peak near the top of
the graticule.
30. Press MARKER
and MARKER
Using the DATA knob, adjust the marker down one side of the
31.
32.
33.
34.
displayed signal to the 6
point; CRT MKR A annotation
indicates
X.
Adjust
3
for MKR A indication of 1.5
while
maintaining the marker at
X using the DATA knob. Refer to
Figure 4-7 for the adjustment location.
Press MARKER In]. Adjust the marker to the 6
point on the
opposite side of the signal (CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1.00
The CRT MKR
annotation now indicates the 6
bandwidth
of the 3 bandwidth filter. The bandwidth should be 3.00
4-26 Option 462
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Impulse Bandwidth Adjustments
9. Impulse
Bandwidth
Adjustments
IF-Display Section
IF Control
Referen ce
Impulse Bandwidth Accuracy Test
Relat ed Perform an ce
Test
The CAL OUTPUT signal is connected to the SIGNAL INPUT 1. Each
of the adjustable resolution bandwidths is selected and adjusted for
the proper impulse bandwidth.
De s c rip t ion
No test equipment is required for this adjustment.
Equ ipm en t
Procedu re
1. Position the instrument upright and remove the top cover.
2. Set the LINE switch to On, press
SIGNAL INPUT 1.
PRESET), and select
3. Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 1.
4.
Key in (CENTER FREQUENCY) 100 MHz, [FREQUENCY
5 MHz
3 MHz, and
5. Press [REFERENCE LEVEL) and adjust the DATA knob to place the
signal peak near the top CRT graticule. The signal should be
centered about the center line on the graticule.
6. Press [PEAK SEARCH), MKR
and MARKER
7.
Using the DATA knob, adjust the marker down one side of
the display signal to the 7.3
point; CRT MKR A annotation
indicates 0.430 X
8. Adjust
3 MHz for MKR In] indication of 1.5 MHz while
maintaining the marker at 0.430 X using the DATA knob. Refer to
Figure 4-8 for the adjustment location.
9. Press MARKER In]. Adjust the marker to the 7.3
point on the
opposite side of the signal (CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1.00
X. There are now two markers; one on each side of the signal at
the 7.3
point.
CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the impulse bandwidth of
the 3 MHz bandwidth. Impulse bandwidth should be 3.00 MHz
MHz
10.
11. Key in
and
1 MHz, [FREQUENCY SPAN) 2 MHz, [PEAK SEARCH),
If necessary, readjust by pressing
[REFERENCE LEVEL) and using the DATA knob to place the signal
peak near the top of the graticule.
12. Press MARKER
then MARKER [al.
Option 462 4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Impulse Bandwidth Adjustments
13. Using the DATA knob, adjust the marker down one side of
the display signal to the 7.3
indicates 0.430 X.
point; CRT MKR A annotation
IF CONTROL
\
1
1
Figure 4-8. Location of Bandwidth Adjustments
1 MHz for MKR A indication of 500 while
14. Adjust
maintaining the marker at 0.430 X using the DATA knob. Refer to
Figure 4-8 for the adjustment location.
15. Press MARKER
signal (CRT MKR A annotation indicate 1.00 X). There are now
two markers; one on each of the signal at the 7.3 point.
Adjust marker to the opposite side of the
16. The CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the impulse bandwidth
of the 1 MHz bandwidth. The impulse bandwidth should be 1.00
MHz
MHz.
17. Key in
300
(FREQUENCY SPAN) 500
SEARCH), and
If necessary, readjust by pressing
[REFERENCE LEVEL]] and using the DATA knob to place the
signal peak at the top of the graticule.
18. Press MARKER
then MARKER
19. Using the DATA knob, adjust the marker down one the displayed
signal to the 7.3
X.
point; CRT MKR A annotation indicates 0.430
300 for MKR A indication of 150 while
20. Adjust
maintaining marker at 0.430 X using the data knob. Refer to
Figure 4-8 for location of adjustment.
21. Press MARKER
Adjust the marker to the 7.3
point on the
opposite side of the signal (CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1.00
22. The CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the impulse bandwidth
of the 300
300.00
bandwidth. The impulse bandwidth should be
23. Key in
and
10
[FREQUENCY SPAN] 20
[PEAK SEARCH),
If necessary, readjust by pressing
4-28 Option 462
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Impulse Bandwidth Adjustments
[REFERENCE LEVEL] and using the DATA knob to place the signal
peak near the top of the graticule.
24. Press MARKER
then MARKER (al.
25. Using the DATA knob, adjust the marker down one side of
the displayed signal to the 7.3
point; CRT MKR annotation
indicates 0.430 X.
26. Adjust
10
for MKR A indication of 5.00 while
maintaining the marker at 0.430 X using the DATA knob. Refer to
Figure 4-8 for the adjustment location.
27. Press MARKER
Adjust the marker to the 7.3
point on the
opposite side of the signal (CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1.00
28. The CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the impulse bandwidth
of the 10
fl.O
bandwidth. The impulse bandwidth should be 10.0
29. Key in
3
[FREQUENCY SPAN] 5
[PEAK SEARCH), and
If necessary, readjust by pressing [REFERENCE LEVEL)
and using the DATA knob to place the signal peak near the top of
the graticule.
30. Press MARKER
and MARKER
31. Using the DATA knob, adjust the marker down one side of the
displayed signal to the 7.3
indicates 0.430 X.
point; CRT MKR A annotation
for MKR A indication of 1.5 while
32. Adjust
3
maintaining the marker at 0.430 X using the DATA knob. Refer to
Figure 4-8 for the adjustment location.
33. Press MARKER In]. Adjust the marker to the 7.3
point on the
opposite side of the signal (CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1.00
34. The CRT MKR
bandwidth of the 3
should be 3.00
annotation now indicates the impulse
bandwidth. The impulse bandwidth
Option 462 4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Opt ion 8 5 7
This chapter contains a modified performance test for Option 857
instruments. When working on Option 857 instruments, substitute
the procedure in this chapter for the standard version contained in
Chapter 2. The procedure included in this chapter is listed below:
Introduction
Performance Tests
Test 12, Amplitude Fidelity Test.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Option 857 5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Option 857
Amplitude Fidelity
Test
Log Amplifier Adjustments
Relat ed Adju st m en t
Specificat ion
Log:
Incremental
fO.l
over 0 to 80
display
Cumulative
3 MHz to 30 Hz Resolution Bandwidth:
max over 0 to 70
max over 0 to 90
display (20
display
10 Hz Resolution Bandwidth:
max over 0 to 70
max over 0 to 90
display (20
display
Linear:
of Reference Level for top
divisions of display
Amplitude fidelity in log and linear modes is tested by decreasing the
signal level to the spectrum analyzer in 10 steps with a calibrated
Descript ion
signal source and measuring the displayed amplitude change with the
analyzer’s MARKER A function.
Figure 5-1. Option 857 Amplitude Fidelity Test Setup
5-2 Option 857
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Option 857 Amplitude Fidelity
Frequency Synthesizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP
Adapter, Type N (m) to BNC (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP 1250-0780
(2) BNC to BNC cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP
Equ ipm en t
Procedu re
Log Fidelity
1. On the spectrum analyzer, connect the CAL OUTPUT to INPUT 2.
Press
and adjust the FREQ ZERO pot for maximum
amplitude.
Press
PRESET] on the analyzer. Key in analyzer settings as
2.
follows:
MHZ
(CENTER FREQUENCY] ......................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[FREQUENCY
+ 10
(REFERENCE LEVEL) .......................................
3. Set the frequency synthesizer for an output frequency of 20.000
MHz and an output power level of + 10
increment for 10 steps.
Set the amplitude
4. Connect equipment as shown in Figure
5. Press MARKER [PEAK SEARCH),
to
center the signal on the display.
Press SWEEP
on the spectrum analyzer and wait for the
6.
sweep to be completed.
Press MARKER [PEAK SEARCH), MARKER In].
7.
8.
9.
Step the frequency synthesizer output amplitude down 10
On the spectrum analyzer, press SWEEP
and wait until
the sweep is completed. Press MARKER [PEAK SEARCH), and record
the marker A amplitude (a negative value) in column 2 of Table
Repeat steps 8 and 9, decreasing the output power from the
10.
11.
frequency synthesizer in 10
steps from -10
to -80
Subtract the value in column 1 from the value in column 2 for
each setting to find the fidelity error.
Option 857 5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Option 857 Amplitude
Fidelity Test
5-1. Log Amplitude Fidelity (10 Hz
Option 857)
Frequency
1
2
Fidelity Error
Cumulative
Error
Cumulative
Error
Synthesizer Calibrated MARKER A Amplitude (Column 2 Column 1)
Amplitude Amplitude
St ep
0 to 80
0 to 90
+
10
0
(ref)
-10
-20
-30
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
0 (ref)
0 (ref)
0
-10
-20
-30
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
12. Subtract the greatest negative fidelity error from the greatest
positive fidelity error for calibrated amplitude steps from -10
to -70
The results should be
13. Subtract the greatest negative fidelity error from the greatest
positive fidelity error for calibrated amplitude steps from -10
to -90
The results should be
14. Set the frequency synthesizer for output amplitude to + 10
15. Key in the following analyzer settings:
NCY
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
SWEEP
16. Press MARKER [PEAK SEARCH],
to center
the signal on the display.
17. Key in the following analyzer settings:
Y
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
...,....................................... 1 Hz
Hz
18. Press MARKER A. Step the frequency synthesizer output
amplitude from + 10 -80 in 10 steps, noting
the MARKER A amplitude (a negative value) at each step and
recording it in column 2 of 5-2. Allow several sweeps after
each step for the video filtered trace to reach its final ampltitude.
19. Subtract the value in column 1 from the value in column 2 for
each setting to find the fidelity error.
5-4 Option 857
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Option 857 Amplitude Fidelity
20. Subtract the greatest negative fidelity error from the greatest
positive fidelity error for calibrated amplitude steps from -10
to -70
The results should be
21. Subtract the greatest negative fidelity error from the greatest
positive fidelity error for calibrated amplitude steps from -10
to -90
The results should be
5-2. Log Amplitude Fidelity (10
Option 857)
Frequency
Synthesizer
Amplitude
1
2
Fidelity Error
Cumulative
Error
0 to 80
Cumulative
Error
0 to 90
MARKER A Amplitude (Column 2 Column 1)
Calibrated
Amplitude
St ep
0 (ref)
- 1 0
-2 0
-3 0
-4 0
-5 0
-6 0
-7 0
-8 0
-9 0
0 (ref)
0 (ref)
0
- 1 0
-2 0
-3 0
-4 0
-5 0
-6 0
-7 0
-8 0
Linear Fidelity
22. Key in analyzer settings as follows:
............................................... ..
300 Hz
20
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NCY
................................................ .. .
10
23. Set the frequency synthesizer for an output power level of + 10
24. Press SCALE LIN pushbutton. Press MARKER
[PEAK
to center the signal on the display.
to 1 Hz. Press (SHIFT),
25. Set (FREQUENCY SPAN) to 0 Hz and
(resolution bandwidth), MARKER
26. Decrease frequency synthesizer output amplitude by 10
steps,
. noting the MARKER A amplitude and recording it in column 2 of
5-3.
Option 857
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Option 857 Amplitude Fidelity Test
5-3. Linear Amplitude Fidelity
Allowable Range
Frequency MARKER A
Synthesizer Amplitude
of Reference Level)
Amplitude
.
Min
Max
5-6 Option 857
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Test
Record
Tested by
Hewlett-Packard Company
Report No.
Model HP
Date
Serial No.
IF-Display Section
RF Section
Option 857 5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test 12. Option
857 Amplitude
Fidelity Test
Step 9. Log Amplitude Fidelity (10
Option 857)
1
2
Fidelity Error
(Column 2 Column 1)
Frequency
Synthesizer
Cumulative
Error
0 to 90
MARKER A Amplitude
Calibrated
Amplitude Amplitude
St ep
Error
0 to 80
(ref)
0 (ref)
0 (ref)
-10
-20
-30
-40
-50
- 6 0
- 7 0
- 8 0
- 9 0
0
- 1 0
- 2 0
- 3 0
- 4 0
- 5 0
- 6 0
- 7 0
- 8 0
Step 18. Log Amplitude Fidelity (10
Option 857)
Cumulative
Error
0 to 90
1
2
Fidelity Error
Frequency
Error
0 to 80
MARKER A Amplitude (Column 2 Column 1)
Synthesizer Calibrated
Amplitude Amplitude
St ep
0 (ref)
0 (ref)
0 (ref)
0
- 1 0
- 2 0
- 3 0
- 4 0
- 5 0
- 6 0
- 7 0
- 8 0
-10
- 2 0
- 3 0
- 4 0
- 5 0
- 6 0
- 7 0
- 8 0
- 9 0
Option 857
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test 12. Option 857 Amplitude Fidelity
Step 26. Linear Amplitude Fidelity
Allowable Range
of Reference Level)
Frequency MARKER A
Synthesizer Amplitude
Amplitude
Min
Max
10.87
-9.21
0
-17.72
-23.10
-10
Option 857 5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Major Assem bly an d Com pon en t Locat ion s
See Figure
Assembly
IF-Display Section
Figure Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6-4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5
6-7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5
6-4, 6-5
6-4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5 6-7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5 6-6, 6-7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5
6-4, 6-5
6-4, 6-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5
6-7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7
6-6
6-6
6-6
6-4
6-4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6, 6-7
6-6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4, 6-5
6-7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Major Assembly and Component locations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-7
6-7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6-7
6-7
6-7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Assembly
See Figure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
RF Section Figure
Index
6-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-3
6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..6-2. 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
A l l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-3
6-3
6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-2 Major Assembly and Component locations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2, 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cl
6-1, 6-3
6-1, 6-3
6-1, 6-3
6-1, 6-3
6-1, 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1, 6-2
Major Assembly and Component locations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figure
RF Section, Top View
6-4
Major Assembly and Component locations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 2 7
1
(
INP UT S E LE C T)
Figure 6-2. RF Section, Front View
Major Assembly and Component locations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
1
Al
1
1
Figure 6-3. RF Section, Bottom View
Major Assembly and Component locations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
\
A
1
6-4. IF Section, Top View (SN
and Below)
Figure
Major Assembly and Component locations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
l
0
0
Figure 6-5. IF Section, Top View (SN
and Above)
Major Assembly and Component locations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figure 6-6. IF Section, Front View
6-9
Major Assembly and Component locations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
A
(
S
N
a n d a b o v e )
\
Figure 6-7. IF Section, Bottom View
Major Assembly and Component locations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|